Yamaha | MONTAGE6 | manual | MONTAGE Reference Manual

MUSIC SYNTHESIZER
Reference Manual
Contents
Using the MONTAGE Manuals ..................................2
Reference
Basic Structure
Display (touch panel) configuration ...................... 24
3
24
Performance Play (Home)....................................... 26
Functional Blocks ......................................................3
Motion Control......................................................... 28
Tone Generator Block................................................4
Mixing ....................................................................... 44
Tone Generator block ...................................................... 4
Scene........................................................................ 49
A/D Input Block ........................................................10
Play/Rec ................................................................... 54
Sequencer Block ......................................................10
Normal Part (AWM2) Edit........................................ 58
Arpeggio Block.........................................................11
Element Common Edit (Common) .................................58
Arpeggio categories....................................................... 11
Element Edit (Element) ..................................................94
Sub categories............................................................... 11
Element All (All Element) .............................................117
Arpeggio Type Name..................................................... 12
Drum Part Edit ....................................................... 119
Arpeggio-related settings............................................... 13
Arpeggio playback types................................................ 15
Motion Sequencer Block .........................................16
Key Common Edit (Common) ......................................119
Key Edit (Key) ..............................................................126
Normal Part (FM-X) Edit ........................................ 131
Effect Block ..............................................................18
Operator Common Edit (Common) ..............................131
Effect structure............................................................... 18
Operator Edit (Operator) ..............................................141
Effect connection ........................................................... 19
Common/Audio Edit (Common/Audio)................ 145
About the Vocoder Effect............................................... 19
Envelope Follower Block.........................................20
Category Search.................................................... 161
Performance Category Search.....................................161
Controller Block .......................................................21
Arpeggio Category Search (Arp Category Search)......163
Keyboard ....................................................................... 21
Waveform Category Search (Waveform Search).........164
Pitch Bend wheel ........................................................... 21
Utility ...................................................................... 165
Modulation wheel........................................................... 21
Ribbon Controller........................................................... 21
Assignable Switches...................................................... 21
Knobs/Control Sliders .................................................... 22
Super Knob.................................................................... 22
Internal Memory .......................................................22
Live Set................................................................... 183
Live Set ........................................................................183
Live Set Edit (Edit) .......................................................184
Live Set Register (Register) .........................................186
Connecting an iPhone or iPad ............................. 187
EN
Using the MONTAGE Manuals
Your MONTAGE6/MONTAGE7/MONTAGE8 synthesizer comes with four different reference guides — the Owner’s Manual, the
Reference Manual (this document), the Synthesizer Parameter Manual, and the Data List. While the Owner’s Manual is
packaged together with the synthesizer as a hardcopy booklet, this Reference Manual, the Synthesizer Parameter Manual, and
the Data List are available for download from our web page as PDF documents.
Owner’s Manual (hardcopy booklet)
Describes how to set up your MONTAGE6/MONTAGE7/MONTAGE8 and how to perform basic operations.
This manual explains the following operations.
• Quick Guide — Selecting Performances
• Quick Guide — Playing the Keyboard
• Quick Guide — Creating Your Own Live Sets
• Quick Guide — Editing the Settings
• Recording and Playback
• Using as a Master Keyboard
• Connecting a Microphone or Audio Equipment
• Making Global System Settings
• Connecting External MIDI Instruments
• Using a Connected Computer
• Saving/Loading Data
Reference Manual (this PDF document)
Describes the internal design of your MONTAGE6/MONTAGE7/MONTAGE8 and the various parameters that can be adjusted
and set.
Synthesizer Parameter Manual (PDF document)
Explains the Part parameters, effect types, effect parameters, and MIDI messages that are used for synthesizers incorporating
the Yamaha AWM2 and FM-X tone generators. Read the Owner’s Manual and Reference Manual first and then use this
parameter manual, if necessary, to learn more about parameters and terms that relate to Yamaha synthesizers.
Data List (PDF document)
Provides lists such as the Waveform List, Performance List, Effect Type List, Arpeggio Type List, as well as reference materials
such as the MIDI Implementation Chart.
Using the Reference Manual
Select the display name tab
Select the function
• Using the display name tabs along the upper part of each page from the
Reference section, you can jump to the page for parameter
explanations of the corresponding display.
• You can click on any page number from the Table of Contents or within
descriptive text to jump to the corresponding page.
• You can also click on desired items and topics you want to refer to in the
“Bookmarks” index to the left of the main window, and jump to the
corresponding page. (Click the “Bookmarks” tab to open the index if it is
not displayed.)
• If you want to find information on a specific topic, function or feature,
select “Find” or “Search” from the Adobe Reader “Edit” menu and enter
a key word to locate the related information anywhere in the document.
NOTE The most-recent version of Adobe® Reader® can be downloaded from the
following web page.
http://www.adobe.com/products/reader/
NOTE The names and positions of menu items may vary according to the version
of Adobe Reader being used.
Information
• The illustrations and LCD screens as shown in this manual are for instructional purposes only, and may appear somewhat
different from those on your instrument.
• All other trademarks are the property of their respective holders.
• iPhone, iPad, iPod touch, and Lightning are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.
• IOS is a trademark or registered trademark of Cisco in the U.S. and other countries and is used under license.
MONTAGE Reference Manual
2
Basic Structure
Basic Structure
Functional blocks
Tone Generator block
A/D Input block
Sequencer block
Functional Blocks
Arpeggio block
The MONTAGE6/MONTAGE7/MONTAGE8 system consists of eight main functional blocks: Tone
Generator, A/D Input, Sequencer, Motion Sequencer, Arpeggio, Controller, Effect, and Envelope Follower.
Motion Sequencer block
Effect block
Envelope Follower block
Control Message Flow
Controller Block (page 21)
Audio Signal Flow
Motion Sequencer Block
(page 16)
Keyboard
Controllers
(such as Super Knob)
Controller block
Internal Memory
Reference
Display (touch panel) config.
Performance Play (Home)
Tone Generator (page 4)
Motion Control
Effects (page 18)
AWM2 Tone Generator
FM-X Tone Generator
16 Parts
Performances
Mixing
System Effects
17 Insertion Effects
Element EQ
Part EQ
Master Effect
Master EQ
Scene
Play/Rec
Normal Part (AWM) Edit
Drum Part Edit
Sequencer Block
(page 10)
Arpeggio Block
(page 11)
16-Track
MIDI Sequencer
Songs
Arpeggio Playback x 8
Preset Arpeggio
User Arpeggio
Normal Part (FM-X) Edit
Common/Audio Edit
Envelope
Follower Block
(page 20)
A/D Input
(page 10)
Category Search
Utility
Live Set
iPhone/iPad connection
MIDI OUT
MIDI IN
AUDIO IN
AUDIO OUT
[USB TO HOST]
MIDI [OUT]
[USB TO HOST]
MIDI [IN]
[USB TO HOST]
A/D INPUT [L/MONO]/[R]
[USB TO HOST]
OUTPUT [L/MONO]/[R]
ASSIGNABLE OUTPUT [L]/[R]
Computer
External MIDI equipment
Computer
Microphone, Computer
audio equipment,
etc.
Powered
speakers, etc.
AWM2 (Advanced Wave Memory 2)
This instrument is equipped with an AWM2 tone generator block. AWM2 (Advanced Wave Memory 2)
is a synthesis system based on sampled waves (sound material), and is used in many Yamaha
synthesizers. For extra realism, each AWM2 Voice uses multiple samples of a real instrument’s
waveform. Furthermore, a wide variety of parameters—envelope generator, filter, modulation, and
others—can be applied.
MONTAGE Reference Manual
3
Basic Structure
FM-X
This synthesizer also features an FM-X tone generator, in addition to the AWM2 block. The
abbreviation “FM” of FM-X stands for “frequency modulation,” which is a special tone generation
system that uses the frequency of one waveform to modulate another waveform, in order to produce a
completely new one. In this synthesizer, there are eight FM Operators and a full 88 different Algorithm
types. By changing the operator combination patterns, controlling the modulation with other
parameters such as levels and envelopes, and using high-quality filters, effects, and EQ commonly
with AWM2, you can create richly textured sounds that change in a highly complex fashion.
Functional blocks
Tone Generator block
A/D Input block
Sequencer block
Arpeggio block
Motion Sequencer block
Effect block
Envelope Follower block
Controller block
Tone Generator Block
The tone generator block is what actually produces sound in response to the MIDI messages received
from the Sequencer block, Controller block, Arpeggio block and from the external MIDI instrument. The
MIDI messages are assigned to sixteen independent channels, and the instrument is capable of
simultaneously playing sixteen separate Parts, via the sixteen MIDI channels. However, the sixteenchannel limit can be overcome by using separate MIDI “ports,” each supporting sixteen channels. The
tone generator block of this instrument can handle MIDI messages over Port 1.
Tone Generator block
Internal Memory
Reference
Display (touch panel) config.
Performance Play (Home)
Motion Control
Mixing
Scene
Play/Rec
Normal Part (AWM) Edit
Performances
A Performance is a single set of sounds consisting of multiple Parts. You can change sounds as desired by
selecting the appropriate Performance. Each Performance has two types of parameters; parameters
unique to each Part and parameters common to all Parts. You can edit the entire Performance in the
Common/Audio Edit display (page 145).
Drum Part Edit
Normal Part (FM-X) Edit
Common/Audio Edit
Category Search
Utility
Live Set
Part structure of a Performance
iPhone/iPad connection
A Performance consists of 16 Parts and you can create Performances (in which multiple Parts or Parts are
combined—in a layer, or in other configurations) using the keyboard.
Parts
Internally, there are three Part types: Normal Parts (AWM2), Normal Parts (FM-X), and Drum Parts. Normal
Parts (AWM2) are mainly pitched musical instrument type sounds that can be played over the full range of
the keyboard. Normal Parts (FM-X) are also mainly pitched musical instrument type sounds, using FM
synthesis. Drum Parts are mainly percussion/drum sounds that are assigned to individual notes. A Normal
Part (AWM2) can consist of up to eight Elements, a Normal Part (FM-X) can consist of up to eight
Operators, and a Drum Part can consist of up to 73 Drum Keys.
An Element/Operator/Drum Key is the basic, smallest unit for a Part. By combining multiple Elements/
Operators/Keys, Parts can be created to produce even more realistic sounds or various richly textured
types of sound. Each Part is created by editing parameters unique to each (Element Edit parameters/
Operator Edit parameters/Key Edit parameters) and parameters common to all the Elements/Operators/
Keys (Element Common Edit, Operator Common Edit, and Key Common Edit parameters.)
NOTE For instructions on editing a Normal Part (AWM2), see page 58. For instructions on editing a Normal Part (FM-X),
see page 131. For instructions on editing a Drum Part, see page 119.
MONTAGE Reference Manual
4
Basic Structure
Normal Parts (AWM2), Normal Parts (FM-X), and Drum Parts
Functional blocks
Normal Parts (AWM2)
Tone Generator block
These Parts are played conventionally from the
Element 2 Element 4 Element 6
keyboard, with standard pitches sounding for each key,
Velocity
generated by AWM2. A Normal Part consists of up to
eight Elements. Depending on the settings in the Part
Element 1 Element 3 Element 5
Edit, these Elements are sounded simultaneously, or
different Elements are sounded according to the note
range, velocity range and the XA (Expanded
Articulation) settings (page 6).
The illustration shows an example of a Normal Part (AWM2). Since the six Elements here are distributed
across both the note range of the keyboard and the velocity range, a different Element sounds depending
on which note you play and how strongly you play it. In the velocity distribution, Elements 1, 3 and 5 sound
when playing the keyboard softly, while Elements 2, 4 and 6 sound when playing it strongly. In the note
distribution, Elements 1 and 2 sound in the lower range of the keyboard, Elements 3 and 4 sound in the
middle range, and Elements 5 and 6 sound in the higher range. In the velocity distribution, Elements 1, 3
and 5 sound when playing the keyboard softly, while Elements 2, 4 and 6 sound when playing it strongly. In
a practical example of this in use, a piano Part could be composed of six different samples. Elements 1, 3
and 5 would be the sounds of the piano played softly, over the respective note ranges, while Elements 2, 4
and 6 would be strongly played sounds, for each respective note range. Actually, this instrument is even
more flexible than this, since it allows up to eight independent Elements.
A/D Input block
Sequencer block
Arpeggio block
Motion Sequencer block
Effect block
Envelope Follower block
Controller block
Internal Memory
Reference
Display (touch panel) config.
Performance Play (Home)
Motion Control
Mixing
Scene
Normal Parts (FM-X)
Play/Rec
These Parts are also played conventionally from the keyboard, with standard pitches sounding for each
key, generated by FM synthesis. The sound for a Normal Part (FM-X) is created by modulating a frequency
of a fundamental waveform with another waveform. An operator that generates a fundamental waveform is
a “carrier,” and an operator that modulates these waveforms is a “modulator.” The combination of a
number of Operators is called “Algorithm.”
When the waveform output from the Operator is a simple sine wave, no harmonics are included other than
the fundamental tone. However, you can create harmonics by modulating the waveform with other
Operators. How harmonics can be created depends on the Modulators’ output levels and the frequency
rates of Carriers and Modulators. On the other hand, the basic pitch is determined by Carrier’s frequency,
and the output level is determined by the Carrier’s output level. The figure described below shows a basic
way to create FM sound by using an analog synthesizer.
Modulator OP
Frequency ratio of the
Modulator and the Carrier
determines the base waveform
including specific harmonics by
the Oscillator.
Normal Part (AWM) Edit
Drum Part Edit
Normal Part (FM-X) Edit
Common/Audio Edit
Category Search
Utility
Live Set
iPhone/iPad connection
Modulator output level
determines the Cutoff
Frequency of the Filter.
Modulation
Modulator envelope determines
the Filter envelope.
Carrier OP
Carrier frequency determines
the pitch of the Oscillator.
Carrier output level
determines the volume
by using the amplifier.
Carrier envelope determines
the amplifier envelope.
Although the figure described above shows waveforms which are generated by two operators, the
MONTAGE has eight Operators. The combination of a number of Operators is called an “Algorithm” and
this synthesizer has parameters for setting the Algorithm.
Drum Parts
Drum Parts are mainly percussion/drum sounds
that are assigned to individual notes on the
keyboard (C0 to C6). Unlike Elements, a Drum
C0
C1
key is equivalent to the corresponding note,
Individual drum
meaning that you cannot change its range.
sounds
(different for
Drum or percussion sounds are assigned to
each Drum Key. You can create various types of each key)
Drum Parts by changing the drum or percussion sound assigned to each key and edit the parameters
such as pitch and EG.
MONTAGE Reference Manual
C6
5
Expanded Articulation (XA)
Basic Structure
Functional blocks
Expanded Articulation (XA) is a tone generation system that provides greater performance flexibility and
acoustic realism. This feature allows you to more effectively recreate realistic sound and natural
performance techniques—such as legato and staccato—and provides other unique modes for random
and alternate sound changes as you play.
Tone Generator block
Realistic legato performance
Motion Sequencer block
This instrument more accurately reproduces a legato effect by allowing specific Elements to be sounded
when playing legato and other Elements to be played normally (with the XA Control parameter settings
“Normal” and “Legato”).
Effect block
A/D Input block
Sequencer block
Arpeggio block
Envelope Follower block
Controller block
Authentic note release sound
Internal Memory
The MONTAGE reproduces these special, characteristic sounds by setting the XA Control parameter of
certain Elements to “Key Off.”
Subtle sound variations for each note played
The MONTAGE more accurately reproduces these subtle sound variations by using the XA Control
parameter settings “Cycle” and “Random.”
Reference
Display (touch panel) config.
Performance Play (Home)
Motion Control
Switching among different sounds to recreate the natural performance on an
acoustic instrument
Acoustic instruments have their own unique characteristics—even specific, unique sounds that are
produced only at certain times in a performance. These include the flutter tonguing on a flute or the
playing of high harmonics on an acoustic guitar. The MONTAGE recreates these by allowing you to switch
between the sounds while you play—using the [ASSIGN 1]/[ASSIGN 2] buttons and the XA Control
parameter settings, “A.SW1 On,” “A.SW2 On” and “A.SW Off.”
NOTE You can turn the [ASSIGN 1]/[ASSIGN 2] button on or off also by transmitting the Control Change number
specified in the Common/Audio Edit display ([Control]  [Control Number]) (page 153) from an external device.
Mixing
Scene
Play/Rec
Normal Part (AWM) Edit
Drum Part Edit
Normal Part (FM-X) Edit
Common/Audio Edit
Category Search
New sounds and new styles of playing
The highly versatile functions above can be applied effectively not only to acoustic sounds but also to
synthesizer and electronic Parts as well. The XA feature opens up enormous potential for realizing
authentic sounds, performing expressively and coming up with creative new styles of playing.
Utility
Live Set
iPhone/iPad connection
Motion Control System
The Motion Control System is a completely new feature for variably controlling Motions (rhythmical,
multidimensional sound changes) in real time. This amazingly powerful feature dramatically and
dynamically alters the sounds of the instrument in new, never-heard-before ways—changing texturally,
rhythmically with the beats, providing cool, colorful lighting effects, and responding expressively to your
creative passion. The Motion Control System has three main functions:
Super Knob:
For creating multi-dimensional sonic changes, and enhancing those changes with colorful, continually
shifting lighting changes. Multiple parameters can be controlled simultaneously.
Motion Sequencer:
For continually variable sound changes. The powerful Motion Sequencer feature lets you dynamically
change sounds by operating Parameters depending on sequences created in advance. It provides real
time control for changing sounds depending on various sequences such as Tempo, Arpeggio, or the
rhythm of external connected devices.
Envelope Follower:
Envelope Follower is a function for detecting the volume envelope of the input signal waveform and
modifying sounds dynamically.
NOTE Envelope Follower can be controlled not only by the audio signal from an external device, but also by the output
of all Parts.
MONTAGE Reference Manual
6
Basic Structure
Motion Control System Structure
Functional blocks
Tone Generator block
• Continuous control of
Motion changes
A/D Input block
• Switch between Motions
Arpeggio block
• Trigger, Hold
Motion Sequencer block
Sequencer block
Effect block
Control the Motion
Sequencer in real time
AUDIO
• Part 1 – 16
• A/D Input Part
Envelope Follower
Controller block
• Audio Beat Sync
• External MIDI
• Internal Tempo
BEAT
Envelope Follower block
Internal Memory
Super Knob
Motion Sequencer
Reference
Display (touch panel) config.
Performance Play (Home)
Motion Control
Mixing
Scene
Play/Rec
Automation
Rhythmic change
Normal Part (AWM) Edit
Drum Part Edit
Normal Part (FM-X) Edit
Common/Audio Edit
Category Search
Utility
Live Set
iPhone/iPad connection
Multi-dimensional
sonic change
Tone generator
Effect
For details on the Motion Control, refer to the website below:
http://www.yamaha.com/montage/
MONTAGE Reference Manual
7
Basic Structure
Elements, Drum Keys and Operators
Functional blocks
Elements/Drum Keys/Operators are the smallest “building blocks” in the MONTAGE that comprise a Part.
These small sound units can be built, enhanced and processed by a variety of traditional synthesizer
parameters, such as Pitch EG, Filter EG, Amplitude EG, and LFO (shown below).
Tone Generator block
A/D Input block
Sequencer block
Arpeggio block
LFO
Motion Sequencer block
Low Frequency Oscillator
Effect block
Envelope Follower block
Controller block
Internal Memory
OSC (Oscillator)
Waveform (AWM2)
PITCH
FILTER
AMP
Changes the tonal
quality of the
sound.
Controls the output
level (amplitude) of
the sound.
Reference
Display (touch panel) config.
Controls the pitch of
the sound.
Performance Play (Home)
Motion Control
Pitch EG
Filter EG
Amplitude EG
(Pitch Envelope
Generator)
(Filter Envelope
Generator)
(Amplitude Envelope
Generator)
Oscillator
This unit allows you to assign the waveform (or basic sound material) to each Element/Operator/Key.
Oscillator-related parameters can be set as follows.
• For Normal Parts (AWM2) and Drum Parts
[EDIT]  Part selection  Element selection  [Osc/Tune] (page 94, page 126)
• For Normal Parts (FM-X)
[EDIT]  Part selection  Operator selection  [Form/Freq] (page 141)
Mixing
Scene
Play/Rec
Normal Part (AWM) Edit
Drum Part Edit
Normal Part (FM-X) Edit
Common/Audio Edit
Category Search
Utility
Live Set
iPhone/iPad connection
Pitch
This unit allows you to control how the pitch changes over time. Pitch-related parameters can be set as
follows.
• For Normal Parts (AWM2) and Drum Parts
[EDIT]  Part selection  Element selection  [Osc/Tune] (page 94, page 126)
• For Normal Parts (FM-X)
[EDIT]  Part selection  ELEMENT/OPERATOR [COMMON]  [Pitch/Filter] (page 134)
Parameters related to Pitch EG can be set as follows.
• For Normal Parts (AWM2)
[EDIT]  Part selection  Element selection  [Pitch EG] (page 98)
• For Normal Parts (FM-X)
[EDIT]  Part selection  ELEMENT/OPERATOR [COMMON]  [Pitch/Filter] (page 134)
Filter
This unit modifies the tone of the sound by cutting the output of a specific frequency portion of the sound.
Also, by setting the FEG (Filter Envelope Generator), you can control how the Cutoff Frequency of the Filter
changes over time. Parameters related to Filter and Filter EG can be set as follows.
• For Normal Parts (AWM2) and Drum Parts
[EDIT]  Part selection  Element selection  [Filter] (page 100, page 128)
• For Normal Parts (FM-X)
[EDIT]  Part selection  ELEMENT/OPERATOR [COMMON]  [Pitch/Filter] (page 134)
MONTAGE Reference Manual
8
Amplitude
This unit controls the output level (amplitude) of the Element/Drum Key/Operator.
Parameters related to Amplitude and Amplitude EG can be set as follows.
• For Normal Parts (AWM2)
[EDIT]  Part selection  Element selection  [Amplitude] (page 108)
• For Drum Parts
[EDIT]  Part selection  Element selection  [Level/Pan] (page 129)
• For Normal Parts (FM-X)
[EDIT]  Part selection  Operator selection  [Level] (page 143)
Basic Structure
Functional blocks
Tone Generator block
A/D Input block
Sequencer block
Arpeggio block
Motion Sequencer block
Effect block
Envelope Follower block
LFO (Low Frequency Oscillator)
As its name suggests, the LFO produces a wave of a low frequency.
These waves can be used to vary the pitch, filter or amplitude of each Element/Operator to create effects
such as vibrato, wah and tremolo. There are two LFO types: Part LFO, which is common to all Elements/
Operators, and Element LFO, which is unique for each Element.
Parameters related to Part LFO can be set as follows.
• For Normal Parts (AWM2)
[EDIT]  Part selection  ELEMENT/OPERATOR [COMMON]  [Mod/Control]  [Part LFO] (page 85)
• For Normal Parts (FM-X)
[EDIT]  Part selection  ELEMENT/OPERATOR [COMMON]  [Mod/Control]  [Part LFO] or [2nd LFO]
(page 138)
Parameters related to Element LFO can be set as follows.
[EDIT]  Part selection  Element selection  [Element LFO] (page 113)
Controller block
Internal Memory
Reference
Display (touch panel) config.
Performance Play (Home)
Motion Control
Mixing
Scene
Play/Rec
Normal Part (AWM) Edit
Drum Part Edit
Normal Part (FM-X) Edit
Maximum Polyphony
Common/Audio Edit
Maximum polyphony refers to the highest number of notes that can be sounded simultaneously from
the internal tone generator of the instrument.
The maximum polyphony of this synthesizer is 128 for each AWM2 and FM-X. When the internal tone
generator block receives a number of notes exceeding the maximum polyphony, previously played
notes are cut off. Keep in mind that this may be especially noticeable with Parts not having decay.
Furthermore, the maximum polyphony applies to the number of Elements/Drum Keys used, not the
number of Parts. When Normal Parts (AWM2) that include up to eight Elements are used, the
maximum number of simultaneous notes may be less than 128.
Category Search
MONTAGE Reference Manual
Utility
Live Set
iPhone/iPad connection
9
A/D Input Block
This block handles the audio signal input from the A/D INPUT [L/MONO]/[R] jacks. Various parameters
such as volume, pan, and effect can be set for the audio signal and the sound is output together with other
Parts. An Insertion Effect, the System Effects, the Master Effects, and the Master EQ can be applied to the
audio signal input via the A/D INPUT [L/MONO]/[R] jacks.
Parameters related to the A/D Input block can be set as follows.
[PERFORMANCE]  [Mixing] (page 44)
[EDIT]  PART [COMMON]  [Audio In]  [Mixing] (page 147)
The Effect which is applied to the audio signal input from the A/D INPUT [L/MONO]/[R] jacks can be set as
follows.
[EDIT]  PART [COMMON]  [Audio In]  [Routing] (page 148)
The gain of the audio signal from the A/D INPUT [L/MONO]/[R] jacks can be adjusted via the A/D INPUT
[GAIN] knob on the panel. Moreover, the on/off setting of the audio signal from the A/D INPUT [L/MONO]/
[R] jacks can be turned on/off via the A/D INPUT [ON/OFF] button.
[UTILITY]  [Settings]  [Audio I/O]  “A/D Input” (page 168)
Basic Structure
Functional blocks
Tone Generator block
A/D Input block
Sequencer block
Arpeggio block
Motion Sequencer block
Effect block
Envelope Follower block
Controller block
Internal Memory
Reference
Display (touch panel) config.
Performance Play (Home)
Motion Control
Mixing
Sequencer Block
This lets you create Songs by recording and editing your performances as MIDI data (from the controller
block or an external device), allowing you to play the data back with the tone generator block.
Scene
Play/Rec
Normal Part (AWM) Edit
Drum Part Edit
Normal Part (FM-X) Edit
Songs
A Song is created by recording your keyboard performance as MIDI sequence data to individual Tracks.
The MONTAGE can store up to 64 Songs.
Common/Audio Edit
Category Search
Utility
Live Set
iPhone/iPad connection
Tracks
This is a memory location on the sequencer where your musical performances are stored. One Part can be
recorded to one track. Since the MONTAGE has 16 tracks for one Song, you can record and play back a
16-Part performance.
MIDI recording
You can record your keyboard performance to the Song. You can record knob operations, controller
operations and Arpeggio playback as well as your keyboard playing to the specified Track as MIDI events.
Your keyboard performance and controller/knob operations will be recorded to the Track when the
corresponding Keyboard Control Switch for the Part is turned ON.
NOTE The Control Change messages and Parameter Change messages can be recorded by operating the Knobs. For
details on Control Change messages, see the Synthesizer Parameter Manual PDF document.
NOTE For detailed instruction, refer to the Owner’s Manual.
MONTAGE Reference Manual
10
Basic Structure
Arpeggio Block
This block lets you automatically trigger musical and rhythmic phrases by simply pressing a note or notes
on the keyboard. Yamaha’s Arpeggio sequence also changes in response to the actual notes or chords
you play, giving you a wide variety of inspiring musical phrases and ideas—both in composing and
performing.
Functional blocks
Tone Generator block
A/D Input block
Sequencer block
Arpeggio block
Arpeggio categories
Motion Sequencer block
The Arpeggio types are divided into 18 categories (including “No Assign” and “Control/Hybrid Seq”) as
listed below. The categories are based on instrument type.
Effect block
Arpeggio Type Category List
Controller block
Envelope Follower block
Internal Memory
Piano
Piano
Pad
Pad/Choir
Keys
Keyboard
SynCp
Syn Comp
Organ
Organ
CPerc
Chromatic Perc
Gtr
Guitar
Dr/Pc
Drum/Perc
Display (touch panel) config.
Bass
Bass
S.FX
Sound FX
Performance Play (Home)
Str
String
M.FX
Musical FX
Motion Control
Brass
Brass
Ethnc
Ethnic
Mixing
WW
Woodwind
---
No Assign
Scene
SynLd
Syn Lead
Ct/Hb
Control / Hybrid Seq
Play/Rec
Reference
Normal Part (AWM) Edit
Sub categories
Drum Part Edit
The Arpeggio categories are divided into the sub categories listed below. Because the sub categories are
listed based on the music genre, it is easy to find the sub category appropriate for your desired music
style.
Common/Audio Edit
Normal Part (FM-X) Edit
Arpeggio Type Sub Category List
Category Search
Utility
Live Set
Rock
Rock
World
World
Pop Rock
Pop Rock
General
General
Ballad
Ballad
No Assign
No Assign
Chill
Chillout / Ambient
Filter
Filter *
Hip Hop
Hip Hop
Exprs
Expression *
Funk
Funk
Pan
Pan *
Modern R&B
Modern R&B
Mod
Modulation *
Classic R&B
Classic R&B
PBend
Pitch Bend *
House
House / Dance Pop
Assign
Assign 1/2 *
Techno
Techno / Trance
Comb
Comb *
Jazz
Jazz / Swing
Zone
Zone Velocity *
D&B
D&B / Breakbeats
Z.Pad
Zone Vel for Pad *
Latin
Latin
iPhone/iPad connection
NOTE In the Category Search display, the Sub Categories marked with an asterisk (*) are displayed only when
“Control/Hybrid Seq” is selected as the Category type.
MONTAGE Reference Manual
11
Basic Structure
Arpeggio Type Name
Functional blocks
The Arpeggio Types are named according to certain rules and abbreviations. Once you understand these
rules and abbreviations, you’ll find it easy to browse through and select the desired Arpeggio Types.
Tone Generator block
A/D Input block
Arpeggio types with “_N” at the end of the type name (example: HipHop1_N)
Sequencer block
These Arpeggios are for using with the Normal Part, and Arpeggios with complex notes can be created
even when triggered by one note (page 15).
Arpeggio block
Arpeggio types with “_C” at the end of the type name (example: Rock1_C)
Effect block
These Arpeggios are for using with the Normal Part, and correct Arpeggios can be created corresponding
to the chord you play (page 15).
Envelope Follower block
Arpeggio types with a normal name (example: UpOct1)
Internal Memory
In addition to the above types, there are three playback types: the Arpeggios created for use of Normal
Parts and played back using only the played notes and their octave notes (page 15), the Arpeggios
created for use of Drum Parts (page 15), and Arpeggios containing mainly non-note events (page 16).
Arpeggio types with “_AF1”, “_AF2”, or “_AF1&2” at the end of the type name
(example: Electro Pop AF1)
When these Arpeggios are played, both of [ASSIGN 1] and [ASSIGN 2] buttons are automatically turned
ON and the phrase starts playback.
Motion Sequencer block
Controller block
Reference
Display (touch panel) config.
Performance Play (Home)
Motion Control
Mixing
Scene
Arpeggio types with [Mg] at the beginning of the type name (example:
[Mg]HardRock1)
These Arpeggios are for using with a Mega Voice.
Play/Rec
Normal Part (AWM) Edit
Drum Part Edit
Normal Part (FM-X) Edit
Common/Audio Edit
Mega Voices and Mega Voice Arpeggios
Normal sound uses velocity switching to make the sound quality and/or level of a Part change
according to how strongly or softly you play the keyboard—giving greater authenticity and natural
response to these Parts. However Mega Voices have a very complex structure with many different
layers that are not suitable for playing manually. Mega Voices were developed specifically to be
played by Mega Voice Arpeggios to produce incredibly realistic results. You should always use Mega
Voices with Mega Voice Arpeggios.
Category Search
Utility
Live Set
iPhone/iPad connection
The Arpeggio Type List in the Data List PDF document contains the following columns.
Main
Sub
ARP
Category Category No.
ApKb
Rock
1
ARP Name
MA_70s Rock _ES
Time
Original
Random
Signature Length Tempo Accent
SFX
4/4
2
Sound Type
130
Acoustic Piano
:
ApKb
Rock
2
MB_70s Rock _ES
4/4
1
130
ApKb
Rock
3
MC_70s Rock
4/4
2
130
ApKb
Rock
4
MD_70s Rock
4/4
4
130
ApKb
Rock
5
FA_70s Rock
4/4
1
130
ApKb
Rock
6
FB_70s Rock _ES
4/4
1
130
ApKb
Rock
7
FC_70s Rock _ES
4/4
2
130
NOTE Note that this list is for illustration purposes only. For a complete listing of the Arpeggio Types, see the Data List
PDF document.
1 Main Category
Indicates an Arpeggio Main Category.
2 Sub Category
Indicates an Arpeggio Sub Category.
3 ARP No (Arpeggio Number)
Indicates the Arpeggio type number.
4 ARP Name (Arpeggio Name)
Indicates the Arpeggio Name.
MONTAGE Reference Manual
12
Basic Structure
5 Time Signature
Indicates the time signature or meter of the Arpeggio type.
Functional blocks
Tone Generator block
6 Length
Indicates the data length (amount of measures) of the Arpeggio type. When the Loop parameter
set to “off,” the Arpeggio plays back for this length and stops.
*1
is
A/D Input block
Sequencer block
Arpeggio block
7 Original Tempo
Indicates the appropriate tempo value of the Arpeggio type. Note that this tempo is not set
automatically when selecting an Arpeggio type.
Motion Sequencer block
Effect block
Envelope Follower block
8 Accent
The circle indicates that the Arpeggio uses the Accent Phrase feature (page 14).
Controller block
Internal Memory
9 Random SFX
The circle indicates that the Arpeggio uses the SFX feature (page 14).
) Sound Type
Reference
Display (touch panel) config.
Indicates the sound type appropriate for the Arpeggio Type.
Performance Play (Home)
Motion Control
*1 The Loop parameter is set as follows.
[EDIT]  Part Selection  ELEMENT/OPERATOR [COMMON]  [Arpeggio]  [Common] (page 73)
Mixing
Scene
Arpeggio-related settings
Play/Rec
There are several methods for triggering and stopping the Arpeggio playback. In addition, you can set
whether or not SFX sounds and special Accent Phrases are triggered along with the normal sequence
data.
Drum Part Edit
Normal Part (AWM) Edit
Normal Part (FM-X) Edit
Common/Audio Edit
Category Search
Utility
Turning Arpeggio playback on/off
Live Set
The following three settings are available for turning the Arpeggio playback on/off.
To play the Arpeggio only when the note is
pressed:
Set the “Hold” parameter to “Off” and the “Trigger
Mode” parameter to “Gate.”
To continue the Arpeggio even if the note is
released:
Set the “Hold” parameter to “On” and the “Trigger
Mode” parameter to “Gate.”
To toggle the Arpeggio playback on/off
whenever the note is pressed:
Set the “Trigger Mode” parameter to “Toggle.” The
“Hold” parameter can be set to either “On” or “Off.”
iPhone/iPad connection
NOTE “Hold” is set as follows.
[EDIT]  Part Selection  ELEMENT/OPERATOR [COMMON]  [Arpeggio]  [Common] (page 73)
NOTE When receiving a MIDI sustain message (control change #64) with both of “Arp Master” and “Arp Part” set to
“On,” you can obtain the same result by setting “Hold” to “On.”
NOTE “Trigger Mode” is set as follows.
[EDIT]  Part Selection  ELEMENT/OPERATOR [COMMON]  [Arpeggio]  [Advanced] (page 77)
MONTAGE Reference Manual
13
Using the Knobs to control Arpeggios
By pressing the Knob function [ARP/MS] button, you can use the Knobs 1 – 4 to control Arpeggio
playback. Try this out and listen for the changes in the sound. For details regarding the effect of the Knobs
1 – 8, see Quick Edit (page 31).
Arpeggio functions which can be controlled by Knob operations
Basic Structure
Functional blocks
Tone Generator block
A/D Input block
Sequencer block
Arpeggio block
Motion Sequencer block
Effect block
Envelope Follower block
Controller block
Internal Memory
Knob 1 Knob 2 Knob 3 Knob 4
Reference
Display (touch panel) config.
Accent Phrases
Performance Play (Home)
Accent Phrases are composed of sequence data included in some Arpeggio types, sounding only when
you play notes at a velocity higher (stronger) than that specified in the Accent Velocity Threshold
parameter.
If it is hard to play at velocities necessary to trigger the Accent Phrase, set the “Vel Threshold” (Accent
Velocity Threshold) parameter to a lower value.
Motion Control
NOTE “Vel Threshold” (Accent Velocity Threshold) parameter is set as follows.
Normal Part (AWM) Edit
[EDIT]  Part Selection  ELEMENT/OPERATOR [COMMON]  [Arpeggio]  [Advanced] (page 77)
NOTE For information on Arpeggio types that use this function, refer to the “Arpeggio Type List” in the Data List PDF
document.
Mixing
Scene
Play/Rec
Drum Part Edit
Normal Part (FM-X) Edit
Common/Audio Edit
Category Search
Random SFX
Utility
Some Arpeggio types feature a Random SFX function which will trigger special sounds (such as guitar fret
noises) when the note is released. The following parameters affecting Random SFX are provided.
For turning the Random SFX on/off:
Random SFX parameter
For setting the volume of the SFX sound:
Velocity Offset (Random SFX Velocity Offset)
parameter
For determining whether or not the volume of
the SFX sound is controlled by velocity:
Key On Ctrl (Random SFX Key on Control) parameter
Live Set
iPhone/iPad connection
NOTE “Random SFX,” “Velocity Offset,” and “Key On Ctrl” are set as follows.
[EDIT]  Part Selection  ELEMENT/OPERATOR [COMMON]  [Arpeggio]  [Advanced] (page 77)
NOTE The Random SFX function is not available for the Arpeggio which stops when the note is released.
NOTE For information on Arpeggio types that use the Random SFX function, refer to the “Arpeggio Type List” in the
Data List PDF document.
MONTAGE Reference Manual
14
Arpeggio playback types
Basic Structure
Functional blocks
There are three main Arpeggio playback types as described below.
Tone Generator block
A/D Input block
Arpeggios for Normal Parts
Sequencer block
Arpeggio block
Arpeggio types (belonging to all categories except for Drum/Perc and a part of Control/HybridSeq)
created for use of Normal Parts have the following three playback types.
Motion Sequencer block
Effect block
Playback of played notes only
The Arpeggio is played back using only the played note(s) and octave notes.
Playback of a programmed sequence according to the played notes
These Arpeggio types have the several sequences each of which is suited for a certain chord type. Even if
you press only one note, the Arpeggio is played back using the programmed sequence— meaning that
notes other than the ones you play may be sounded. Pressing another note triggers a transposed
sequence using the pressed note as the new root note. Adding notes to those already held changes the
sequence accordingly. Arpeggios with this playback type have “_N” at the end of the type name.
Envelope Follower block
Controller block
Internal Memory
Reference
Display (touch panel) config.
Performance Play (Home)
Playback of a programmed sequence according to the played chord
Motion Control
These Arpeggio types created for use with Normal Parts are played back to match the chord type
determined by detecting the notes you play on the keyboard. Arpeggios with this playback type have “_C”
at the end of the type name.
Mixing
NOTE When the “Key Mode” parameter is set to “Sort” or “Sort+Drct,” the same sequence is played back no matter
what order you play the notes. When the “Key Mode” parameter is set to “Thru” or “Thru+Drct,” a different
sequence is played back depending on the order you play the notes.
Normal Part (AWM) Edit
NOTE Since these types are programmed for Normal Parts, using them with Drum Parts may not produce musically
appropriate results.
Scene
Play/Rec
Drum Part Edit
Normal Part (FM-X) Edit
Common/Audio Edit
Category Search
Utility
Arpeggios for Drum Parts
Arpeggio types in Drum/Perc categories are programmed specifically for use with Drum Parts, giving you
instant access to various rhythm patterns. Three different playback types are available.
Live Set
iPhone/iPad connection
Playback of a drum pattern
Pressing any note(s) will trigger the same rhythm pattern.
Playback of a drum pattern, plus additional played notes (assigned drum
instruments)
Pressing any note will trigger the same rhythm pattern. Adding notes to the one already held produces
additional sounds (assigned drum instruments) for the drum pattern.
Playback only of the played notes (assigned drum instruments)
Playing a note or notes will trigger a rhythm pattern using only the notes played (assigned drum
instruments). Keep in mind that even if you play the same notes, the triggered rhythm pattern differs
depending on the order of the notes played. This gives you access to different rhythm patterns using the
same instruments simply by changing the order in which you play the notes, when the “Key Mode”
parameter is set to “Thru” or “Thru+Drct.”
NOTE The three playback types above are not distinguished by category name or type name. You’ll have to actually
play the types and hear the difference.
NOTE Since these types are programmed for Drum Parts, using them with Normal Parts may not produce musically
appropriate results.
MONTAGE Reference Manual
15
Basic Structure
Arpeggios containing mainly non-note events
Functional blocks
Arpeggio types (in Control/HybridSeq main categories with Filter, Expression, Pan, Modulation, Pitch Bend,
and Assign 1/2 sub categories) are programmed primarily with Control Change and Pitch Bend data. They
are used to change the tone or pitch of the sound, rather than play specific notes.
In fact, some types contain no note data at all. When using a type of this category, set the “Key Mode”
parameter to “Direct,” “Sort+Drct,” or “Thru+Drct.”
Tone Generator block
NOTE Settings related to Key Mode are set as follows.
Motion Sequencer block
[EDIT]  Part Selection  ELEMENT/OPERATOR [COMMON]  [Arpeggio]  [Common] (page 73)
A/D Input block
Sequencer block
Arpeggio block
Effect block
Envelope Follower block
Controller block
Tips for Arpeggio playback
Arpeggios not only provide inspiration and full rhythmic passages over which you can perform, they
give you quality MIDI data you can use in creating Songs, or fully formed backing parts to be used in
your live performances. For instructions on using Arpeggio, see the “Quick Guide” in the Owner’s
Manual.
Internal Memory
Reference
Display (touch panel) config.
Performance Play (Home)
Motion Control
Mixing
Scene
Motion Sequencer Block
Play/Rec
The powerful Motion Sequencer feature lets you dynamically change sounds by operating Parameters
depending on sequences created in advance.
It provides real time control for changing sounds depending on various sequences such as Tempo,
Arpeggio, or the rhythm of external connected devices.
You can assign up to eight desired Sequence types for one Lane.
You can also set up to four Lanes corresponding to the Motion Sequencer function for one Part. Up to eight
Lanes can be used at the same time for the entire Performance.
The setting status (on or off) the Lanes in the entire Performance will be shown as follows.
[PERFORMANCE]  [Motion Control]  [Motion Seq] (page 38)
Normal Part (AWM) Edit
Drum Part Edit
Normal Part (FM-X) Edit
Common/Audio Edit
Category Search
Utility
Live Set
iPhone/iPad connection
Also, the parameters for each Lane are set as follows.
[PERFORMANCE]  [EDIT]  Part selection  ELEMENT/OPERATOR [COMMON]  [Motion Seq] 
[Lane] (page 81)
Lane setting
Selected Sequence setting
MONTAGE Reference Manual
Sequence Patterns for the Lane
Lane setting
16
Turning the Motion Sequencer on/off
The following settings are available for turning the Motion Sequencer playback on/off.
Basic Structure
Functional blocks
Tone Generator block
A/D Input block
To play the Motion Sequence when the note is
pressed:
Set the “LaneSW” parameter to “On,” the “Trigger”
parameter to “Off,” and the” Sync” parameter to “Off.”
Sequencer block
To play the Motion Sequence when the
[MOTION SEQ TRIGGER] button is pressed:
Set the “LaneSW” parameter to “On,” the “Trigger”
parameter to “On,” and the “Sync” parameter to “Off.”
Motion Sequencer block
Arpeggio block
Effect block
Envelope Follower block
NOTE “LaneSW” and “Trigger” are set as follows.
[EDIT]  Part selection  ELEMENT/OPERATOR [COMMON]  [MOTION Seq]  [Lane] (page 81)
Controller block
Internal Memory
Using the Knobs to control Motion Sequencer
By pressing the Knob function [ARP/MS] button, you can use the Knobs 1 – 2 and 5 – 8 to control Motion
Sequencer playback. Try this out and listen for the changes in the sound. For details regarding the effect of
the Knobs, see Quick Edit (page 31).
Reference
Display (touch panel) config.
Performance Play (Home)
Motion Control
Motion Sequencer functions which can be controlled by Knob operations
Mixing
Scene
Play/Rec
Normal Part (AWM) Edit
Drum Part Edit
Normal Part (FM-X) Edit
Knob 1 Knob 2
Knob 5 Knob 6 Knob 7 Knob 8
Common/Audio Edit
Category Search
Utility
Editing Motion Sequences
You can create a custom Motion Sequence consisting of up to sixteen steps. For details about Editing, see
page 83.
Live Set
iPhone/iPad connection
Parameters related to Motion Sequencer
In this instrument, Motion Sequencer is considered as a virtual controller and can be selectable in the
“Source” parameter. The target parameter you want to control by Motion Sequencer is set in the
“Destination” parameter. For details, see page 89.
MONTAGE Reference Manual
17
Basic Structure
Effect Block
This block applies effects to the output of the tone generator block as well as audio input block,
processing and enhancing the sound. Effects are applied in the final stages of editing, letting you change
the sound as desired.
Functional blocks
Tone Generator block
A/D Input block
Sequencer block
Effect structure
Arpeggio block
Motion Sequencer block
Effect block
System Effects — Variation and Reverb
Envelope Follower block
System Effects are applied to the overall sound. With System Effects, the sound of each Part is sent to the
effect according to the Effect Send Level for each Part. The processed sound (referred to as “wet”) is sent
back to the mixer according to the Return Level, and output—after being mixed with the unprocessed
“dry” sound. This instrument is equipped with Variation and Reverb as System Effects. In addition, you can
set the Send Level from Variation to Reverb. This parameter is used to apply Reverb to the signals output
from the Variation. You can get a natural effect by applying Reverb depth to the Variation sound with the
same level as that of the dry sound.
Controller block
Internal Memory
Reference
Display (touch panel) config.
Performance Play (Home)
Motion Control
Insertion Effects
Mixing
Insertion Effects can be applied individually to each of specified parts before merging signals of all parts.
It should be used for sounds for which you want to drastically change the character. You can set different
Effect types to the Insertion Effects A and B for each Part. These settings can be set Part Edit  [Effect]
(page 67, page 122, page 136).
This synthesizer features 17 sets of Insertion Effects. They can be applied to 1 to 16 Parts (maximum) and
A/D Input Part.
Scene
Play/Rec
Normal Part (AWM) Edit
Drum Part Edit
Normal Part (FM-X) Edit
Common/Audio Edit
Category Search
Master Effect
Utility
This block applies effects to the final stereo output signal of the entire sound. Multiple Effect types are
available.
Live Set
iPhone/iPad connection
Element EQ
Element EQ is applied to each Element of the Normal Part (AWM2) and each key of the Drum Part. You can
specify one of three different EQ shapes, including shelving and peaking.
NOTE Element EQ does not affect the Input signals from the A/D INPUT [L/MONO]/[R] jacks.
Part EQ
This EQ is applied to a Part before and after the Insertion Effect.
Part
3-band
parametric EQ
Part EQ
Insertion Effect
2-band
parametric EQ
Part EQ
Master EQ
Master EQ is applied to the final (post-effect), overall sound of the instrument. In this EQ, all five bands can
be set to peaking, with shelving being available also for the lowest and highest bands.
MONTAGE Reference Manual
18
Basic Structure
Effect connection
Functional blocks
1 Each EQ and Insertion Effect applied to each
Part
Performance
Tone Generator block
Part EQ
Insertion A/B
Part
A/D Input block
2 Variation and Reverb related parameters
Sequencer block
Setting: Part Edit  [Effect]  [Routing] (page 67, page 122,
page 136)
Common/Audio Edit  [Effect]  [Routing] (page 154)
Arpeggio block
Send Level
Motion Sequencer block
Variation
3 Master Effect related parameters
Envelope Follower block
Reverb
Setting: Common/Audio Edit  [Effect]  [Master FX]
(page 158)
Variation
to Reverb
4 Master EQ related parameters
Effect block
Controller block
Internal Memory
System Effect
Setting: Common/Audio Edit  [Effect]  [Master EQ]
(page 159)
Return Level
NOTE Regarding the audio input signal from the A/D INPUT [L/
MONO]/[R] jacks, the effect is set in Common/Audio Edit
 [Audio In].
Master
Effect
Reference
Display (touch panel) config.
Performance Play (Home)
Motion Control
Master EQ
Mixing
Scene
Play/Rec
Normal Part (AWM) Edit
Drum Part Edit
About the Vocoder Effect
Normal Part (FM-X) Edit
MONTAGE features a Vocoder effect. Vocoder is a distinctive, “robot voice” effect which extracts the
characteristic of the microphone sound and adds it to the sound via your keyboard performance. The
human voice consists of sounds generated from the vocal cords, and filtered by the throat, nose and
mouth. These resonant sections have specific frequency characteristics and they function effectively as a
filter, creating many formants (harmonic content). The Vocoder effect extracts the filter characteristics of
the voice from the microphone input and recreates the vocal formants by the use of multiple band pass
filters. The machine-like ‘robot’ voice is created by passing the pitched sounds of musical instruments
(such as a synthesizer sound) through the filters.
Mic Input or
Part Output
Part Output
(Keyboard
Performance)
Common/Audio Edit
Category Search
Utility
Live Set
iPhone/iPad connection
Extracting the characteristic
of the input sound
Creating formants
Robot-like
voice
Vocoder
About Effect categories, Effect types, and Effect parameters
For information regarding the effect categories of this instrument and the effect types contained in
their categories, see the “Effect Type List” in the Data List PDF document. For information on the
effect parameters which can be set in the each effect type, see the “Effect Parameter List” in the Data
List PDF document. For information on the descriptions of each effect category, each effect type, and
each effect parameter, see the Synthesizer Parameters Manual PDF document.
About Preset settings
Preset settings for parameters of each effect type are provided as templates and can be selected in
the Effect Type selection display. To get a desired effect sound, try first selecting one of the Presets
close to your imagined sound, then change the parameters as necessary. Preset settings can be
determined by setting “Preset” in each effect parameter display. For information on each effect type,
see the Data List PDF document.
MONTAGE Reference Manual
19
Basic Structure
Envelope Follower Block
Envelope Follower is a function for detecting the envelope of the input signal waveform and modifying
sounds dynamically. This function allows you to control not only Part outputs but also input signals from
external devices connected to the A/D INPUT [L/MONO]/[R] jacks.
The Input source of each Envelope Follower is fixed such as Part 1 for EnvFollower 1, Part 2 for
EnvFollower 2, and the Audio Part for EnvFollower AD. However, the signal output from each Envelope
Follower can be another “input source” for any desired destination such as each Part or even the entire
Performance. For example, you can modify the sound of Part 2 by using the Envelope Follower for Part 1
(EnvFollower 1) as the “Source.” The Envelope Follower as the “Source” and the target parameter to be
controlled by the Envelope Follower (which is called “Destination”) are set in the Control Assign display
(page 89).
Functional blocks
Tone Generator block
A/D Input block
Sequencer block
Arpeggio block
Motion Sequencer block
Effect block
Envelope Follower block
Controller block
Internal Memory
Each Envelope Follower
EnvFollower 1
EnvFollower 2
EnvFollower MST
EnvFollower AD
Reference
Display (touch panel) config.
Performance Play (Home)
Part 1
Entire
Performance
Part 2
Motion Control
Audio Part
(sixteen Parts and
Audio Part)
Each Input source for Envelope Follower
Mixing
Scene
Play/Rec
Normal Part (AWM) Edit
Input signal to Envelope Follower (Fixed)
Output signal from Envelope Follower (The Destination is flexible)
Drum Part Edit
Normal Part (FM-X) Edit
Selected Envelope Follower
Common/Audio Edit
Category Search
Utility
Live Set
iPhone/iPad connection
Signal flow of
Envelope Follower
Input sources for
Envelope Follower
[EDIT]  PART [COMMON]  [Audio In]  [Routing]  “Envelope Follower” (EnvFollower AD)
[EDIT]  PART [COMMON]  [Effect]  [Routing]  “Envelope Follower” (EnvFollower MST)
[EDIT]  Part selection  ELEMENT/OPERATOR [COMMON]  [Effect]  [Routing]  “Envelope
Follower” (EnvFollower 1 – 16)
MONTAGE Reference Manual
20
Basic Structure
Controller Block
This block consists of the keyboard, Pitch Bend and Modulation Wheels, Ribbon Controller, Knobs, Sliders
and so on. The keyboard itself doesn’t generate sounds, but instead generates/transmits note on/off,
velocity and other information (MIDI messages) to the synthesizer’s tone generator block when you play
notes. The controllers also generate/transmit MIDI messages. The synthesizer’s tone generator block
produces sound according to the MIDI messages transmitted from the keyboard and controllers.
Functional blocks
Tone Generator block
A/D Input block
Sequencer block
Arpeggio block
Keyboard
Motion Sequencer block
The keyboard transmits the note on/off messages to the Tone Generator Block (for sounding) and
Sequencer Block (for recording). You can change the note range of the keyboard in octaves by using the
OCTAVE [-]/[+] buttons, transpose the notes by using the OCTAVE [-]/[+] buttons while holding down the
[SHIFT] button, and set how the actual velocity is generated according to the strength with which you play
notes.
Envelope Follower block
Effect block
Controller block
Internal Memory
Reference
Pitch Bend wheel
Use the Pitch Bend wheel to bend notes up (roll the wheel away from
you) or down (roll the wheel toward you) while playing the keyboard.
Roll the wheel upward/downward to bend the pitch upward/downward.
This wheel is self-centering and will automatically return to normal pitch
when released. The Pitch Bend Range setting can be changed in Part
Edit  [Part Settings]  [Pitch] (page 60). Functions other than Pitch
Bend can be assigned to the Pitch Bend wheel in the Part Edit 
[Mod/Control]  [Control Assign] (page 89, page 139).
Display (touch panel) config.
Performance Play (Home)
Pitch up
Motion Control
Mixing
Scene
Play/Rec
Pitch down
Normal Part (AWM) Edit
Drum Part Edit
Normal Part (FM-X) Edit
Modulation wheel
Common/Audio Edit
Category Search
Even though the Modulation wheel is conventionally used to apply
vibrato to the sound, many of the preset Performances have other
functions and effects assigned to the wheel.
The more you move this wheel up, the greater the effect that is applied
to the sound. To avoid accidentally applying effects to the current
Performance, make sure the Modulation wheel is set to minimum
before you start playing. Various functions can be assigned to the
Modulation wheel in Part Edit  [Mod/Control]  [Control Assign]
(page 89, page 139).
Maximum
Utility
Live Set
iPhone/iPad connection
Minimum
Ribbon Controller
The Ribbon Controller is touch sensitive, and is controlled by running your finger laterally across the
surface. Various functions are assigned to each Part of the preset Performance. Various functions can be
assigned to the Ribbon Controller in the Control Assign display (page 89) of the Part Edit. You can also
determine whether the Ribbon Controller value returns to the center, or stays at the point where you
released your finger in the General display (page 146) of the Common/Audio Edit.
Assignable Switches
According to the XA (Expanded Articulation) Control settings (page 6) in Element Edit  [Osc/Tune]
(page 94), you can call up specific Elements of the current Part by pressing each of these buttons during
your keyboard performance. You can select how the on/off status of these buttons is switched in Common/
Audio Edit  [General] (page 145). Furthermore, you can assign various functions (other than calling up
specific Elements) to these buttons in Part Edit  [Mod/Control]  [Control Assign] (page 89, page 139).
MONTAGE Reference Manual
21
Basic Structure
Knobs/Control Sliders
Functional blocks
These knobs and sliders let you change various aspects of the Part’s sound in real time—while you play.
For instructions on using the knobs/sliders, see the Owner’s Manual. For instructions on using the Knobs 1
– 8, see “Quick Edit” (page 29).
Tone Generator block
A/D Input block
Sequencer block
Super Knob
Arpeggio block
Motion Sequencer block
The Super Knob lets you simultaneously control the parameters common to all Parts (Assign 1 – 8) which
are assigned to the eight knobs. For instructions on using the Super Knob, see the Owner’s Manual. For
the editable setting values for the Super Knob, see the Super Knob display (page 39). Also, for instructions
on setting the Assign 1 – 8 controls, see the Control Assign display (page 152) for the Common/Audio Edit.
Effect block
Envelope Follower block
Controller block
Internal Memory
Reference
Internal Memory
Display (touch panel) config.
The MONTAGE creates a variety of different kinds of data, including Performances, Live Sets, and Songs.
This section describes how to maintain the various types of data and use the memory devices/media for
storing them.
Performance Play (Home)
Motion Control
Mixing
Scene
Internal Memory
Recall
Buffer
Compare
Buffer
Excluding
Master and
Utility settings
Excluding
Master and
Utility settings
Preset Memory
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Preset Performance
Arpeggio
Motion Sequence
Audition Phrase
Waveform
Live Set
Curve
Micro Tuning
Data communication
between this synthesizer
and an external device
Play/Rec
Internal data communication
Drum Part Edit
Normal Part (AWM) Edit
Normal Part (FM-X) Edit
MIDI instrument or computer
DAW software
Common/Audio Edit
Category Search
Utility
Live Set
iPhone/iPad connection
Bulk Dump
• Performance Edit
• Motion Sequence Edit
User Curve Edit
Live Set Edit
User Micro Tuning Edit
User Waveform Edit
• Utility
• Quick Setup
• Song
User Memory
USB Flash Memory
For User
•
•
•
•
•
•
User Performance
User Arpeggio
User Motion Sequence
User Curve
User Live Set
User Micro Tuning
• User Waveform
• Utility
• Quick Setup
MOTIF XF format
File extensions “.X3A,” “.X3V,”
“.X3G,” and “.X3W”
Load/Save
•
•
•
•
Store (executed by
using store button)
Edit Buffer
File extensions “.X7U”
For Library
File extensions “.X7L”
Song
File extensions “.MID”
File extensions “.WAV”
Audio Record/Playback
File extensions “.WAV” “.AIF”
Preset Memory
Preset Memory is memory designed specifically for reading out data such as Preset Performance,
Arpeggio, and Audition Phrase. You cannot overwrite the data in Preset Memory.
MONTAGE Reference Manual
22
Edit buffer
The edit buffer is the memory location for edited data of these types: Performance, Live Set, and Song.
Although the edit buffer is designed specifically for data writing and data reading, the data contained in
the edit buffer is lost when the power is turned off. You should always store edited data to User memory
before editing new performance or before turning off the power. Data other than Performance and Motion
Sequence are automatically stored.
Basic Structure
Functional blocks
Tone Generator block
A/D Input block
Sequencer block
User memory
Arpeggio block
User data edited in the Edit buffer and utility settings for the entire system are stored in the dedicated area
in the User memory. Up to eight Library files (.X7L) read from the USB flash memory device are loaded in
the dedicated area in the User memory.
This is read-write memory and the data will be kept even after the power is turned off.
Motion Sequencer block
Effect block
Envelope Follower block
Controller block
Recall buffer and Compare buffer
If you’ve selected another Performance without storing the one you were editing, you can recall your
original edits, since the edit buffer’s contents are stored on backup memory, called the Recall buffer. Also,
the instrument has a Compare buffer in which the sound settings prior to editing will temporarily be
reinstated for comparison purposes. You can switch between the just-edited sound and its unedited
condition, and hear how your edits affect the sound. Both of these are read-write memory types. However,
you should make sure to store the sequence data before turning off the power, because any sequence
data you’ve created will be lost when the power is turned off. For instructions on using the Compare
function, see the Owner’s Manual.
Internal Memory
Reference
Display (touch panel) config.
Performance Play (Home)
Motion Control
Mixing
Scene
Play/Rec
Normal Part (AWM) Edit
Drum Part Edit
Normal Part (FM-X) Edit
Common/Audio Edit
Category Search
Utility
Live Set
iPhone/iPad connection
MONTAGE Reference Manual
23
Reference
Performance
Edit
Search
Utility
Live Set
Display (touch panel)
Reference
Display (touch panel) configuration
This section explains the navigation bar which is common to all types of displays.
Navigation bar
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1 HOME icon
Moves to the Performance Play display (page 26).
2 EXIT icon
Functions same as the [EXIT] button on the panel. Press this icon to exit from the current display and
return to the previous level in the hierarchy.
3 [INFORMATION] area
Displays helpful information, including the currently selected display name.
4 EFFECT icon
Touch the icon to call up the Effect Switch display (page 182). The icon turns off when any of the Effect
blocks (Insertion, System or Master) is off.
5 QUICK SETUP icon
Displays the settings of Local Control ON/OFF and MIDI IN/OUT.
The keyboard-shaped icon lights up when Local Control is set to ON and turns off when Local Control
is set to OFF.
When MIDI is set as the MIDI IN/OUT setting, a MIDI connector-shaped icon appears. When USB is set
as the MIDI IN/OUT setting, a USB connector-shaped icon appears. Touch the desired icon to call up
the corresponding Quick Setup display (page 166).
6 TEMPO SETTINGS icon
Displays the tempo of the currently selected Performance. Touch the icon to call up the Tempo Settings
display (page 180).
7 LIVE SET icon
Touch the icon to call up the Live Set display (page 183).
8 UTILITY icon
Touch the icon to call up the last opened display among the Utility displays.
MONTAGE Reference Manual
24
Reference
Performance
Edit
Search
Utility
Display (touch panel)
9
Scroll buttons
Live Set
Display All button
Display All
9 Pop-up List
Displays setting values for parameters. When the setting values are displayed in multiple pages, you
will need to use the Scroll buttons to scroll through the pages or the Display All button to display all of
the setting values.
MONTAGE Reference Manual
25
Reference
Performance
Edit
Search
Utility
Live Set
Performance
Performance Play (Home)
Home
From the Performance Play display you can play a selected Performance and edit some of the
Performance-related settings.
Motion Control
Overview
Quick Edit
Home
Arpeggio
Operation
Motion Seq
Press the [PERFORMANCE] button, or
Touch the [HOME] icon
Super Knob
Knob Auto
1
2
Mixing
Scene
Play / Rec
3
MIDI
Audio
4
5
7
6
8
9
)
!
@# $
1 Performance name
Indicates the currently selected Performance name. Touching the parameter calls up the menu for
Category Search, Edit, and Recall.
NOTE Once you edit any parameter in the selected Performance, a blue flag icon appears at right in the
Performance Name.
2 Part indicator
When the cursor is on the Performance name or on Parts 1 – 8, this indicates whether Parts 9 – 16 are
used or not.
When the cursor is on Parts 9 – 16, it indicates whether Parts 1 – 8 are used or not. If Parts 9 – 16 are
not in use, this indicator is not shown.
3 Flag
Indicates the tone generation attributes of the currently selected Performance. (See chart below.)
Flag
Definition
AWM2
Performance comprised only of AWM2 Parts
FM-X
Performance comprised only of FM-X Parts
FM-X+AWM2
Performance comprised of both AWM2 and FM-X Parts
MC
Performance featuring Motion Control
SSS
Performance featuring Seamless Sound Switching
4 Knob functions
Indicates the functions currently assigned to the Knobs 1 – 8.
MONTAGE Reference Manual
26
Reference
Performance
Edit
Search
Utility
5 Part names
Indicates the Part names. Touching the parameter calls up the menu for Category Search, Edit, and
Copy. To add another Part, touch “+” icon.
6 Common Motion Sequencer switch
Determines whether the Motion Sequencer of the Common/AD Parts is on or off. When all Lane
switches of the Common/AD Parts are off, this switch is not shown.
Settings: Off, On
Live Set
Performance
Home
Motion Control
Overview
Quick Edit
Arpeggio
Motion Seq
7 Part Arpeggio On/Off switch
Determines whether the Arpeggio of each Part is on or off.
Settings: Off, On
8 Part Motion Sequencer switch
Determines whether the Motion Sequencer of each Part is on or off. When all Lane switches of the Part
are off, this switch is not shown.
Settings: Off, On
Super Knob
Knob Auto
Mixing
Scene
Play / Rec
MIDI
Audio
9 Note Limit
Determines the lowest and highest notes in the Part’s note range. For example, setting a Note Limit of
“C5 – C4” lets you hear the Part by playing notes in the two ranges of C -2 to C4 and C5 to G8; notes
played between C4 and C5 have no sound. For details about the Note Limit setting, see the Owner’s
Manual.
Settings: C -2 – G8
) Keyboard Control switch
Determines whether the Keyboard Control for each Part is on or off. When this switch is set to off, the
Part will not sound even you play the keyboard (unless the Part is selected).
Settings: Off, On
! Switching Mute on/off for Parts
Determines whether the Mute for each Part is on or off.
Settings: Off, On
@ Switching Solo on/off for Parts
Determines whether the Solo for each Part is on or off.
Settings: Off, On
# Volume of Parts
Determines the Volume for the Part.
Settings: 0 – 127
$ Meter
Indicates the audio output level of the Part.
MONTAGE Reference Manual
27
Reference
Performance
Edit
Search
Utility
Motion Control
Live Set
Performance
Home
From the Motion Control display you can edit all Motion Control settings, such as general sound settings,
Arpeggio, and the Motion Sequencer of the currently selected Performance.
The Motion Control section contains the following various displays.
• Overview
• Quick Edit
• Arpeggio
• Motion Sequencer
• Super Knob
• Knob Auto
Motion Control
Overview
Quick Edit
Arpeggio
Motion Seq
Super Knob
Knob Auto
Mixing
Scene
Play / Rec
Motion Control
MIDI
Audio
Overview
The Overview display indicates the illustration of the connection between Controllers and Parts. You can
confirm the current settings here.
Operation
[PERFORMANCE]  [Motion Control]  [Overview] or [SHIFT] + [PERFORMANCE]
Part
Indicates the currently selected Part. To confirm a Part’s connections, select the Part here.
Settings: Common, Part 1 – 16
Edit Common Control Settings/Edit Part Control Settings
Calls up the Control Assign display for the selected Part. For “Common,” see page 152. For Part 1 – 16,
see page 89.
Control Function (Controller Function)
Switches between the Performance Control and the Part Control.
Settings: Performance Control, Part Control
MONTAGE Reference Manual
28
Reference
Performance
Edit
Search
Utility
Live Set
Performance
Controller
Determines whether or not the illustration of the connection between “Controller” and Part is shown.
The “Controller” here refers to:
• Pitch Bend wheel
• Modulation wheel
• Ribbon Controller
• [ASSIGN 1] and [ASSIGN 2] buttons (Assignable switches 1 and 2)
• [MOTION SEQ HOLD] (Motion sequencer Hold) button
• [MOTION SEQ TRIGGER] (Motion sequencer trigger) button
Settings: Off, On
Home
Motion Control
Overview
Quick Edit
Arpeggio
Motion Seq
Super Knob
Knob Auto
Assignable
Mixing
Determines whether or not the illustration of the connection between “Assignable” and Part is shown.
The “Assignable” here refers to:
• Assignable Knobs 1 – 8
Scene
Settings: Off, On
Play / Rec
MIDI
Audio
Fader
Determines whether or not the illustration of the connection between “Fader” and Part is shown.
The “Fader” here refers to:
• Control sliders 1 – 8
Settings: Off, On
Super Knob
Determines whether or not the illustration of the connection between “Super Knob” and Part is shown.
The “Super Knob” here refers to:
• Super Knob
Settings: Off, On
Quick Edit
From the Quick Edit display you can make general sound settings. You can select whether the settings are
commonly applied to all Parts or to only one selected Part.
The parameters with the indicators can be controlled by the Knobs 1 – 8. To do this, use the Knob Function
[TONE]/[EQ/FX]/[ARP/MS] buttons for switching the knob operations.
Operation
[PERFORMANCE]  [Motion Control]  [Quick Edit]
MONTAGE Reference Manual
29
Reference
Performance
Edit
Search
Utility
Part
Indicates the currently selected Part. Select the Part you want to use Quick Edit with here.
Settings: Common, Part 1 – 16
 When “Part” is set to “Common”
Live Set
Performance
Home
Motion Control
Overview
You can edit the parameters commonly applied to all Parts.
Quick Edit
Performance Name
Arpeggio
Enters the desired name for the Performance. Performance names can contain up to 20 characters.
Touching the parameter calls up the input character display.
Motion Seq
FEG Atk (FEG Attack Time)
Knob Auto
Determines the speed of filter variation from the time a note is played until the maximum initial level of
the Cutoff Frequency is reached. This parameter determines the offset value of the FEG (page 105) for
the Element/Operator Common.
Settings: -64 – +63
FEG Decay (FEG Decay Time)
Super Knob
Mixing
Scene
Play / Rec
MIDI
Audio
Determines how fast the Cutoff Frequency falls from maximum attack level to the sustain level. This
parameter determines the offset value of the FEG parameter (page 105) for the Element/Operator
Common.
Settings: -64 – +63
FEG Rel (FEG Release Time)
Determines how fast the Cutoff Frequency falls from the sustain level to zero when a note is released.
This parameter determines the offset value for the FEG parameter (page 105) of the Element/Operator
Common.
Settings: -64 – +63
Edit Master EQ
Calls up the Master EQ display (page 159) for Common/Audio Edit.
Edit All Arp (Edit All Arpeggio)
Calls up the Arpeggio display (page 35) for Motion Control.
Edit Common MS (Edit Common Motion Sequencer)
Calls up the Motion Sequencer Lane display (page 151) for Common/Audio Edit.
Cutoff (Cutoff Frequency)
Determines the Cutoff Frequency for the Filter, when the Low Pass Filter is selected, for example, the
larger the value the brighter the decay. This parameter determines the offset value of the Filter Cutoff
Frequency (page 102) for the Element/Drum Key/Operator Common.
Settings: -64 – +63
Resonance
Determines the emphasis given to the Cutoff Frequency. This parameter determines the offset value of
the Filter Resonance (page 103) for the Element/Drum Key/Operator Common.
Settings: -64 – +63
FEG Depth
Determines the range over which the cutoff frequency of the Filter EG changes. This parameter
determines the offset value of the FEG Depth (page 105) for the Element/Operator Common.
Settings: -64 – +63
Portamento (Portamento Time)
Determines the pitch transition time when Portamento is applied. This parameter is synchronized to the
same parameter for the Common/Audio Edit.
Settings: -64 – +63
Attack (AEG Attack Time)
Determines the speed of attack from the time a key is played until the maximum initial level of the AEG
is reached. This parameter determines the offset value of the AEG (page 110, page 129, page 143) for
the Element/Drum Key/Operator.
Settings: -64 – +63
MONTAGE Reference Manual
30
Reference
Performance
Edit
Search
Utility
Decay (AEG Decay Time)
Determines how fast the volume falls from maximum attack level to the sustain level. This parameter
determines the offset value of the AEG (page 110, page 129, page 143). for the Element/Drum Key/
Operator
Settings: -64 – +63
Sustain (AEG Sustain Level)
Determines the sustain level at which the volume will continue while a note is held, after the initial attack
and decay. This parameter determines the offset value of the AEG (page 110, page 129, page 143) for
the Element/Drum Key/Operator.
Settings: -64 – +63
Live Set
Performance
Home
Motion Control
Overview
Quick Edit
Arpeggio
Motion Seq
Super Knob
Knob Auto
Release (AEG Release Time)
Mixing
Determines how fast the volume falls from the sustain level to zero when a note is released. This
parameter determines the offset value of the AEG (page 110, page 129, page 143) for the Element/
Drum Key/Operator.
Scene
Settings: -64 – +63
Low Gain (Maser EQ Low Gain)
Play / Rec
MIDI
Audio
Determines the level gain of the Master EQ Low band.
Settings: -12dB – +12dB
Lo Mid Gain (Master EQ Low Mid Gain)
Determines the level gain of the Master EQ Low Mid band.
Settings: -12dB – +12dB
Mid Gain (Master EQ Mid Gain)
Determines the level gain of the Master EQ Mid band.
Settings: -12dB – +12dB
Hi Mid Gain (Master EQ High Mid Gain)
Determines the level gain of the Master EQ High Mid band.
Settings: -12dB – +12dB
High Gain (Master EQ High Gain)
Determines the level gain of the Master EQ High band.
Settings: -12dB – +12dB
Pan (Performance Pan)
Determines the stereo pan position of the selected Performance. This parameter offsets the same
parameter in the Part Edit setting.
Settings: L63 – C (center) – R63
Var Return (Variation Return)
Determines the Return level of the Variation Effect.
Settings: 0 – 127
Rev Return (Reverb Return)
Determines the Return level of the Reverb Effect.
Settings: 0 – 127
Common Clock Swing (Common Swing)
Determines the Swing of the Arpeggio/Motion Sequencer for the entire Performance. This is the offset
value for the Swing of the Arpeggio/Motion Sequencer for each Part.
Settings: -120 – +120
MONTAGE Reference Manual
31
Reference
Performance
Edit
Search
Utility
Common Clock Unit (Common Unit Multiply)
Adjusts the Arpeggio/Motion Sequencer playback time for the entire Performance.
This parameter is applied to the Part when the Unit Multiply parameter for Arpeggio/Motion Sequencer
of the Part is set to “Common.”
By using this parameter, you can create a different Arpeggio/Motion Sequencer type from the original
one.
Settings: 50% – 400%
200%: The playback time will be doubled and the tempo is halved.
100%: The normal playback time.
50%: The playback time will be halved and the tempo doubled.
Common Arp Gate Time (Common Arpeggio Gate Time)
Live Set
Performance
Home
Motion Control
Overview
Quick Edit
Arpeggio
Motion Seq
Super Knob
Knob Auto
Determines the Gate Time Rate (length) of the Arpeggio for the entire Performance. This is the offset
value for the Gate Time Rate of the Arpeggio for each Part.
Mixing
Settings: -100 – +100
Play / Rec
Scene
Common Arp Velocity (Common Arpeggio Velocity Rate)
MIDI
Determines the Velocity Rate of the Arpeggio for the entire Performance. This is the offset value for the
Velocity Rate of the Arpeggio for each Part.
Audio
Settings: -100 – +100
Common Motion Seq Amplitude (Common Motion Sequencer Amplitude)
Determines the Amplitude of the Motion Sequencer for the entire Performance. “Amplitude” determines
how the entire Motion Sequence changes.
This is the offset value for the Part Motion Seq Amplitude, which is also the offset value for the Lane
Amplitude. This results in that both of the Common and Part MS Amplitudes offset the Amplitude setting
in the Lane (only when “MS FX” is set to on for the Lane).
Settings: -64 – +63
Common Motion Seq Shape (Common Motion Sequencer Pulse Shape)
Determines the Pulse Shape of the Motion Sequencer for the entire Performance. This changes the
step curve shape of the sequence.
This is the offset value for the Part Motion Seq Pulse Shape, which is also the offset value for the Lane
Pulse Shape. This results in that both of the Common and Part MS Pulse Shapes offset the Pulse Shape
setting for the parameter in the Lane (only when “MS FX” is set to on for the Lane and “Control” is set to
on for the parameter).
Settings: -100 – +100
Common Motion Seq Smooth (Common Motion Sequencer Smoothness)
Determines the Smoothness of the Motion Sequencer for the entire Performance. “Smoothness” is the
degree to which the time of the Motion Sequence is smoothly changed.
This is the offset value for the Part Motion Seq Smoothness, which is also the offset value for the Lane
Smoothness. This results in that both of the Common and Part MS Smoothnesses offset the
Smoothness setting for the parameter in the Lane (only when “MS FX” is set to on for the Lane).
Settings: -64 – +63
Common Motion Seq Random (Common Motion Sequencer Random)
Determines the Random of the Motion Sequencer for the entire Performance. “Random” is the degree
to which the Step Value of the Sequence is randomly changed.
This is the offset value for the Part Motion Seq Random when “MS FX” is set to on for the Lane.
Settings: -64 – +63
MONTAGE Reference Manual
32
Reference
Performance
Edit
Search
Utility
 When “Part” is set to Part 1 – 16
You can edit the parameters for the selected Part.
Live Set
Performance
Home
Motion Control
Overview
Quick Edit
Arpeggio
Motion Seq
Super Knob
Knob Auto
Mixing
Scene
Play / Rec
MIDI
Audio
Part Category Main (Part Main Category)
Part Category Sub (Part Sub Category)
Determines the Main Category and Sub Category of the Part.
The categories are keywords representing the general characteristics of the Parts. Selecting the
appropriate category makes it easy to find the desired Part from the huge variety of Parts available.
There are 17 Main Categories which indicate types of instruments. There are up to nine Sub Categories
for each Main Category, indicating more detailed types of instruments.
Settings: See the Data List PDF document.
Part Name
Enters the desired name for the Part. Part names can contain up to 20 characters. Touching the
parameter calls up the input character display.
The parameters below are same as the ones when “Part” is set to “Common” (page 30).
• FEG Atk (FEG Attack Time)
• FEG Decay (FEG Decay Time)
• FEG Rel (FEG Release Time)
• Cutoff
• Resonance
• FEG Depth
• Portamento (Portamento Time)
The setting values differ from the ones which “Part” is set to “Common.”
Settings: 0 – 127
•
•
•
•
Attack (AEG Attack Time)
Decay (AEG Decay Time)
Sustain (AEG Sustain Level)
Release (AEG Release Time)
FEG Sus (FEG Sustain Level)
Determines the FEG Sustain Level for the Part. This is the offset value for the FEG Decay2 Level of the
Element/Operator Common (page 105).
Settings: -64 – +63
Edit Part EQ
Calls up the Part EQ display (page 70) for Part Edit.
Edit Part Arp (Edit Part Arpeggio)
Calls up the Arpeggio display (page 73) for Part Edit.
MONTAGE Reference Manual
33
Reference
Performance
Edit
Search
Utility
Edit Part MS (Edit Part Motion Sequencer)
Calls up the Motion Sequencer Lane display (page 81) for Part Edit.
EQ Low Gain (3 band EQ Low Gain)
Live Set
Performance
Home
Motion Control
Determines the level gain for the Low band.
Overview
Settings: -12dB – +12dB
Quick Edit
EQ Mid Freq (3 band EQ Mid Frequency)
Arpeggio
Determines the frequency for the Mid band.
Motion Seq
Settings: 139.7Hz – 10.1kHz
Super Knob
EQ Mid Gain (3 band EQ Mid Gain)
Knob Auto
Determines the level gain for the Mid band.
Mixing
Settings: -12dB – +12dB
Scene
EQ Mid Q (3 band EQ Mid Q)
Play / Rec
Determines the EQ bandwidth of the Mid band.
MIDI
Settings: 0.7 – 10.3
Audio
EQ High Gain (3 band EQ Hi Gain)
Determines the level gain of the High band.
Settings: -12dB – +12dB
Pan
Determines the stereo pan position of the selected Part.
Settings: L63 – C (Center) – R63
Var Send (Variation Send)
Determines the Send level of the signal sent to the Variation effect.
Settings: 0 – 127
Rev Send (Reverb Send)
Determines the Send level of the signal sent to the Reverb effect.
Settings: 0 – 127
Part Clock Swing (Part Swing)
Delays notes on even-numbered beats (backbeats) to produce a swing feel.
• +1 and higher: Delay the Arpeggio notes.
• -1 and lower: Advance the Arpeggio notes.
• 0: Exact timing as set by “Arpeggio/Motion Sequencer Grid” Value, resulting in no swing.
Judicious use of this setting lets you create swing rhythms and triplet feels, such as shuffle and
bounce.
Settings: -120 – +120
Part Clock Unit (Part Unit Multiply)
Adjusts the Arpeggio/Motion Sequencer playback time for the selected Part.
Settings: 50% – 400%, Common
200%: The playback time will be doubled and the tempo is halved.
100%: The normal playback time.
50%: The playback time will be halved and the tempo doubled.
Common: The value set in the Unit Multiply common to the all Parts will be applied.
Part Arp Gate Time (Part Arpeggio Gate Time)
Determines how much the Gate Time (length) of the Arpeggio notes is offset from the original value.
This is the offset value for the Gate Time Rate (page 76) of each Arpeggio Select setting.
Settings: 0% – 200%
Part Arp Velocity (Part Arpeggio Velocity Rate)
Determines how much the velocity of Arpeggio playback is offset from the original value.
This is the offset value for the Velocity Rate (page 76) of each Arpeggio Select setting.
Settings: 0% – 200%
MONTAGE Reference Manual
34
Reference
Performance
Edit
Search
Utility
Live Set
Performance
Part Motion Seq Amplitude (Part Motion Sequencer Amplitude)
Determines the Amplitude (page 83) of the Motion Sequencer for the selected Part.
This is the offset value for the Lane Motion Seq Amplitude when “MS FX” is set to on for the Lane.
Settings: -64 – +63
Home
Motion Control
Overview
Part Motion Seq Shape (Part Motion Sequencer Pulse Shape)
Determines the Pulse Shape of the Motion Sequencer for the selected Part.
This is the offset value for the Lane Motion Seq “Step Curve Parameter” (page 84) when “MS FX” is set
to on for the Lane and “Control” is set to on for the parameter.
Quick Edit
Arpeggio
Motion Seq
Settings: -100 – +100
Super Knob
Part Motion Seq Smooth (Part Motion Sequencer Smoothness)
Knob Auto
Determines the Smoothness of the Motion Sequencer for the selected Part.
This is the offset value for the Lane Motion Seq Smoothness (page 83) when “MS FX” is set to on for the
Lane.
Settings: -64 – +63
Mixing
Scene
Play / Rec
MIDI
Part Motion Seq Random
Audio
Determines the Random of the Motion Sequencer for the selected Part. “Random” is the degree to
which the Step Value of the Sequence is randomly changed.
Settings: 0 – 127
Arpeggio
From the Arpeggio display you can set Arpeggio-related parameters for multiple Parts.
Touching the Arpeggio Type name on this display (or pressing the [CATEGORY] button on the panel) calls
up a menu. In the displayed menu, touch [Search] to call up the Arpeggio Category Search display and
touch [Number] to determine the Arpeggio Type by specifying the Arpeggio Number.
Operation
[PERFORMANCE]  [Motion Control]  [Arpeggio]
View
Arpeggio Type
Part 9-16 / Part 1-8
Switches between the displays of Parts 9 – 16 or the Parts 1 – 8. In case of the picture above, touch the
“Part 9-16” to display the Arpeggio Types for the “Part 9-16.”
Settings: Part 9-16 / Part 1-8
Arp Master (Arpeggio Master Switch)
Determines whether the Arpeggio is on or off for the entire Performance. This setting is applied to the [ARP
ON/OFF] button on the panel.
Settings: Off, On
MONTAGE Reference Manual
35
Reference
Performance
Edit
Search
Utility
Sync Quantize (Sync Quantize Value)
Determines the actual timing at which the next Arpeggio playback starts when you trigger it while the
Arpeggio of multiple Parts is playing back. When set to “off,” the next Arpeggio starts as soon as you
trigger it. The number indicates the clock.
Settings: Off, 60 (32nd note), 80 (16th note triplet), 120 (16th note), 160 (8th note triplet), 240 (8th note), 320 (1/4 note triplet),
480 (1/4 note)
Live Set
Performance
Home
Motion Control
Overview
Quick Edit
Arp (Part Arpeggio Switch)
Arpeggio
Determines whether the Arpeggio for each Part is on or off. This setting is applied to the Number C [1] – [8]
buttons on the panel in the Part Control status.
Motion Seq
Settings: Off, On
Super Knob
Knob Auto
Arp Select (Arpeggio Select)
Mixing
Determines the Arpeggio Types. This setting is applied to the Number C [1] – [8] buttons on the panel in
the Performance Control status.
Scene
Settings: 1 – 8
View
Play / Rec
MIDI
Audio
Determines which information regarding Arpeggio Type is displayed.
Settings: Category, Number, Range
 When “View” is set to “Category”
Category (Arpeggio Category)
Settings: See the Arpeggio category list (page 11).
Sub (Arpeggio Sub Category)
Settings: See the Arpeggio sub category list (page 11).
Name (Arpeggio Name)
Settings: See the Data List PDF document.
 When “View” is set to “Number”
Bank (Arpeggio Bank)
Settings: Preset, User, Library 1 – 8
Number (Arpeggio Number)
Settings: See the Data List PDF document.
Name (Arpeggio Name)
Settings: See the Data List PDF document.
MONTAGE Reference Manual
36
Reference
Performance
Edit
Search
Utility
 When “View” is set to “Range”
Live Set
Performance
Home
Motion Control
Overview
Quick Edit
Arpeggio
Motion Seq
Super Knob
Knob Auto
Mixing
Scene
Play / Rec
MIDI
Audio
Name (Arpeggio Name)
Settings: See the Data List PDF document.
Velocity Limit (Arpeggio Velocity Limit)
Determines the lowest and highest velocity which can trigger Arpeggio playback. For details on
settings of Velocity Limit, see the Owner’s Manual.
Settings: 1 – 127
Note Limit (Arpeggio Note Limit)
Determines the lowest and highest notes in the Arpeggio’s note range. For details on settings of Note
Limit, see the Owner’s Manual.
Settings: C -2 – G8
MONTAGE Reference Manual
37
Reference
Performance
Edit
Search
Utility
Motion Seq (Motion Sequencer)
Live Set
Performance
Home
From the Motion Sequencer display you can set parameters related to Motion Sequencer for multiple Parts.
Motion Control
Overview
Operation
[PERFORMANCE]  [Motion Control]  [Motion Seq]
Quick Edit
Arpeggio
Motion Seq
Super Knob
Knob Auto
Mixing
Scene
Play / Rec
MIDI
Audio
MS Master (Motion Sequencer Master Switch)
Determines whether the Motion Sequencer is on or off for the entire Performance. This setting is applied to
the [MOTION SEQ ON/OFF] button on the panel.
Settings: Off, On
Active (Active Motion Sequencer)
Indicates the number of the active Lane. The number after slash indicates the maximum number of the
Lanes which can be activated simultaneously.
PartSW (Motion Sequencer Part Switch)
Determines whether the Motion Sequencer is on or off for each Part/all Parts. This setting is applied to the
corresponding Number B [1] – [8] button on the panel in the Part Control status. Also you can turn the
Motion Sequencer for Common/AD Part on or off by operating the ELEMENT/OPERATOR [COMMON]
button on the panel. Please note that you cannot use the panel buttons when all Lane switches for the Part
are set to off.
Settings: Off, On
Lane Switch
Determines whether each Lane is on or off. You can set up to four Lanes corresponding to the Motion
Sequencer function for one Part. Up to eight Lanes can be used at the same time for the entire
Performance.
Settings: Off, On
Motion Seq Select (Motion Sequence Select)
Determines the Motion Sequence Type. This setting is applied to the Number B [1] – [8] buttons on the
panel in the Performance Control status.
Settings: 1 – 8
MONTAGE Reference Manual
38
Reference
Performance
Edit
Search
Utility
Live Set
Performance
Super Knob
Home
From the Super Knob display you can set parameters controlled by the Super knob.
Motion Control
Overview
Operation
[PERFORMANCE]  [Motion Control]  [Super Knob]
Quick Edit
Arpeggio
Assignable Knob 1 – 8 Destination Value 1
Motion Seq
Super Knob
Knob Auto
Mixing
Scene
Play / Rec
MIDI
Audio
Assignable Knob 1 – 8 Destination Value 2
Assignable Knob 1 – 8 Destination Value 1
Assignable Knob 1 – 8 Destination Value 2
Determines the lowest value (Assignable value 1) and the highest value (Assignable value 2) for the
corresponding Knob.
When you operate the Super Knob, the Assignable Knob value varies within the specified range.
Settings: 0 – 127
Assignable Knob 1 – 8 Value
Determines the value for the Assignable Knobs 1 – 8.
Settings: 0 – 127
Super Knob (Super Knob Value)
Determines the value of the Super Knob.
Settings: 0 – 127
LED Pattern (Super Knob LED Pattern)
Determines the lighting pattern of the Super Knob.
Settings: Type 1, Type 2-1, Type 2-2, Type 3-1, Type 3-2, Type 4-1, Type 4-2, Type 5-1, Type 5-2, Type 6, Type 7-1, Type 7-2,
Type 8-1, Type 8-2, Type 9, Type 10, Type 11, Off
MONTAGE Reference Manual
39
Reference
Performance
Edit
Search
Utility
Live Set
Performance
Knob Auto
Home
From the Knob Auto display you can set parameters related to Motion Sequencer applied to the Super
Knob (Super Knob Motion Sequencer.) The parameter value of the Super Knob can be automatically
controlled by the Motion Sequencer.
You can set only one Lane for the Super Knob Motion Sequencer.
NOTE Up to eight Lanes can be used at the same time for the entire Performance. However, the Lane set for the Super
Knob is not included in the eight referred to here.
Motion Control
Overview
Quick Edit
Arpeggio
Motion Seq
Super Knob
Operation
[PERFORMANCE]  [Motion Control]  [Knob Auto]
Knob Auto
Mixing
Scene
Play / Rec
MIDI
Audio
MS Master (Motion Sequencer Master Switch)
Turns the Motion Sequencer for the entire Performance on/off. This setting is applied to the [MOTION SEQ
ON/OFF] button on the panel.
Settings: Off, On
Super Knob MS (Super Knob Motion Sequencer Switch)
Turns the Motion Sequencer applied to the Super Knob on/off.
Settings: Off, On
MS FX (Super Knob Motion Sequencer FX Receive)
Determines whether or not the Motion Sequencer is affected by the knob operation when the
corresponding Knob Function [ARP/MS FX] button is set to on.
Settings: Off, On
Trigger (Super Knob Motion Sequencer Trigger Receive)
Determines whether the signal from the [MOTION SEQ TRIGGER] button is received or not. When this is
set to on, the Motion Sequence will begin whenever you press the [MOTION SEQ TRIGGER] button.
Settings: Off, On
Sequence Select (Super Knob Motion Sequence Select)
Determines the Motion Sequence Type. This setting is applied to the Number B [1] – [8] buttons on the
panel in the Performance Control status.
Settings: 1 – 8
Sync Part (Super Knob Motion Sequencer Sync Part)
Determines which Part is synchronized with the Super Knob Motion Sequencer. This setting is applied to
the Note On Setting and the Arp/Motion Seq Grid setting for the selected Part.
Settings: Part 1 – Part 16
MONTAGE Reference Manual
40
Reference
Performance
Edit
Search
Utility
Arp/MS Grid (Arpeggio/Motion Sequencer Grid)
Determines the type of note that serves as the basis for the Quantize or Swing. The parameter value is
displayed in clocks.
For the Motion Sequencer, this parameter value is one step length. This setting is applied to the Part which
is selected as the Sync Part (above).
Settings: 60 (32nd note), 80 (16th note triplet), 120 (16th note), 160 (8th note triplet), 240 (8th note), 320 (1/4 note triplet),
480 (1/4 note)
Live Set
Performance
Home
Motion Control
Overview
Quick Edit
Arpeggio
Random (Super Knob Motion Sequencer Random)
Motion Seq
Determines the degree to which the Step Value of the Sequence is randomly changed.
Super Knob
Settings: 0 – 127
Knob Auto
Sync (Super Knob Motion Sequencer Sync)
Mixing
Determines if the playback of the Motion Sequence applied to the Super Knob is synchronized to the
Tempo, Beat, or Arpeggio of the Performance.
Scene
Settings: Off, Tempo, Beat, Arp
Off: Super Knob Motion Sequencer plays back according to its own clock and is not synchronized to an external
clock.
Play / Rec
MIDI
Audio
Tempo: Super Knob Motion Sequencer is synchronized with the Performance tempo.
Beat: Super Knob Motion Sequencer is synchronized with the beat.
Arp: Super Knob Motion Sequencer is synchronized with the 1st beat of the measure of the currently playing
Arpeggio.
Speed (Super Knob Motion Sequencer Speed)
Determines the speed of the playback of the Motion Sequence.
This parameter is active when the Super Knob Motion Sequencer Sync is “Off.”
Settings: 0 – 127
Unit Multiply (Super Knob Motion Sequencer Unit Multiply)
Adjusts the Super Knob Motion Sequencer playback time.
This parameter is active when the Super Knob Motion Sequencer Sync is “Off.”
Settings: 50% – 6400%, Common
200%: The playback time will be doubled and the tempo is halved.
100%: The normal playback time.
50%: The playback time will be halved and the tempo doubled.
Common: The value set in the Unit Multiply common to the all Parts will be applied.
Key On Reset (Super Knob Motion Sequencer Key On Reset)
Determines whether or not the playback of the Motion Sequence is stopped when you play the keyboard.
This parameter is active when the Super Knob Motion Sequencer Sync is set to something other than
“Arp.”
Also this parameter is not available when “Trigger” is set to “On.”
Settings: Off, Each-On, 1st-On
Each-On: The Sequence resets with each note you play and starts the Sequence from the beginning.
1st-On: The Sequence resets with each note you play and starts the Sequencer from the beginning. If you play a
second note while the first is being held, the Sequence continues cycling according to the same phase as triggered
by the first note—in other words, the Sequence only resets if the first note is released before the second is played.
Loop (Super Knob Motion Sequencer Loop)
Determines whether the Motion Sequence is played only once or repeatedly.
Settings: Off, On
Velocity Limit (Super Knob Motion Sequencer Velocity Limit)
Determines the minimum and maximum Velocity values over which the Motion Sequence responds.
Settings: 1 – 127
Cycle (Super Knob Motion Sequencer Cycle)
Selects the desired step length for the Motion Sequence.
Settings: 1 – 16
Load Sequence
Loads Motion Sequence data in the User Memory. For details about Loading, see “Load” (page 174).
MONTAGE Reference Manual
41
Reference
Performance
Edit
Search
Utility
Live Set
Performance
Edit Sequence
Calls up the Motion Sequence Setting display. You can create a custom Sequence consisting of up to
sixteen steps.
Motion Seq Step Value
Home
Motion Control
Overview
Quick Edit
Arpeggio
Motion Seq
Super Knob
Knob Auto
Mixing
Scene
Play / Rec
MIDI
Audio
Motion Seq Step Type
Cycle (Super Knob Motion Sequencer Cycle)
Selects the desired step length for the Motion Sequence.
Settings: 1 – 16
Amplitude (Super Knob Motion Sequencer Amplitude)
Determines how the entire Motion Sequence changes.
Settings: 0 – 127
Smooth (Super Knob Motion Sequencer Smoothness)
Determines the smoothness of the time change of the Motion Sequence.
Settings: 0 – 127
Sequence Select (Super Knob Motion Sequence Select)
Determines the Motion Sequence Type. This setting is applied to the Number B [1] – [8] buttons on the
panel in the Performance Control status.
Settings: 1 – 8
Polarity (Super Knob Motion Sequencer Polarity)
Determines the Sequence Polarity.
Settings: Unipolar, Bipolar
Unipolar: Unipolar changes only in a positive direction from a base parameter value according to the Sequence.
Bipolar: Bipolar changes in both of positive and negative directions from a base parameter value.
Motion Seq Step Value (Super Knob Motion Sequencer Step Value)
Determines the Step Value for the Motion Sequence. You can control the Step Value 1 – 8 or 9 – 16 by the
Sliders 1 – 8 depending on the cursor position on the display.
Settings: 0 – 127
Motion Seq Step Type (Super Knob Motion Sequencer Step Type)
Determines each Step Type of the Motion Sequence. You can switch between the Step Types A and B for
the Step 1 – 8 or 9 – 16 by the SCENE [1] – [8] buttons depending on the cursor position on the display.
Settings: A, B
MONTAGE Reference Manual
42
Reference
Performance
Edit
Search
Utility
Pulse A / Pulse B (Super Knob Motion Sequencer Step Curve Type)
Determines the Curve Type of the parameter for each of “Pulse A” and “Pulse B.” “Motion Seq Step Type”
described above determines which curve set here is used for each step. The vertical axis indicates the
step value and the horizontal axis indicates the time. For detail about the curve shapes, see page 90.
Settings: For Preset Bank: Standard, Sigmoid, Threshold, Bell, Dogleg, FM, AM, M, Discrete Saw, Smooth Saw, Triangle,
Square, Trapezoid, Tilt Sine, Bounce, Resonance, Sequence, Hold
For User Bank: User 1 – 32
When a Library file is read: Curves in Library 1 – 8
Live Set
Performance
Home
Motion Control
Overview
Quick Edit
Arpeggio
Motion Seq
Direction (Super Knob Motion Sequencer Step Curve Direction)
Determines the Direction of the Step Curve for the Motion Sequence.
Settings: Forward, Reverse
Super Knob
Knob Auto
Mixing
Prm1 / Prm2 (Super Knob Motion Sequencer Step Curve Parameter)
Adjusts the shape of the Step Curve for the Motion Sequence.
This parameter is not available depending on the Curve Type. Also the range of available parameter
values differs depending on the Curve Type.
Scene
Play / Rec
MIDI
Audio
Control (Super Knob Motion Sequencer Step Curve Shape Control Switch)
Determines whether or not to control the shape of the Step Curve for the Motion Sequence by operating
Knobs. This parameter is displayed only when “MS FX” is set to on. Also this parameter is not available
depending on the Curve Type.
Settings: Off, On
Store Sequence
Stores the edited Motion Sequence data. For details about storing data, see “Store/Save” (page 176).
MONTAGE Reference Manual
43
Reference
Performance
Edit
Search
Utility
Live Set
Performance
Mixing
Home
From the Mixing display you can adjust the volume and effect settings for each Part.
NOTICE
The settings in the Mixing display are stored as part of Performance data.
Motion Control
Overview
Quick Edit
Mixing
Arpeggio
Motion Seq
Operation
[PERFORMANCE]  [Mixing]
Super Knob
Knob Auto
Mixing
Scene
Play / Rec
MIDI
Audio
Part 1-16 / Audio Switch
Part 1-16 / Audio Switch
Switches between the displays of the Mixing settings for Parts 1 – 16 or the Mixing settings for Parts 1 – 8,
the Audio Part, the Digital Part, and the Master.
Settings: Part 1-16, Audio
MONTAGE Reference Manual
44
Reference
Performance
Edit
Search
Utility
 When one of Parts 1 – 16 is selected
Determines the Mixing setting for each Part 1 –16.
Function Switch
Part Category
Live Set
Performance
Home
Motion Control
Overview
Quick Edit
Arpeggio
Motion Seq
Super Knob
Knob Auto
Mixing
Scene
Play / Rec
MIDI
Audio
Part Category
Indicates the Main category for the Part.
Settings: See the Data List PDF document.
Function Switch
Determines the Mute/Solo setting and the Keyboard Control settings for the selected Part 1 – 16.
Settings: Mute/Solo, Kbd Ctrl
• When “Mute/Solo” is selected
Mute/Solo (Part Mute/Solo)
Turns the Mute/Solo function on/off for the selected Part 1 – 16. When the function is on, this button
lights.
Settings: Off, On
MONTAGE Reference Manual
45
Reference
Performance
Edit
Search
Utility
• When “Kbd Ctrl” is selected
Live Set
Performance
Home
Motion Control
Overview
Quick Edit
Arpeggio
Motion Seq
Super Knob
Knob Auto
Mixing
Scene
Play / Rec
MIDI
Audio
Kbd Ctrl (Keyboard Control)
Turns the Keyboard Control function on/off for the selected Part 1 – 8. When the function is on, this
button lights.
Settings: Off, On
3-band/2-band Switch
EQ
3-band/2-band Switch (3-band EQ/2-band EQ Switch)
Switches between the displays of the 3-band EQ or the 2-band EQ for Parts 1 – 16.
Settings: 3-band, 2-band
EQ (Equalizer)
Displays the 3-band EQ or the 2-band EQ depending on the “3-band/2-band” setting.
Touching the button calls up the menu of Part EQ Edit.
Rev Send (Reverb Send)
Adjusts the Reverb send level of the selected Part 1 – 16.
Settings: 0 – 127
MONTAGE Reference Manual
46
Reference
Performance
Edit
Search
Utility
Live Set
Performance
Var Send (Variation Send)
Adjusts the Variation send level of the selected Part 1 – 16.
Home
Settings: 0 – 127
Motion Control
Dry Level
Overview
Determines the level of the unprocessed (dry) sound of the selected Part 1 – 16.
Quick Edit
Settings: 0 – 127
Arpeggio
Pan
Motion Seq
Determines the stereo pan position of the selected Part 1 – 16.
Super Knob
Settings: L63 – C – R63
Knob Auto
Volume (Part Volume)
Mixing
Determines the output level of the selected Part 1 – 16.
Scene
Settings: 0 – 127
Play / Rec
MIDI
 When “AD” Audio Part or “Digi” Digital Part is selected
Audio
Determines the Mixing setting of the Audio/Digital Part.
A/D Part EQ
A/D Part EQ (Audio Part Equalizer)
Displays the 2-band parametric EQ.
Touching the button calls up the menu of Common/Audio Part EQ Edit.
A/D Part Rev Send (Audio Part Reverb Send)
Digital Part Rev Send (Digital Part Reverb Send)
Adjusts the Reverb send level of the Audio Part/Digital Part.
Settings: 0 – 127
A/D Part Var Send (Audio Part Variation Send)
Digital Part Var Send (Digital Part Variation Send)
Adjusts the Variation send level of the Audio Part/Digital Part.
Settings: 0 – 127
A/D Part Dry Level (Audio Part Dry Level)
Digital Part Dry Level
Determines the level of the unprocessed (dry) sound of the Audio Part/Digital Part.
Settings: 0 – 127
MONTAGE Reference Manual
47
Reference
Performance
Edit
Search
Utility
Live Set
Performance
A/D Part Pan (Audio Part Pan)
Digital Part Pan
Home
Determines the stereo pan position of the Audio Part/Digital Part.
Motion Control
Settings: L63 – C – R63
Overview
A/D Volume (Audio Part Volume)
Digital Part Volume
Quick Edit
Arpeggio
Determines the output level of the Audio Part/Digital Part.
Motion Seq
Settings: 0 – 127
Super Knob
Knob Auto
 When “Mst” (Master Part) is selected
Mixing
Determines the Master Mixing settings.
Master EQ
Scene
Play / Rec
MIDI
Audio
Master EQ (Master Equalizer)
Displays the 5-band parametric EQ.
Touching the button calls up the menu of Master EQ Edit.
Rev Return (Reverb Return)
Var Return (Variation Return)
Determines the return level of the Reverb/Variation effect.
Settings: 0 – 127
Pan (Performance Pan)
Determines the stereo pan position of the entire Performance. This parameter offsets the same
parameter in the Part Edit setting.
Settings: L63 – C – R63
Performance Volume
Determines the output level of the entire Performance.
Settings: 0 – 127
MONTAGE Reference Manual
48
Reference
Performance
Edit
Search
Utility
Live Set
Performance
Scene
Home
You can store all parameter settings such as Arpeggio type, Motion Sequencer type, and the Part
parameter values together as a “Scene.” There are eight Scenes and you can select them by pressing the
[SCENE] button. From the Scene display you can edit parameters related to the Scene function.
When [Memory] is turned on for the function, the Motion Sequencer type, or the Arpeggio type, the
corresponding function information is automatically memorized to the currently selected [SCENE] button.
For details about the Scene function, see the Owner’s Manual.
NOTE You can also change Scene Settings from any other operation displays. To do this, set the parameter value
available for the Scene by operating the corresponding knob/slider, and press one of the SCENE [1] – [8]
buttons while holding down the [SHIFT] button. Scenes 1 to 8 are assigned to each button.
Motion Control
Overview
Quick Edit
Arpeggio
Motion Seq
Super Knob
Knob Auto
Mixing
Scene
Scene
Play / Rec
Operation
[PERFORMANCE]  [Scene]
MIDI
Audio
Scene Select
Switches Scenes by selecting tabs. This setting is applied to the SCENE [1] – [8] buttons on the panel.
Settings: 1 – 8
Memory (Memorize Switch)
Determines whether or not to memorize each parameter (such as Arpeggio, Motion Sequencer, Super
Knob, Mixing, Amplitude EG, and Arp/MS FX) as a Scene. When this is off, the parameter is not displayed
even when the corresponding tab is selected.
Settings: Off, On
 When the “Arp/Motion Seq” tab is selected and both Memorize Switches for “Arp” and
“Motion Seq” are set to ON
Motion Seq Master (Motion Sequencer Master Switch)
Determines whether Motion Sequencer is set to ON or OFF for the entire Performance in the selected
Scene.
Settings: Off, On
Motion Seq Select (Motion Sequence Select)
Determines the Motion Sequence type for the selected Scene.
Settings: 1 – 8
Arp Master (Arpeggio Master Switch)
Determines whether Arpeggio is set to ON or OFF for the entire Performance in the selected Scene.
Settings: Off, On
MONTAGE Reference Manual
49
Reference
Performance
Edit
Search
Utility
Arp Select (Arpeggio Select)
Determines the Arpeggio type for the selected Scene.
Settings: 1 – 8
 When the “Super Knob” tab is selected and the corresponding Memorize Switch is set
to ON
Live Set
Performance
Home
Motion Control
Overview
Quick Edit
Arpeggio
Motion Seq
Super Knob
Knob Auto
Mixing
Scene
Play / Rec
MIDI
Audio
Super Knob (Super Knob Value)
Determines the Super Knob Value for the selected Scene.
Settings: 0 – 127
 When the “Mixing 1” tab is selected and the corresponding Memorize Switch is set to
ON
Rev Send (Reverb Send)
Adjusts the Reverb Send level of each Part in the selected Scene.
Settings: 0 – 127
Var Send (Variation Send)
Adjusts the Variation Send level of each Part in the selected Scene.
Settings: 0 – 127
MONTAGE Reference Manual
50
Reference
Performance
Edit
Search
Utility
Dry Level
Determines the level of the unprocessed (dry) sound for each Part in the selected Scene.
Settings: 0 – 127
Live Set
Performance
Home
Motion Control
Pan
Overview
Determines the stereo pan position for each Part in the selected Scene.
Quick Edit
Settings: L63 – C – R63
Arpeggio
Volume (Part Volume)
Motion Seq
Determines the volumes of each Part in the selected Scene.
Super Knob
Settings: 0 – 127
 When the “Mixing 2” tab is selected and the corresponding Memorize Switch is set to
ON
Knob Auto
Mixing
Scene
Play / Rec
MIDI
Audio
Cutoff
Determines the Cutoff frequency for each Part in the selected Scene.
Settings: -64 – +63
Res (Resonance)
Determines the resonance for each Part in the selected Scene.
Settings: -64 – +63
FEG Depth
Determines the Filter Envelope Generator depth (amount of Cutoff Frequency) for each Part in the
selected Scene.
Settings: -64 – +63
Mute (Part Mute)
Determines the Mute setting for each Part in the selected Scene.
Settings: Off, On
MONTAGE Reference Manual
51
Reference
Performance
Edit
Search
Utility
 When the “AEG” tab is selected and the corresponding Memorize Switch is set to ON
Live Set
Performance
Home
Motion Control
Overview
Quick Edit
Arpeggio
Motion Seq
Super Knob
Knob Auto
Mixing
Scene
Play / Rec
MIDI
Audio
Attack (AEG Attack Time)
Determines the AEG Attack Time for each Part in the selected Scene.
Settings: -64 – +63
Decay (AEG Decay Time)
Determines the AEG Decay Time for each Part in the selected Scene.
Settings: -64 – +63
Sustain (AEG Sustain Level)
Determines the AEG Sustain Level for each Part in the selected Scene.
Settings: -64 – +63
Release (AEG Release Time)
Determines the AEG Release Time for each Part in the selected Scene.
Settings: -64 – +63
 When the “Arp/MS FX 1” tab is selected and the corresponding Memorize Switch is set
to ON
MONTAGE Reference Manual
52
Reference
Performance
Edit
Search
Utility
Swing
Determines the Swing setting of Arpeggio and Motion Sequencer for each Part in the selected Scene.
For details about Swing, see “Quick Edit” (page 34).
Settings: -120 – +120
Live Set
Performance
Home
Motion Control
Overview
Unit (Part Unit Multiply)
Determines the Unit Multiply setting of Arpeggio and Motion Sequencer for each Part in the selected
Scene.
Settings: 50% – 400%, Common
200%: The playback time will be doubled and the tempo is halved.
100%: The normal playback time.
50%: The playback time will be halved and the tempo doubled.
Common: The value set in the Unit Multiply common to the all Parts will be applied.
Quick Edit
Arpeggio
Motion Seq
Super Knob
Knob Auto
Mixing
Scene
Gate Time (Gate Time Rate)
Determines the Gate Time Rate of Arpeggio for each Part in the selected Scene.
Settings: 0% – 200%
Play / Rec
MIDI
Audio
Velocity (Velocity Rate)
Determines the Velocity Rate of Arpeggio for each Part in the selected Scene.
Settings: 0% – 200%
 When the “Arp/MS FX 2” tab is selected and the corresponding Memorize Switch is set
to ON
Amp (Motion Sequencer Amplitude)
Determines the Amplitude of Motion Sequencer for each Part in the selected Scene. For details about
Amplitude, see “Quick Edit” (page 32).
Settings: -64 – +63
Shape (Motion Sequencer Pulse Shape)
Determines the Pulse Shape of Motion Sequencer for each Part in the selected Scene. For details
about Pulse Shape, see “Quick Edit” (page 32).
Settings: -100 – +100
Smooth (Motion Sequencer Smooth)
Determines the Smoothness of Motion Sequencer for each Part in the selected Scene. For details
about Smoothness, see “Quick Edit” (page 32).
Settings: -64 – +63
Random (Motion Sequencer Random)
Determines the “Random” of Motion Sequence for each Part in the selected Scene. For details about
Random, see “Quick Edit” (page 32).
Settings: 0 – 127
MONTAGE Reference Manual
53
Reference
Performance
Edit
Search
Utility
Live Set
Performance
Play/Rec
Home
You can playback/record MIDI data as Songs on this instrument itself or playback/record your
performance (audio data) on a USB flash memory device.
Motion Control
Overview
Quick Edit
Play/Rec
Arpeggio
Motion Seq
Super Knob
MIDI
Knob Auto
From the MIDI display you can playback/record your keyboard performance with using the selected
Performance to the Song. You can playback/record knob operations, controller operations and Arpeggio
playback as well as your keyboard playing to the specified Track as MIDI events.
Mixing
Scene
Play / Rec
 Playback and Playback Standby
Operation
MIDI
Audio
Press the [R] (Play) button, or
[PERFORMANCE]  [Play/Rec]  [MIDI]
Song Length
Track Play Switch
Song Name
Indicates the selected Song Name. Touching the parameter calls up the menu for Load and Rename.
Performance Name
Indicates the selected Performance Name.
Time Signature
Indicates the meter of the Song.
Position (Song Position)
Determines the starting position of Recording/Playback. The indicator also shows the current position
during playback.
The measure’s number is in the left cell and the beat number and clocks are in the right cell.
Tempo
Determines the Song tempo.
Settings: 5 – 300
NOTE The tempo can be set as follows.
[PERFORMANCE]  [UTILITY]  [Tempo Settings] (page 180)
MONTAGE Reference Manual
54
Reference
Performance
Edit
Search
Utility
Live Set
Performance
Store Tempo
Changes the Song tempo to the currently selected Tempo.
This parameter is not available during:
• New recording (No previously recorded Song data.)
• Playback
• Recording Standby
• Recording
Save As .mid File
Calls up the Store/Save display to save the Song as a file.
This button is not available during:
• New recording (No previously recorded Song data.)
• Playback
• Recording Standby
• Recording
• An external memory such as a USB flash memory device is not connected.
Home
Motion Control
Overview
Quick Edit
Arpeggio
Motion Seq
Super Knob
Knob Auto
Mixing
Scene
Play / Rec
MIDI
Audio
Song Length
Indicates the length of the entire sequence.
Track Play Switch
Switches the playback for each track on/off.
Settings: Off, On
 Record and Record Standby
Operation
Press the [I] (Record) button, or
[PERFORMANCE]  [Play/Rec]  [MIDI]  [I] (Record) button
Time Signature
Determines the meter of the Song.
Settings: 1/16 – 16/16, 1/8 – 16/8, 1/4 – 8/4
Rec Quantize (Record Quantize)
Quantization is the process of adjusting the timing of note events by moving them closer to the nearest
exact beat. You can use this feature, for example, to improve the timing of a performance recorded in real
time. Record quantize aligns the timing of notes automatically, as you record.
Settings: 60 (32nd note), 80 (16th note triplet), 120 (16th note), 160 (8th note triplet), 240 (8th note), 320 (1/4 note triplet),
480 (1/4 note), Off
MONTAGE Reference Manual
55
Reference
Performance
Edit
Search
Utility
Live Set
Performance
Record Type
Determines the Recording Type. This parameter is not available for the first recording.
Settings: Replace, Overdub, Punch
Replace: You can use this method when you want to overwrite an already recorded Track with new data in real time.
Home
Motion Control
The original data will be erased.
Overview
Overdub: You can use this method when you want to add more data to a Track that already contains data.
Quick Edit
Previously recorded data will be maintained.
Punch: You can use this method when you want to overwrite data to a specified range of a Track that already
Arpeggio
contains data. It allows you to overwrite the already recorded data from the starting point to the ending point
(measure/beat) that was specified before recording.
Motion Seq
Punch In
Super Knob
Knob Auto
Determines the starting point (measure and beat) for recording. This parameter is available only when
“punch” is selected for “Record Type.”
Mixing
Punch Out
Play / Rec
Determines the ending point (measure and beat) for recording. This parameter is available only when
“punch” is selected for “Record Type.”
Scene
MIDI
Audio
NOTE For details about the Punch In/Out setting, see the Owner’s Manual.
Undo
The Undo Job cancels the changes you made in your most recent recording session, restoring the data to
its previous state.
Redo
Redo is available only after using Undo, and lets you restore the changes you made before undoing them.
Audio
From the Audio display you can record your performance on the instrument as WAV format (44.1-kHz, 24bit, stereo) audio files to a USB flash memory device. It is possible to record continuously for up to 74
minutes (assuming that the USB storage device has sufficient free memory).
 Playback and Playback Standby
Operation
[PERFORMANCE]  [Play/Rec]  [Audio]
Current play position in the
entire audio data
Level meter
Audio Name
Indicates the name of the selected Audio file.
MONTAGE Reference Manual
56
Reference
Performance
Edit
Search
Utility
Position (Audio Position)
Determines the starting position of Playback. The indicator also shows the current position during
playback.
Live Set
Performance
Home
Motion Control
Audio Volume
Overview
Determines the volume of the Audio Playback. This parameter cannot be changed during recording.
Quick Edit
Settings: 0 – 255
Arpeggio
Audio Length
Motion Seq
Indicates the length of the entire audio data.
Super Knob
Knob Auto
Level Meter
Indicates the Audio Input/Output level.
Mixing
Scene
 Record and Record Standby
Play / Rec
MIDI
Operation
[PERFORMANCE]  [Play/Rec]  [Audio]  [I] (Record) button
Audio
Recordable (Audio Recordable Time)
Indicates available recording time. This parameter is displayed only during recording standby.
Trigger Level
Determines the method of starting recording. This parameter is displayed only during recording standby.
If you set the trigger level to “manual,” recording will begin whenever you press the [R] (Play) button.
Alternatively, if you set a value between 1 and 127, recording will begin automatically whenever the [R]
(Play) button is pressed and the playback volume exceeds that level. The level set here will be indicated
by blue triangles in the level meter. For best results, set this parameter as low as possible to capture the
entire signal, but not so low as to record unwanted noise.
Settings: manual, 1 – 127
MONTAGE Reference Manual
57
Reference
Performance
Edit
Normal Part (AWM2)
Search
Drum Part
Utility
Normal Part (FM-X)
Live Set
Common/Audio
Normal Part (AWM2) Edit
Normal Part (AWM2) Edit
Common
A Normal Part (AWM2) (having pitched musical instrument sounds) can consist of up to eight Elements.
An Element is the basic, smallest unit for a Part. There are two types of Normal Part (AWM2) Edit displays:
Element Common Edit display, for editing settings common to all eight Elements; and Element Edit display,
for editing individual Elements.
Part Settings
General
Pitch
Zone Settings
Element Common Edit (Common)
Zone Transmit
Effect
Routing
Part Settings
Ins A
Ins B
EQ
General
Arpeggio
From the General display you can set various parameters such as Part Name, Volume, and Pan.
Operation
[PERFORMANCE]  [EDIT]  Part selection  ELEMENT/OPERATOR [COMMON] 
[Part Settings]  [General]
Common
Individual
Advanced
Motion Seq
Common
Lane
Mod / Control
Part LFO
Control Assign
Receive SW
Element
Osc / Tune
Pitch EG
Filter
Type
Filter EG
Scale
Amplitude
Level / Pan
Amp EG
Scale
Part Category Main (Part Main Category)
Part Category Sub (Part Sub Category)
Element LFO
Determines the Main category and the Sub category for the selected Part.
Element EQ
Settings: See the Data List PDF document.
Part Name
Determines the Part name of the selected Part. Part names can contain up to 20 characters. Touching the
parameter calls up the input character display.
All Element
Osc
Balance
Volume (Part Volume)
Determines the output level of the selected Part.
Settings: 0 – 127
Pan
Determines the stereo pan position of the selected Part.
Settings: L63 – C – R63
MONTAGE Reference Manual
58
Reference
Performance
Edit
Normal Part (AWM2)
Search
Drum Part
Utility
Normal Part (FM-X)
Live Set
Common/Audio
Dry Level
Determines the dry sound level (without effect processing) of the selected Part. This is available only when
“Part Output” is set to “MainL&R.”
Settings: 0 – 127
Normal Part (AWM2) Edit
Common
Part Settings
General
Var Send (Variation Send)
Pitch
Determines the level of the selected Part that is sent to the Variation effect. This is available only when “Part
Output” is set to “MainL&R.”
Zone Settings
Settings: 0 – 127
Zone Transmit
Effect
Rev Send (Reverb Send)
Determines the level of the selected Part that is sent to the Reverb effect. This is available only when “Part
Output” is set to “MainL&R.”
Settings: 0 – 127
Part Output (Part Output Select)
Determines which audio output is used for the selected Part.
Settings: MainL&R, AsgnL&R, USB1&2...USB29&30, AsgnL, AsgnR, USB1 – 30, Off
MainL&R: Outputs in stereo (two channels) to the OUTPUT [L/MONO]/[R] jacks.
AsgnL&R: Outputs in stereo (two channels) to the ASSIGNABLE OUTPUT [L]/[R] jacks.
USB1&2…USB29&30: Outputs in stereo (Channels 1&2 – 29&30) to the [USB TO HOST] terminal.
AsgnL: Outputs in mono (one channel) to the ASSIGNABLE OUTPUT [L] jack.
AsgnR: Outputs in mono (one channel) to the ASSIGNABLE OUTPUT [R] jack.
USB1 – 30: Outputs in mono (Channels 1 – 30) to the [USB TO HOST] terminal.
Off: No audio signal for the Part is output.
Routing
Ins A
Ins B
EQ
Arpeggio
Common
Individual
Advanced
Motion Seq
Common
Lane
Mod / Control
Mono/Poly
Part LFO
Selects monophonic or polyphonic playback for the selected Part. Monophonic is for single notes only, and
polyphonic is for playing multiple simultaneous notes.
Control Assign
Settings: Mono, Poly
Receive SW
Element
Key Assign (Key Assign Mode)
Osc / Tune
Determines the playing method when the same notes are received continuously, and without
corresponding note off messages. For details, refer to the Synthesizer Parameter Manual PDF document.
Pitch EG
Settings: Single, Multi
Single: Double or repeated playback of the same note is not possible. The first note will be stopped, then the next
Filter
Type
note will be sounded.
Filter EG
Multi: All notes are sounded simultaneously. This allows playback of the same note when it is played multiple times
Scale
in succession (especially for tambourine and cymbal sounds that you would want to ring out to their full decay).
Amplitude
Arp Play Only (Arpeggio Play Only)
Level / Pan
Determines whether or not the current Part plays only the note events of the Arpeggio playback. When this
parameter is set to on, only the note events of the Arpeggio playback affect the tone generator block.
Amp EG
Settings: Off, On
Scale
Element LFO
Element Pan (Element Pan Switch)
Determines whether the individual pan settings for each Element (made via ([EDIT]  Part selection 
Element selection  [Amplitude]  [Level/Pan]  “Pan”) are applied or not. When this is set to “off,” the
pan position for each Element in the Part is set to center.
Settings: Off, On
Element EQ
All Element
Osc
Balance
Velocity Limit
Determines the minimum and maximum values of the velocity range within which each Part will respond.
Each Part will only sound for notes played within its specified velocity range. If you first specify the
maximum value and then the minimum value, for example “93 to 34,” then the Velocity range covers both
“1 to 34” and “93 to 127.” For instructions on setting the Velocity Limit, refer to the Owner’s Manual.
Settings: 1 – 127
Note Limit
Determines the lowest and highest notes of the keyboard range for each Part. Each Part will only sound for
notes played within its specified range. If you first specify the highest note and then the lowest note, for
example “C5 to C4,” then the note range covers both “C-2 to C4” and “C5 to G8.”
Settings: C -2 – G8
MONTAGE Reference Manual
59
Reference
Performance
Edit
Search
Normal Part (AWM2)
Drum Part
Velocity Depth (Velocity Sensitivity Depth)
Determines the degree to which the resulting volume of the
tone generator responds to your playing strength. The higher
the value, the more the volume changes in response to your
playing strength (as shown below).
Settings: 0 – 127
Utility
Normal Part (FM-X)
Live Set
Common/Audio
When Offset (below) is set to 64:
Depth=127
127
Actual resulting
velocity
(affecting the
tone generator)
Depth=64
Common
Part Settings
Depth=32
General
Pitch
Depth=0
0
127
Velocity with which you play a note
Velocity Offset (Velocity Sensitivity Offset)
Determines the amount by which played velocities are adjusted for the actual resulting velocity effect. This
lets you raise or lower all velocities based on this setting value—allowing you to automatically compensate
for playing too strongly or too softly.
Settings: 0 – 127
Zone Settings
Zone Transmit
Effect
Routing
Ins A
Ins B
EQ
When Depth (above) = 64
and Offset = 32
127
Actual
resulting
velocity
(affecting
the tone
generator)
0
Normal Part (AWM2) Edit
When Depth (above) = 64
and Offset = 64
127
Actual
resulting
velocity
(affecting
the tone
generator)
64
127
Velocity with which you play a note
When Depth (above) = 64
and Offset = 96
127
Actual
resulting
velocity
(affecting
the tone
generator)
0
64
127
Velocity with which you play a note
0
64
127
Velocity with which you play a note
Arpeggio
Common
Individual
Advanced
Motion Seq
Common
Lane
Mod / Control
Part LFO
Control Assign
Pitch
Receive SW
From the Pitch display you can set Pitch-related parameters for the Part.
Operation
[PERFORMANCE]  [EDIT]  Part selection  ELEMENT/OPERATOR [COMMON] 
[Part Settings]  [Pitch]
Element
Osc / Tune
Pitch EG
Filter
Type
Filter EG
Scale
Amplitude
Level / Pan
Amp EG
Scale
Element LFO
Element EQ
All Element
Osc
Balance
Portamento Master SW (Portamento Master Switch)
Portamento is used to create a smooth transition in pitch from the first note played on the keyboard to the
next. The Portamento Master Switch determines whether Portamento is applied to the entire Performance
or not.
Settings: Off, On
MONTAGE Reference Manual
60
Reference
Performance
Edit
Normal Part (AWM2)
Search
Drum Part
Utility
Normal Part (FM-X)
Live Set
Common/Audio
Portamento Part SW (Portamento Part Switch)
Determines whether Portamento is applied to the selected Part or not.
Settings: Off, On
Normal Part (AWM2) Edit
Common
Part Settings
Portamento Mode
General
Determines the Portamento mode.
Pitch
Settings: Fingered, Full-time
Fingered: Portamento is only applied when you play legato (playing the next note before releasing the previous
Zone Settings
one).
Full-time: Portamento is applied to all notes.
Portamento Time
Zone Transmit
Effect
Routing
Determines the pitch transition time or rate when Portamento is applied.
Ins A
Settings: 0 – 127
Ins B
Portamento Time Mode
Determines how the pitch changes in time.
Settings: Rate 1, Time 1, Rate 2, Time 2
Rate 1: Pitch changes at the specified rate.
Time 1: Pitch changes in the specified time.
Rate 2: Pitch changes at the specified rate within an octave.
Time 2: Pitch changes in the specified time within an octave.
EQ
Arpeggio
Common
Individual
Advanced
Motion Seq
Common
Portamento Legato Slope
Determines the speed of the attack of legato notes, when “Mono/Poly” is set to “Mono.” (Legato notes
“overlap” each other, the next being played before the previous is released.)
Settings: 0 – 7
Lane
Mod / Control
Part LFO
Control Assign
Note Shift
Determines the pitch (key transpose) setting for each Part in semitones.
Settings: -24 – +0 – +24
Receive SW
Element
Osc / Tune
Detune
Pitch EG
Determines the pitch settings of the selected Part in 0.1 Hz increments.
Filter
Settings: -12.8Hz – +0.0Hz – +12.7Hz
Type
Pitch Bend / (Pitch Bend Range Upper/Lower)
Filter EG
Determines the maximum Pitch Bend Range in semitones.
Scale
Settings: -48 – +0 – +24
Amplitude
Micro Tuning Name
Level / Pan
Determines the tuning system for the selected Part. For information on the various tuning systems, see the
Synthesizer Parameter Manual PDF document.
Amp EG
Settings: Equal Temperament, Pure Major, Pure Minor, Werckmeister, Kirnberger, Vallotti & Young, 1/4 shift, 1/4 tone, 1/8 tone,
Indian, Arabic 1, Arabic 2, Arabic 3, User 1 – 8 (when the User Bank is selected), Library 1-1 – 8-8 (when the Library
file is read)
Micro Tuning Root
Determines the root note for the Micro Tuning function. This root note setting may not be necessary
depending on the “Micro Tuning Name” type.
Scale
Element LFO
Element EQ
All Element
Osc
Balance
Settings: C – B
MONTAGE Reference Manual
61
Reference
Performance
Edit
Normal Part (AWM2)
Search
Drum Part
Utility
Normal Part (FM-X)
Edit User Tuning
Calls up the User Micro Tuning Setting display.
Live Set
Common/Audio
Normal Part (AWM2) Edit
Common
Part Settings
General
Pitch
Zone Settings
Zone Transmit
Effect
Routing
Ins A
Ins B
EQ
Arpeggio
Common
Individual
Advanced
Motion Seq
Common
Lane
Tuning No. (Micro Tuning Number)
Indicates the selected User Micro Tuning Number.
Settings: 1 – 8
Tuning Name (Micro Tuning Name)
Determines the name of the selected User Micro Tuning. Touching the parameter calls up the input
character display.
Mod / Control
Part LFO
Control Assign
Receive SW
Element
Osc / Tune
C, C#, D, D#, E, F, F#, G, G#, A, A#, B
Pitch EG
Adjusts the pitch of each note in 1 cent steps determines the Micro Tuning.
Filter
Settings: -99 – +99
Type
Initialize
Filter EG
Initializes the selected User Micro Tuning.
Scale
Amplitude
Level / Pan
Amp EG
Scale
Element LFO
Element EQ
All Element
Osc
Balance
MONTAGE Reference Manual
62
Reference
Performance
Edit
Normal Part (AWM2)
Search
Drum Part
Utility
Normal Part (FM-X)
Live Set
Common/Audio
Zone Settings
From the Zone Setting display you can set Zone-related parameters.
You can divide the keyboard into a maximum of eight independent areas (called “Zones”). To each Zone
can be assigned different MIDI channels. This makes it possible to control several Parts of the multi-timbral
tone generator simultaneously by a single keyboard or to control Parts of an external MIDI instrument over
several different channels in addition to the internal Parts of this synthesizer itself—letting you use the
MONTAGE to effectively do the work of several keyboards.
To activate this display, select [UTILITY]  [Settings]  [Advanced], then set “Zone Master” to “ON.”
For details, refer to the Owner’s Manual.
Normal Part (AWM2) Edit
Common
Part Settings
General
Pitch
Zone Settings
Zone Transmit
Effect
Routing
Operation
[PERFORMANCE]  [EDIT]  Part selection  ELEMENT/OPERATOR [COMMON] 
[Part Settings]  [Zone Settings]
Ins A
Ins B
EQ
Arpeggio
Common
Individual
Advanced
Motion Seq
Common
Lane
Mod / Control
Part LFO
Control Assign
Receive SW
Element
Osc / Tune
Pitch EG
Filter
Zone (Zone Switch)
Determines whether the Zone function is used (on) or not (off). When this is set to off, all of the following
parameters are not available.
Settings: Off, On
Int SW (Internal Switch)
Determines whether MIDI messages generated by playing the keyboard in the range of the selected Zone
are transmitted to the internal tone generator or not.
Type
Filter EG
Scale
Amplitude
Level / Pan
Amp EG
Scale
Settings: Off, On
Element LFO
Transmit Ch (Transmit Channel)
Element EQ
Determines the MIDI Transmit Channel for the selected Zone.
Settings: Ch1 – Ch16, Off
Note Limit
All Element
Osc
Balance
Determines the lowest and highest notes of the range for the selected Zone. The selected Zone will sound
only when you play notes within this range. If you first specify the highest note and then the lowest note, for
example “C5 to C4,” then the note range covers both “C-2 to C4” and “C5 to G8.”
Settings: C -2 – G8
Octave Shift
Determines the amount in octaves by which the range of the Zone is shifted up or down. You can adjust the
offset up or down over a maximum range of three octaves.
Settings: -3 – +0 (Default) – +3
Transpose
Determines the amount in semitones by which the range of the Zone is shifted up or down.
Settings: -11 – +0 (Default) – +11
MONTAGE Reference Manual
63
Reference
Performance
Edit
Normal Part (AWM2)
Search
Drum Part
Utility
Normal Part (FM-X)
Live Set
Common/Audio
Bank Select (Transmit Bank Select)
Determines whether Bank Select MSB/LSB messages are transmitted to the external tone generator or not.
This is not available when the Transmit Channel is set to off.
Settings: Off, On
Normal Part (AWM2) Edit
Common
Part Settings
General
Pgm Change (Transmit Program Change)
Pitch
Determines whether Program Change messages are transmitted to the external tone generator or not. This
is not available when the Transmit Channel is set to off.
Zone Settings
Settings: Off, On
Zone Transmit
Effect
Vol/Exp (Transmit Volume/Expression)
Determines whether volume messages are transmitted to the external tone generator or not. This is not
available when the Transmit Channel is set to off.
Settings: Off, On
Pan (Transmit Pan)
Determines whether Pan messages are transmitted to the external tone generator or not. This is not
available when the Transmit Channel is set to off.
Settings: Off, On
MIDI Bank MSB/LSB (Bank Select MSB/LSB)
Determines the Bank numbers to be transmitted to the external tone generator when selecting the
Performance. The Bank consists of MSB and LSB values. This is not available when “Transmit Bank Select”
is set to off.
Settings: 000 – 127
Routing
Ins A
Ins B
EQ
Arpeggio
Common
Individual
Advanced
Motion Seq
Common
Lane
Mod / Control
MIDI Pgm Num (Program Change Number)
Part LFO
Determines the Program Change Number to be transmitted to the external tone generator when selecting
the Performance. This is not available when the “Transmit Program Change” is set to off.
Control Assign
Settings: 001 – 128
Receive SW
Element
MIDI Volume
Osc / Tune
Determines the transmit volume to the external tone generator when selecting the Performance.
This is not available when the Transmit Volume/Expression is set to “off”.
Pitch EG
Settings: 0 – 127
Filter
Type
MIDI Pan
Filter EG
Determines the Pan to be transmitted to the external tone generator when selecting the Performance.
This is not available when the Transmit Pan is set to “off.”
Scale
Settings: L64 – C – R63
Amplitude
Level / Pan
MIDI Send
By turning this parameter on, MIDI Bank, MIDI Pgm Number, MIDI Volume, or MIDI Pan is transmitted to
the external tone generator depending on the setting of the Transmit Switch.
This is not available when the Transmit Channel is set to off or when all of the four Transmit Switches are set
to off.
Settings: Off, On
Amp EG
Scale
Element LFO
Element EQ
All Element
Osc
Balance
MONTAGE Reference Manual
64
Reference
Performance
Edit
Normal Part (AWM2)
Search
Drum Part
Utility
Normal Part (FM-X)
Live Set
Common/Audio
Zone Transmit
From the Zone Transmit display you can set how each individual zone affects transmission of various MIDI
data, such as Control Change and Program Change messages. When the relevant parameter is set to
“on,” playing the selected zone will transmit the corresponding MIDI data.
All settings made in this display are not available when “Transmit Ch” is set to “Off” in the Zone Setting
display.
To activate this display, select [UTILITY]  [Settings]  [Advanced], then set “Zone Master” to “ON.”
For details, refer to the Owner’s Manual.
Normal Part (AWM2) Edit
Common
Part Settings
General
Pitch
Zone Settings
Zone Transmit
Effect
Operation
[PERFORMANCE]  [EDIT]  Part selection  ELEMENT/OPERATOR [COMMON] 
[Part Settings]  [Zone Transmit]
Routing
Ins A
Ins B
EQ
Arpeggio
Common
Individual
Advanced
Motion Seq
Common
Lane
Mod / Control
Part LFO
Control Assign
Receive SW
Element
Osc / Tune
Pitch EG
Filter
Pgm Change (Transmit Program Change)
Type
Determines whether Program Change messages are transmitted to the external tone generator or not.
Filter EG
Settings: Off, On
Bank Select (Transmit Bank Select)
Determines whether Bank Select MSB/LSB messages are transmitted to the external tone generator or not.
This is not available when the Transmit Control Change is set to off.
Settings: Off, On
Scale
Amplitude
Level / Pan
Amp EG
Scale
Pitch Bend (Transmit Pitch Bend)
Element LFO
Determines whether Pitch Bend messages are transmitted to the external tone generator or not.
Element EQ
Settings: Off, On
All Element
After Touch (Transmit After Touch)
Osc
Determines whether After Touch messages are transmitted to the external tone generator or not.
Balance
Settings: Off, On
CC (Transmit Control Change)
Determines whether Control Change messages are transmitted to the external tone generator or not.
Settings: Off, On
Vol/Exp (Transmit Volume/Expression)
Determines whether volume messages are transmitted to the external tone generator or not.
This is not available when the Transmit Control Change is set to off.
Settings: Off, On
MONTAGE Reference Manual
65
Reference
Performance
Edit
Normal Part (AWM2)
Search
Drum Part
Utility
Normal Part (FM-X)
Live Set
Common/Audio
Pan (Transmit Pan)
Determines whether Pan messages are transmitted to the external tone generator or not.
This is not available when the Transmit Control Change is set to off.
Settings: Off, On
Normal Part (AWM2) Edit
Common
Part Settings
General
MW (Transmit Modulation Wheel)
Determines whether MIDI messages generated by using the Modulation Wheel are transmitted to the
external tone generator or not.
This is not available when the Transmit Control Change is set to off.
Settings: Off, On
Sustain (Transmit Sustain)
Determines whether Sustain messages are transmitted to the external tone generator or not.
This is not available when the Transmit Control Change is set to off.
Settings: Off, On
FC1/FC2 (Transmit Fool Controller)
Determines whether MIDI messages generated by pressing the optional Foot Controller are transmitted to
the external tone generator or not.
This is not available when the Transmit Control Change is set to off.
Settings: Off, On
Pitch
Zone Settings
Zone Transmit
Effect
Routing
Ins A
Ins B
EQ
Arpeggio
Common
Individual
Advanced
Motion Seq
FS (Transmit Foot Switch)
Common
Determines whether MIDI messages generated by pressing the optional Foot Switch are transmitted to the
external tone generator or not.
This is not available when the Transmit Control Change is set to off.
Lane
Settings: Off, On
Mod / Control
Part LFO
Control Assign
A. SW1/A. SW2 (Transmit Assignable Switch)
Determines whether MIDI messages generated by pressing the [ASSIGN 1] and [ASSIGN 2] buttons are
transmitted to the external tone generator or not.
This is not available when the Transmit Control Change is set to off.
Receive SW
Element
Osc / Tune
Settings: Off, On
Pitch EG
MS Hold (Transmit Motion Sequencer Hold)
Filter
Determines whether MIDI messages generated by pressing the [MOTION SEQ HOLD] button are
transmitted to the external tone generator or not.
This is not available when the Transmit Control Change is set to off.
Settings: Off, On
Type
Filter EG
Scale
Amplitude
MS Trigger (Transmit Motion Sequencer Trigger)
Level / Pan
Determines whether MIDI messages generated by pressing the [MOTION SEQ TRIGGER] button are
transmitted to the external tone generator or not.
This is not available when the Transmit Control Change is set to off.
Amp EG
Settings: Off, On
Scale
Element LFO
Element EQ
RB (Transmit Ribbon Controller)
Determines whether MIDI messages generated by using the Ribbon Controller are transmitted to the
external tone generator or not.
This is not available when the Transmit Control Change is set to off.
All Element
Osc
Balance
Settings: Off, On
BC (Transmit Breath Controller)
Determines whether MIDI messages for Breath Controller are transmitted to the external tone generator or
not.
This is not available when the Transmit Control Change is set to off.
Settings: Off, On
A.Knob1 – 8 (Transmit Assignable Knob)
Determines whether MIDI messages generated by using the Assignable Knobs 1 – 8 are transmitted to the
external tone generator or not.
This is not available when the Transmit Control Change is set to off.
Settings: Off, On
MONTAGE Reference Manual
66
Reference
Performance
Edit
Normal Part (AWM2)
Search
Drum Part
Utility
Normal Part (FM-X)
Live Set
Common/Audio
Normal Part (AWM2) Edit
Effect
Common
Part Settings
Routing
General
From the Routing display you can determine the Effect connections for Parts.
Pitch
Zone Settings
Operation
[PERFORMANCE]  [EDIT]  Part selection  ELEMENT/OPERATOR [COMMON]  [Effect]
[Routing]
Zone Transmit
Effect
Insertion FX Switch
Routing
Ins A
Ins B
EQ
Arpeggio
Common
Individual
Advanced
Motion Seq
Common
Lane
Mod / Control
Part LFO
Control Assign
Receive SW
Element
Osc / Tune
Insertion FX Switch
Pitch EG
Filter
Element 1 – 8 (Element Connection Switch)
Type
Determines which Insertion Effect (A or B) is used to process each individual Element. The “Thru” setting
lets you bypass the Insertion Effects for the specified element.
Filter EG
Settings: Thru, InsA (Insertion Effect A), InsB (Insertion Effect B)
Scale
Amplitude
Insertion FX Switch (Insertion Effect Switch)
Level / Pan
Determines whether the Insertion Effect A/B is active or not.
Amp EG
Settings: Off, On
Category (Effect Category)
Type (Effect Type)
Determines the category and type for the selected Effect.
Settings: For details on the editable Effect categories and types, see the Data List PDF document. Also, for details on the
description for each Effect type, see the Synthesizer Parameter Manual PDF document.
Scale
Element LFO
Element EQ
All Element
Osc
Balance
Preset
Allows you to call up pre-programmed settings for each Effect type, designed to be used for specific
applications and situations. You can change how the sound is affected by the selected pre-programmed
settings.
Settings: For a list of all Preset Effects, see the Data List PDF document.
Side Chain/Modulator (Side Chain/Modulator Part)
The Side Chain/Modulator uses the output from one track to control an effect in a different track. You can
specify the Effect type for activating the feature so that input signals for Parts other than the selected Part
or the audio input signal can control the specified Effect. This may not be active depending on the
particular Effect Type.
Here you can determine the Part used for the Side Chain/Modulator.
This is not available when you select the same Part or “Master” as the Modulator Part.
Settings: Part 1 – 16, A/D, Master, Off
MONTAGE Reference Manual
67
Reference
Performance
Edit
Normal Part (AWM2)
Search
Drum Part
Utility
Normal Part (FM-X)
Live Set
Common/Audio
Ins Connect (Insertion Connection Type)
Determines the effect routing for Insertion Effects A and B. The setting changes are shown on the diagram
in the display, giving you a clear picture of how the signal is routed. For details, see the section “Effect
connection” (page 19) of the “Basic Structure.”
Settings: Parallel, Ins AB, Ins BA
Rev Send (Reverb Send)
Determines the Send level of the signal sent from Insertion Effect A/B (or the bypassed signal) to the
Reverb effect. This is available only when “Part Output” is set to “MainL&R.”
Settings: 0 – 127
Var Send (Variation Send)
Determines the Send level of the signal sent from Insertion Effect A/B (or the bypassed signal) to the
Variation effect. This is available only when “Part Output” is set to “MainL&R.”
Settings: 0 – 127
Part Output (Part Output Select)
Normal Part (AWM2) Edit
Common
Part Settings
General
Pitch
Zone Settings
Zone Transmit
Effect
Routing
Ins A
Ins B
EQ
Arpeggio
Determines the specific audio output.
Common
Settings: MainL&R, AsgnL&R, USB1&2…USB29&30, AsgnL, AsgnR, USB1 – 30, Off
MainL&R: Outputs in stereo (two channels) to the OUTPUT [L/MONO]/[R] jacks.
AsgnL&R: Outputs in stereo (two channels) to the ASSIGNABLE OUTPUT [L]/[R] jacks.
USB1&2…USB29&30: Outputs in stereo (Channels 1&2 – 29&30) to the [USB TO HOST] terminal.
AsgnL: Outputs in mono (one channel) to the ASSIGNABLE OUTPUT [L] jack.
AsgnR: Outputs in mono (one channel) to the ASSIGNABLE OUTPUT [R] jack.
USB1 – 30: Outputs in mono (Channels 1 – 30) to the [USB TO HOST] terminal.
Off: No audio signal for the Part is output.
Individual
Advanced
Motion Seq
Common
Lane
Mod / Control
Part LFO
Envelope Follower
Control Assign
Calls up the Envelope Follower setting display. For details on the Envelope Follower, see the “Envelope
Follower Block” (page 20) in the “Basic Structure.”
Receive SW
Element
Osc / Tune
Pitch EG
Filter
Type
Filter EG
Scale
Amplitude
Level / Pan
Amp EG
Scale
Element LFO
Element EQ
All Element
Osc
Balance
Part (Input Source)
Displays the Part as “Input Source” for the selected Envelope Follower.
Settings: Master, AD, Part 1 – Part 16
Gain (Envelope Follower Gain)
Determines the Input gain of the Input Source set in “Part.”
Settings: -24dB – 0dB – +24dB
Attack (Envelope Follower Attack)
Determines the attack time of the Envelope Follower.
Settings: 1ms – 40ms
MONTAGE Reference Manual
68
Reference
Performance
Edit
Normal Part (AWM2)
Search
Drum Part
Utility
Normal Part (FM-X)
Live Set
Common/Audio
Normal Part (AWM2) Edit
Release (Envelope Follower Release)
Determines the release time of the Envelope Follower.
Settings: 10ms – 680ms
Common
Part Settings
Input Level
General
Indicates the Input Level of the signal from the Input Source set in “Part.”
Pitch
Zone Settings
Envelope Follower Output
Zone Transmit
Indicates the Output Level of the Envelope Follower.
Effect
Routing
Ins A (Insertion Effect A)
Ins B (Insertion Effect B)
Ins A
Ins B
From the Insertion Effect A/Insertion Effect B display you can set parameters related to Insertion Effect.
EQ
Arpeggio
Operation
[PERFORMANCE]  [EDIT]  Part selection  ELEMENT/OPERATOR [COMMON]  [Effect]
[Ins A] / [Ins B]
Common
Individual
Insertion FX Switch
Advanced
Motion Seq
Common
Lane
Mod / Control
Part LFO
Control Assign
Receive SW
Element
Osc / Tune
Pitch EG
Filter
Type
Filter EG
Scale
Amplitude
Level / Pan
Amp EG
Effect Parameter
Insertion FX Switch (Insertion Effect Switch)
Determines whether the selected Insertion Effect is active or not.
Scale
Element LFO
Element EQ
All Element
Category (Effect Category)
Type (Effect Type)
Osc
Balance
Determines the category and type for the selected Insertion Effect.
Settings: For details on the editable Effect categories and types, see the Data List PDF document. Also, for details on the
description for each Effect type, see the Synthesizer Parameter Manual PDF document.
Preset
Allows you to call up pre-programmed settings for each Effect type, designed to be used for specific
applications and situations. You can change how the sound is affected by the selected pre-programmed
settings.
Settings: For a list of all Preset Effect types, see the Data List PDF document.
MONTAGE Reference Manual
69
Reference
Performance
Edit
Normal Part (AWM2)
Search
Drum Part
Utility
Normal Part (FM-X)
Live Set
Common/Audio
Normal Part (AWM2) Edit
Side Chain/Modulator (Side Chain/Modulator Part)
The Side Chain/Modulator uses the output from one track to control an effect in a different track. You can
specify the Effect type for activating the feature so that input signals for Parts other than the selected Part
or the audio input signal can control the specified Effect. This may not be active depending on the
particular Effect Type.
Here you can determine the Part used for the Side Chain/Modulator.
This is not available when you select the same Part or “Master” as the Modulator Part.
Settings: Part 1 – 16, A/D, Master, Off
Common
Part Settings
General
Pitch
Zone Settings
Zone Transmit
Effect Parameter
Effect
Active Effect parameters differ depending on the selected Effect Types. For details on the editable Effect
parameters, see the Data List PDF document. Also, for details on the description for each Effect parameter,
see the Synthesizer Parameter Manual PDF document.
Routing
Ins A
Ins B
EQ
EQ (Part Equalizer)
Arpeggio
From the Part Equalizer display you can set parameters related to Part EQ.
Common
Individual
Advanced
Part
Motion Seq
3-band EQ
Insertion Effect
Part EQ
2-band EQ
Part EQ
Common
Lane
Mod / Control
Operation
[PERFORMANCE]  [EDIT]  Part selection  ELEMENT/OPERATOR [COMMON]  [Effect] 
[EQ]
Part LFO
Control Assign
Receive SW
Element
Osc / Tune
Pitch EG
Filter
Type
Filter EG
Scale
Amplitude
Level / Pan
Amp EG
Scale
Element LFO
Element EQ
All Element
Osc
Balance
3-band EQ / 2-band EQ (3-band EQ/2-band EQ Switch)
Switches displays between 3-band EQ and 2-band EQ.
Settings: 3-band EQ, 2-band EQ
MONTAGE Reference Manual
70
Reference
Performance
Edit
Normal Part (AWM2)
 When “3-band EQ” is selected
From this display you can make 3-band EQ settings.
Search
Drum Part
Utility
Normal Part (FM-X)
Live Set
Common/Audio
Normal Part (AWM2) Edit
Common
Part Settings
General
Pitch
Zone Settings
Zone Transmit
Effect
Routing
Ins A
Ins B
EQ
Arpeggio
Common
Individual
Advanced
Motion Seq
Common
Lane
EQ Low Gain (3-band EQ Low Gain)
Determines the level gain of the Low band.
Settings: -12dB – +12dB
EQ Mid Gain (3-band EQ Middle Gain)
Determines the level gain of the Mid band.
Settings: -12dB – +12dB
Mod / Control
Part LFO
Control Assign
Receive SW
Element
Osc / Tune
EQ Hi Gain (3-band EQ High Gain)
Pitch EG
Determines the level gain of the High band.
Filter
Settings: -12dB – +12dB
Type
EQ Low Freq (3-band EQ Low Frequency)
Filter EG
Determines the frequency for the Low band.
Scale
Settings: 50.1Hz – 2.00kHz
EQ Mid Freq (3-band EQ Middle Frequency)
Determines the frequency for the Mid band.
Settings: 139.7Hz – 10.1kHz
EQ Hi Freq (3-band EQ High Frequency)
Determines the frequency for the High band.
Settings: 503.8Hz – 14.0kHz
Amplitude
Level / Pan
Amp EG
Scale
Element LFO
Element EQ
All Element
Osc
EQ Mid Q (3-band EQ Middle Q)
Determines the EQ bandwidth of the Mid band.
Balance
Settings: 0.7 – 10.3
MONTAGE Reference Manual
71
Reference
Performance
Edit
Normal Part (AWM2)
Search
Drum Part
Utility
Normal Part (FM-X)
 When “2-band EQ” is selected
Live Set
Common/Audio
Normal Part (AWM2) Edit
From this display you can make 2-band EQ settings.
Common
Part Settings
General
Pitch
Zone Settings
Zone Transmit
Effect
Routing
Ins A
Ins B
EQ
Arpeggio
Common
Individual
Advanced
Motion Seq
Common
Lane
EQ1 Type (2-band EQ1 Type)/EQ2 Type (2-band EQ2 Type)
Mod / Control
Determines the Equalizer Type.
Part LFO
Settings: Thru, LPF, HPF, Low Shelf, Hi Shelf, Peak/Dip
Thru: This setting bypasses the equalizers leaving the entire signal unaffected.
LPF/HPF: This setting only passes signals below or above the Cutoff Frequency.
Low Shelf/Hi Shelf: This setting attenuates/boosts the signal at frequencies above or below the specified
Control Assign
Frequency setting
Low Shelf
+
Receive SW
Element
Osc / Tune
High Shelf
Gain
+
Frequency
Pitch EG
Gain
Frequency
Filter
Type
0
0
–
–
Filter EG
Scale
Frequency
Frequency
Amplitude
Level / Pan
Peak/Dip: This setting attenuates/boosts the signal at the specified Frequency setting.
+
Gain
Amp EG
Scale
Frequency
Element LFO
Element EQ
0
Frequency
–
All Element
Osc
Balance
EQ 1 Gain (2-band EQ1 Gain)/EQ 2 Gain (2-band EQ2 Gain)
Determines the level gain of the frequency set in “EQ1 Freq” or “EQ2 Freq.”
This is not active when “EQ Type” is set to “Thru,” “LPF,” or “HPF.”
Settings: -12dB – +12dB
EQ 1 Freq (2-band EQ1 Frequency)/EQ 2 Freq (2-band EQ2 Frequency)
Determines the frequency to be attenuated/boosted.
This is not active when “EQ Type” is set to “Thru.”
Settings: 63Hz – 18.0Hz
MONTAGE Reference Manual
72
Reference
Performance
Edit
Normal Part (AWM2)
Search
Drum Part
Utility
Normal Part (FM-X)
Live Set
Common/Audio
EQ 1 Q (2-band EQ1 Q)/EQ 2 Q (2-band EQ2 Q)
Determines the EQ bandwidth for the frequency which is set in “EQ 1 Freq/EQ2 Freq.” This is available
only when “EQ Type” is set to “Peak/Dip.”
Settings: 0.1 – 12.0
NOTE For details on EQ structure, see the Synthesizer Parameter Manual PDF document.
Normal Part (AWM2) Edit
Common
Part Settings
General
Pitch
Output Level (2-band Output Level)
Determines the Output level of the 2-band EQ.
Settings: -12dB – +12dB
Zone Settings
Zone Transmit
Effect
Routing
Ins A
Arpeggio
Ins B
EQ
Common
Arpeggio
From the Common display you can set Arpeggio-related parameters for the Part.
Operation
[PERFORMANCE]  [EDIT]  Part selection  ELEMENT/OPERATOR [COMMON]  [Arpeggio]
 [Common]
Common
Individual
Advanced
Motion Seq
Common
Lane
Mod / Control
Part LFO
Control Assign
Receive SW
Element
Osc / Tune
Pitch EG
Filter
Type
Filter EG
Scale
Amplitude
Level / Pan
Amp EG
Scale
Arp Part (Part Arpeggio Switch)
Element LFO
Determines whether the Arpeggio for the selected Part is active or not.
Element EQ
Settings: Off, On
All Element
Arp Master (Arpeggio Master Switch)
Osc
Determines whether the Arpeggio for the entire Performance is active or not.
Balance
Settings: Off, On
Sync Quantize (Sync Quantize Value)
Determines the actual timing at which the next Arpeggio playback starts when you trigger it while the
Arpeggios for Parts are being played back. When set to “off,” the next Arpeggio starts as soon as you
trigger it. The number shown at right of each value indicates the resolution in clocks.
Settings: Off, 60 (32nd note), 80 (16th note triplet), 120 (16th note), 160 (8th note triplet), 240 (8th note), 320 (1/4 note triplet),
480 (1/4 note)
MONTAGE Reference Manual
73
Reference
Performance
Edit
Normal Part (AWM2)
Search
Drum Part
Utility
Normal Part (FM-X)
Live Set
Common/Audio
Normal Part (AWM2) Edit
Hold
Determines whether the Arpeggio continues cycling after the keys are released.
Settings: Sync-off, Off, On
Sync-off: Arpeggio playback continues to run silently, even when you release the keys. Pressing any key turns
Common
Part Settings
Arpeggio playback on again, and the Arpeggio is heard from the point in the cycle where playback is resumed.
General
Off: The Arpeggio plays only while you hold the keys.
On: The Arpeggio cycles automatically, even if you release your fingers from the keys.
Pitch
Key Mode
Determines how the Arpeggio plays back when playing the keyboard.
Settings: Sort, Thru, Direct, Sort+Drct, Thru+Drct
Sort: When you play specific notes (for example, the notes of a chord), the same sequence plays, no matter what
Zone Settings
Zone Transmit
Effect
Routing
order you play the notes.
Ins A
Thru: When you play specific notes (for example, the notes of a chord), the resulting sequence differs depending on
Ins B
the order of the notes.
Direct: Note events of the Arpeggio sequence do not play; only the notes you play on the keyboard are heard. When
the Arpeggio plays back, events such as Pan and Brightness are applied to the sound of your keyboard
performance. Use this setting when the Arpeggio types include non-note data or when you set the Arpeggio
Category to Control.
Sort+Drct: The Arpeggio plays back according to the Sort setting, and the notes played are also sounded.
Thru+Drct: The Arpeggio plays back according to the Thru setting, and the notes played are also sounded.
Velocity (Velocity Rate)
Determines how much the velocity of Arpeggio playback is offset from the original value. If the resulting
Velocity value is 0, it will be set to 1. If the resulting Velocity value is greater than 128 it will be set to 127.
Settings: 0% – 200%
EQ
Arpeggio
Common
Individual
Advanced
Motion Seq
Common
Lane
Mod / Control
Gate Time (Gate Time Rate)
Part LFO
Determines how much the Gate Time (length) of the Arpeggio notes is offset from the original value. If the
resulting Gate Time value is 0, it will be set to 1.
Control Assign
Settings: 0% – 200%
Receive SW
Element
Change Timing
Osc / Tune
Determines the actual timing at which the Arpeggio type is switched when you select another type during
Arpeggio playback. When set to “Real-time,” the Arpeggio type is switched immediately. When set to
“Measure,” the Arpeggio type is switched at the top of the next measure.
Pitch EG
Settings: Real-time, Measure
Filter
Type
Filter EG
Loop
Scale
Determines whether the Arpeggio plays through a single time or continuously, while notes are held.
Settings: Off, On
Arp Play Only (Arpeggio Play Only)
Determines whether or not the current Part plays only the note events of the Arpeggio playback. When this
parameter is set to on, only the note events of the Arpeggio playback affect the tone generator block.
Settings: Off, On
Arp/MS Grid (Arpeggio/Motion Sequencer Grid)
Determines the type of note that serves as the basis for the Quantize or Swing. The parameter value is
displayed in clocks.
For Motion Sequencer, this parameter value is one step length.
Amplitude
Level / Pan
Amp EG
Scale
Element LFO
Element EQ
All Element
Osc
Balance
Settings: 60 (32nd note), 80 (16th note triplet), 120 (16th note), 160 (8th note triplet), 240 (8th note), 320 (1/4 note triplet),
480 (1/4 note)
Qntz Strength (Quantize Strength)
This parameter sets the “strength” by which note events are pulled toward the quantize beat set in “Arp/MS
Grid.” A setting of 100% produces exact timing set in “Arp/MS Grid.” A setting of 0% results in no
quantization.
Settings: 0% – 100%
MONTAGE Reference Manual
74
Reference
Performance
Edit
Normal Part (AWM2)
Search
Drum Part
Utility
Normal Part (FM-X)
Live Set
Common/Audio
Unit (Part Unit Multiply)
Adjusts the Arpeggio playback time. By using this parameter, you can create a different Arpeggio from the
original one.
Settings: 50%, 66%, 75%, 100%, 133%, 150%, 200%, 266%, 300%, 400%, Common
200%: The playback time will be doubled and the tempo is halved.
100%: The normal playback time.
50%: The playback time will be halved and the tempo doubled.
Common: The value set in the Unit Multiply common to the all Parts will be applied.
Swing
Delays notes on even-numbered beats (backbeats) to produce a swing feel.
• +1 and higher: Delay the Arpeggio notes.
• -1 and lower: Advance the Arpeggio notes.
• 0: Exact timing as set by “Arpeggio/Motion Sequencer Grid” Value, resulting in no swing.
Judicious use of this setting lets you create swing rhythms and triplet feels, such as shuffle and bounce.
Settings: -120 – +120
Velocity Limit (Arpeggio Velocity Limit)
Determines the minimum and maximum Velocity values in which the Arpeggio responds. Each Arpeggio
will only sound for notes played within its specified velocity range. If you first specify the maximum value
and then the minimum value, for example “93 to 34,” then the Velocity range covers both “1 to 34” and “93
to 127.”
Settings: 1 – 127
Note Limit (Arpeggio Note Limit)
Determines the lowest and highest notes in the Arpeggio’s note range. Each Arpeggio will only sound for
notes played within its specified range. If you first specify the highest note and then the lowest note, for
example “C5 to C4,” then the note range covers both “C-2 to C4” and “C5 to G8.”
Settings: C -2 – G8
Normal Part (AWM2) Edit
Common
Part Settings
General
Pitch
Zone Settings
Zone Transmit
Effect
Routing
Ins A
Ins B
EQ
Arpeggio
Common
Individual
Advanced
Motion Seq
Common
Lane
Mod / Control
Part LFO
Control Assign
Receive SW
Element
Octave Shift (Arpeggio Output Octave Shift)
Osc / Tune
Shifts the pitch of the Arpeggio up or down in octaves.
Pitch EG
Settings: -10 – +0 – +10
Filter
Octave Range (Arpeggio Octave Range)
Type
Specifies the maximum Arpeggio range in octaves.
Filter EG
Settings: -3 – +0 – +3
Scale
Amplitude
Level / Pan
Amp EG
Scale
Element LFO
Element EQ
All Element
Osc
Balance
MONTAGE Reference Manual
75
Reference
Performance
Edit
Normal Part (AWM2)
Search
Drum Part
Utility
Normal Part (FM-X)
Live Set
Common/Audio
Normal Part (AWM2) Edit
Individual
Common
From the Individual display you can set parameters corresponding to Arpeggio Selects 1 – 8.
Touching the Arpeggio Type Setting calls up a menu. In the displayed menu, touch [Search] to call up the
Arpeggio Category Search display (page 163) and touch [Number] to determine the Arpeggio Type by
specifying the Arpeggio Number.
Operation
[PERFORMANCE]  [EDIT]  Part selection  ELEMENT/OPERATOR [COMMON]  [Arpeggio]
 [Individual]
Part Settings
General
Pitch
Zone Settings
Zone Transmit
Effect
Arpeggio Type Settings
Routing
Ins A
Ins B
EQ
Arpeggio
Common
Individual
Advanced
Motion Seq
Common
Lane
Mod / Control
Part LFO
Control Assign
Receive SW
Element
Osc / Tune
Arp Part (Part Arpeggio Switch)
Arp Master (Arpeggio Master Switch)
Sync Quantize (Sync Quantize Value)
Same as in the Common display.
Pitch EG
Filter
Type
Filter EG
Scale
Arp (Arpeggio Select)
Selects the desired Arpeggio stored as Arpeggio Select.
Settings: 1 – 8
Amplitude
Level / Pan
Amp EG
Category (Arpeggio Category)
Indicates the selected Arpeggio Category.
Settings: See the “Arpeggio Category List” on page 11.
Sub (Arpeggio Sub Category)
Indicates the selected Arpeggio Sub Category.
Settings: See the “Arpeggio Sub Category List” on page 11.
Scale
Element LFO
Element EQ
All Element
Osc
Balance
Name (Arpeggio Name)
Indicates the selected Arpeggio Name.
Settings: See the Data List PDF document.
Velocity (Velocity Rate)
Determines how much the velocity of Arpeggio playback is offset from the original value. If the resulting
Velocity value is 0, it will be set to 1. If the resulting Velocity value is greater than 128 it will be set to 127.
Settings: -100% – +100%
Gate Time (Gate Time Rate)
Determines how much the Gate Time (length) of the Arpeggio notes is offset from the original value. If the
resulting Gate Time value is 0, it will be set to 1.
Settings: -100% – +100%
MONTAGE Reference Manual
76
Reference
Performance
Edit
Normal Part (AWM2)
Search
Drum Part
Utility
Normal Part (FM-X)
Live Set
Common/Audio
Normal Part (AWM2) Edit
Advanced
Common
From the Advanced display you can set advanced parameters related to the Arpeggio function.
Operation
[PERFORMANCE]  [EDIT]  Part selection  ELEMENT/OPERATOR [COMMON] [Arpeggio] 
[Advanced]
Part Settings
General
Pitch
Zone Settings
Zone Transmit
Effect
Routing
Ins A
Ins B
EQ
Arpeggio
Common
Individual
Advanced
Motion Seq
Common
Lane
Mod / Control
Part LFO
Control Assign
Arp Part (Part Arpeggio Switch)
Arp Master (Arpeggio Master Switch)
Sync Quantize (Sync Quantize Value)
Same as in the Common display.
Accent Vel Threshold (Accent Velocity Threshold)
Determines the minimum velocity that will trigger the Accent Phrase.
Accent Phrases are composed of sequence data included in some Arpeggio types, sounding only when
you play notes at a velocity higher (stronger) than that specified in the Accent Velocity Threshold
parameter. If it is difficult to play at velocities necessary to trigger the Accent Phrase, set the “Accent Vel
Threshold” (Accent Velocity Threshold) parameter to a lower value.
NOTE For information on Arpeggio types that use this function, refer to the Data List PDF document.
Settings: off, 1 – 127
Accent Start Quantize
Determines the start timing of the Accent Phrase when the Velocity specified in Accent Velocity Threshold
above is received. When this is set to off, the Accent Phrase starts as soon as the Velocity is received.
When this is set to on, the Accent Phrase starts on the beat specified for each Arpeggio type after the
Velocity is received.
Settings: off, on
Receive SW
Element
Osc / Tune
Pitch EG
Filter
Type
Filter EG
Scale
Amplitude
Level / Pan
Amp EG
Scale
Element LFO
Element EQ
All Element
Osc
Balance
Random SFX
Determines whether Random SFX is active or not.
Some Arpeggio types feature a Random SFX function which will trigger special sounds (such as guitar fret
noises) when the note is released.
NOTE For information on Arpeggio types that use this function, refer to the “Arpeggio Type List” in the Data List PDF
document.
Settings: off, on
Random SFX Velocity Offset
Determines the offset value by which the Random SFX notes will be shifted from their original velocities.
Settings: -64 – +0 – +63
MONTAGE Reference Manual
77
Reference
Performance
Edit
Normal Part (AWM2)
Search
Drum Part
Utility
Normal Part (FM-X)
Live Set
Common/Audio
Random SFX Key On Ctrl (Random SFX Key On Control)
When this is set to “on,” the Random SFX sound is played at the velocity generated by the playing of each
note. When this is set to “off,” a special Random SFX sound is played at a pre-programmed velocity.
Settings: off, on
Normal Part (AWM2) Edit
Common
Part Settings
General
Velocity Mode
Adjusts the velocity of the Arpeggio notes.
Settings: Original, Thru
Original: The Arpeggio plays back at the Velocity set for the Arpeggio Type.
Thru: The Arpeggio plays back according to the Velocity of your playing.
Trigger Mode
When this is set to “Gate,” pressing the note starts Arpeggio playback and releasing the note stops it.
When this is set to “Toggle,” pressing the note starts/stops Arpeggio playback and releasing the note does
not affect Arpeggio playback.
Settings: Gate, Toggle
Pitch
Zone Settings
Zone Transmit
Effect
Routing
Ins A
Ins B
EQ
Arpeggio
Common
Individual
Motion Seq (Motion Sequencer)
Advanced
Motion Seq
Common
Common
From the Common display you can set the parameters related to Motion Sequencer for the Part.
Lane
Mod / Control
Operation
[PERFORMANCE]  [EDIT]  Part selection  ELEMENT/OPERATOR [COMMON]  [Motion Seq]
 [Common]
Part LFO
Control Assign
Receive SW
Element
Osc / Tune
Pitch EG
Filter
Type
Filter EG
Scale
Amplitude
Level / Pan
Amp EG
Scale
Element LFO
Element EQ
All Element
Osc
Balance
Common Clock Swing (Common Swing)
Determines the Swing of the Arpeggio/Motion Sequencer for the entire Performance. This is the offset
value for the Swing of the Arpeggio/Motion Sequencer for each Part.
Settings: -120 – +120
Common Clock Unit (Common Unit Multiply)
Adjusts the Arpeggio/Motion Sequencer playback time for the entire Performance.
This parameter is applied to the Part when the Unit Multiply parameter for Arpeggio/Motion Sequencer of
the Part is set to “Common.”
By using this parameter, you can create a different Arpeggio/Motion Sequencer type from the original one.
Settings: 50% – 400%
200%: The playback time will be doubled and the tempo is halved.
100%: The normal playback time.
50%: The playback time will be halved and the tempo doubled.
MONTAGE Reference Manual
78
Reference
Performance
Edit
Normal Part (AWM2)
Search
Drum Part
Utility
Normal Part (FM-X)
Live Set
Common/Audio
Common Arp Gate Time (Common Arpeggio Gate Time)
Determines the Gate Time Rate (length) of the Arpeggio for the entire Performance. This is the offset value
for the Gate Time Rate of the Arpeggio for each Part.
Settings: -100% – +100%
Normal Part (AWM2) Edit
Common
Part Settings
General
Common Arp Velocity (Common Arpeggio Velocity Rate)
Pitch
Determines the Velocity Rate of the Arpeggio for the entire Performance. This is the offset value for the
Velocity Rate of the Arpeggio for each Part.
Zone Settings
Settings: -100% – +100%
Zone Transmit
Effect
Common Motion Seq Amplitude (Common Motion Sequencer Amplitude)
Determines the Amplitude of the Motion Sequencer for the entire Performance. “Amplitude” determines
how the entire Motion Sequence changes.
This is the offset value for the Part Motion Seq Amplitude, which is also the offset value for the Lane
Amplitude. This results in that both of the Common and Part MS Amplitudes offset the Amplitude setting in
the Lane (only when “MS FX” is set to on for the Lane).
Settings: -64 – +63
Routing
Ins A
Ins B
EQ
Arpeggio
Common
Common Motion Seq Shape (Common Motion Sequencer Pulse Shape)
Determines the Pulse Shape of the Motion Sequencer for the entire Performance. This changes the step
curve shape of the sequence.
This is the offset value for the Part Motion Seq Pulse Shape, which is also the offset value for the Lane
Pulse Shape. This results in that both of the Common and Part MS Pulse Shapes offset the Pulse Shape
setting for the parameter in the Lane (only when “MS FX” is set to on for the Lane and “Control” is set to on
for the parameter).
Settings: -100 – +100
Individual
Advanced
Motion Seq
Common
Lane
Mod / Control
Part LFO
Common Motion Seq Smooth (Common Motion Sequencer Smoothness)
Determines the Smoothness of the Motion Sequencer for the entire Performance. “Smoothness” is the
degree to which the time of the Motion Sequence is smoothly changed.
This is the offset value for the Part Motion Seq Smoothness, which is also the offset value for the Lane
Smoothness. This results in that both of the Common and Part MS Smoothnesses offset the Smoothness
setting for the parameter in the Lane (only when “MS FX” is set to on for the Lane).
Settings: -64 – +63
Control Assign
Receive SW
Element
Osc / Tune
Pitch EG
Filter
Common Motion Seq Random (Common Motion Sequencer Random)
Type
Determines the Random of the Motion Sequencer for the entire Performance. “Random” is the degree to
which the Step Value of the Sequence is randomly changed.
This is the offset value for the Part Motion Seq Random when “MS FX” is set to on for the Lane.
Filter EG
Settings: -64 – +63
Scale
Amplitude
Level / Pan
Part Clock Swing (Clock Swing)
Determines the Swing of the Arpeggio/Motion Sequencer for the selected Part. This parameter delays
notes on even-numbered beats (backbeats) to produce a swing feel.
• +1 and higher: Delay the Arpeggio notes.
• -1 and lower: Advance the Arpeggio notes.
• 0: Exact timing as set by “Arpeggio/Motion Sequencer Grid” Value, resulting in no swing.
Amp EG
Scale
Element LFO
Element EQ
All Element
Judicious use of this setting lets you create swing rhythms and triplet feels, such as shuffle and bounce.
Osc
Settings: -120 – +120
Balance
Part Clock Unit (Part Unit Multiply)
This adjusts the Arpeggio/Motion Sequencer playback time for the selected Part.
Settings: 50% – 400%, Common
200%: The playback time will be doubled and the tempo is halved.
100%: The normal playback time.
50%: The playback time will be halved and the tempo doubled.
Common: The value set in the Unit Multiply common to the all Parts will be applied.
Part Arp Gate Time (Part Arpeggio Gate Time)
Determines how much the Gate Time (length) of the Arpeggio notes is offset from the original value. This is
the offset value for the Gate Time Rate (page 76) of each Arpeggio Select setting.
Settings: 0% – 200%
MONTAGE Reference Manual
79
Reference
Performance
Edit
Normal Part (AWM2)
Search
Drum Part
Utility
Normal Part (FM-X)
Live Set
Common/Audio
Part Arp Velocity (Part Arpeggio Velocity Rate)
Determines how much the velocity of Arpeggio playback is offset from the original value. This is the offset
value for the Velocity Rate (page 76) of each Arpeggio Select setting.
Settings: 0% – 200%
Normal Part (AWM2) Edit
Common
Part Settings
General
Part Motion Seq Amplitude (Part Motion Sequencer Amplitude)
Determines the Amplitude of the Motion Sequencer for the selected Part.
This is the offset value for the Lane Motion Seq Amplitude (page 83) when “MS FX” is set to on for the
Lane.
Settings: -64 – +63
Part Motion Seq Shape (Part Motion Sequencer Pulse Shape)
Determines the Pulse Shape of the Motion Sequencer for the selected Part.
This is the offset value for the Lane Motion Seq “Step Curve Parameter” (page 84) when “MS FX” is set to
on for the Lane and “Control” is set to on for the parameter.
Settings: -100 – +100
Pitch
Zone Settings
Zone Transmit
Effect
Routing
Ins A
Ins B
EQ
Arpeggio
Part Motion Seq Smooth (Part Motion Sequencer Smoothness)
Common
Determines the Smoothness of the Motion Sequencer for the selected Part.
This is the offset value for the Lane Motion Seq Smoothness (page 83) when “MS FX” is set to on for the
Lane.
Individual
Settings: -64 – +63
Advanced
Motion Seq
Common
Part Motion Seq Random (Part Motion Sequencer Random)
Determines the Random of the Motion Sequencer for the selected Part. “Random” is the degree to which
the Step Value of the Sequence is randomly changed.
Settings: 0 – 127
Lane
Mod / Control
Part LFO
Control Assign
Arp/MS Grid (Arpeggio/Motion Sequencer Grid)
Determines the type of note that serves as the basis for the Quantize or Swing. The parameter value is
displayed in clocks.
For Motion Sequencer, this parameter value is one step length.
Settings: 60 (32nd note), 80 (16th note triplet), 120 (16th note), 160 (8th note triplet), 240 (8th note), 320 (1/4 note triplet),
480 (1/4 note)
Receive SW
Element
Osc / Tune
Pitch EG
Filter
Type
Filter EG
Scale
Amplitude
Level / Pan
Amp EG
Scale
Element LFO
Element EQ
All Element
Osc
Balance
MONTAGE Reference Manual
80
Reference
Performance
Edit
Normal Part (AWM2)
Search
Drum Part
Utility
Normal Part (FM-X)
Live Set
Common/Audio
Normal Part (AWM2) Edit
Lane
Common
From the Lane display you can set parameters for each Lane of the Motion Sequencer.
Operation
[PERFORMANCE]  [EDIT]  Part selection  ELEMENT/OPERATOR [COMMON]  [Motion Seq]
 [Lane]
Part Settings
General
Pitch
Zone Settings
Zone Transmit
Effect
Routing
Ins A
Ins B
EQ
Arpeggio
Common
Individual
Advanced
Motion Seq
Common
Lane
Mod / Control
Part LFO
Control Assign
Motion Seq Master SW (Motion Sequencer Master Switch)
Determines whether the Motion Sequencer for the entire Performance is active or not.
Settings: Off, On
Receive SW
Element
Osc / Tune
Pitch EG
Motion Seq Part SW (Motion Sequencer Part Switch)
Determines whether the Motion Sequencer for the selected Part is active or not.
Settings: Off, On
Filter
Type
Filter EG
Lane SW (Lane Switch)
Determines whether each Lane is active or not. Up to four Lanes of Motion Sequencer can be used for one
Part and up to eight Lanes can be used at the same time for the entire Performance. When this is set to off,
parameters related to the corresponding Lane will not be displayed.
Settings: Off, On
MS FX (Lane Motion Sequencer FX Receive)
Determines whether or not the selected Lane is affected by Knob operations when the corresponding
Knob Function [ARP/MS FX] button is set to on.
Settings: Off, On
Scale
Amplitude
Level / Pan
Amp EG
Scale
Element LFO
Element EQ
All Element
Trigger (Lane Motion Sequencer Trigger Receive)
Osc
Determines whether or not the selected Lane receives the signal generated by [MOTION SEQ TRIGGER]
button. When this is set to on, the Motion Sequence will begin whenever you press the [MOTION SEQ
TRIGGER] button.
Balance
Settings: Off, On
Sequence Select (Lane Motion Sequence Select)
Selects the desired Motion Sequence.
Settings: 1 – 8
MONTAGE Reference Manual
81
Reference
Performance
Edit
Normal Part (AWM2)
Search
Drum Part
Utility
Normal Part (FM-X)
Live Set
Common/Audio
Sync (Lane Motion Sequencer Sync)
Determines if the playback of the Motion Sequence applied to the Destination (set in the Control Assign
display (page 89)) is synchronized to the Tempo, Beat, or Arpeggio of the Performance.
Settings: Off, Tempo, Beat, Arp, Lane 1 (when Lane 2 – 4 is selected)
Off: Lane Motion Sequencer plays back according to its own clock and is not synchronized to an external clock.
Tempo: Lane Motion Sequencer is synchronized with the Performance tempo.
Beat: Lane Motion Sequencer is synchronized with the beat.
Arp: Lane Motion Sequencer is synchronized with the 1st beat of the measure of the currently playing Arpeggio.
Lane 1: Lane Motion Sequencer is synchronized with the Lane 1.
Normal Part (AWM2) Edit
Common
Part Settings
General
Pitch
Zone Settings
Zone Transmit
Effect
Speed (Lane Motion Sequencer Speed)
Routing
Determines the playback speed of the Motion Sequence.
This is available only when the “Lane Motion Sequencer Sync” is set to “Off.”
Ins A
Settings: 0 – 127
Ins B
EQ
Unit Multiply (Lane Motion Sequencer Unit Multiply)
Adjusts the Motion Sequencer playback time for the selected Lane.
This is available when the Lane Motion Sequencer Sync parameter is set to something other than “Off” and
“Lane 1.”
Settings: 50% – 6400%, Common, Arp
200%: The playback time will be doubled and the tempo is halved.
100%: The normal playback time.
50%: The playback time will be halved and the tempo doubled.
Common: The value set in the Unit Multiply common to the all Parts will be applied.
Arp: The value set in the Arpeggio Unit Multiply for the selected Part will be applied.
Arpeggio
Common
Individual
Advanced
Motion Seq
Common
Lane
Mod / Control
Key On Reset (Lane Motion Sequencer Key On Reset)
Part LFO
Determines whether or not the playback of the Motion Sequence is stopped when you play the keyboard.
This parameter is active when the Lane Motion Sequencer Sync parameter is set to something other than
“Arp” and “Lane 1.”
Also this parameter is not available when “Trigger” is set to “On.”
Control Assign
Settings: Off, Each-On, 1st-On
Each-On: The Sequence resets with each note you play and starts the Sequence from the beginning.
1st-On: The Sequence resets with each note you play and starts the Sequencer from the beginning. If you play a
second note while the first is being held, the Sequence continues cycling according to the same phase as triggered
by the first note—in other words, the Sequence only resets if the first note is released before the second is played.
Loop (Lane Motion Sequencer Loop)
Determines whether the Motion Sequence is played only once or repeatedly.
This is available when the Lane Motion Sequencer Sync parameter is set to something other than “Lane 1.”
Settings: Off, On
Velocity Limit (Lane Motion Sequencer Velocity Limit)
Receive SW
Element
Osc / Tune
Pitch EG
Filter
Type
Filter EG
Scale
Amplitude
Level / Pan
Amp EG
Scale
Determines the minimum and maximum Velocity values in which the Motion Sequence responds.
This is available when the Lane Motion Sequencer Sync parameter is set to something other than “Lane 1.”
Element LFO
Settings: 1 – 127
Element EQ
Cycle (Lane Motion Sequencer Cycle)
All Element
Selects the desired step length for the Motion Sequence.
Osc
Settings: 1 – 16
Balance
Load Sequence
Loads Motion Sequence data in the User Memory. For details about Loading, see “Load” (page 174).
MONTAGE Reference Manual
82
Reference
Performance
Edit
Normal Part (AWM2)
Search
Drum Part
Utility
Normal Part (FM-X)
Live Set
Common/Audio
Normal Part (AWM2) Edit
Edit Sequence
Calls up the Motion Sequence setting display. You can create a custom Sequence consisting of up to
sixteen steps.
Motion Seq Step Value (Lane Motion Sequencer Step Value)
Common
Part Settings
General
Pitch
Zone Settings
Zone Transmit
Effect
Routing
Ins A
Ins B
EQ
Arpeggio
Common
Individual
Advanced
Motion Seq
Common
Lane
Mod / Control
Part LFO
Motion Seq Step Type (Lane Motion Sequencer Step Type)
Control Assign
Receive SW
Lane (Current Select Lane)
Indicates the currently selected Lane. This parameter is not displayed when the corresponding Lane
Switch is set to off.
Settings: 1 – 4
Element
Osc / Tune
Pitch EG
Filter
Cycle (Lane Motion Sequencer Cycle)
Selects the desired step length for the Motion Sequence.
Settings: 1 – 16
Type
Filter EG
Scale
Amplitude (Lane Motion Sequencer Amplitude)
Determines how the entire Motion Sequence changes.
Settings: 0 – 127
Smooth (Lane Motion Sequencer Smoothness)
Determines the smoothness of the time change of the Motion Sequence.
Settings: 0 – 127
Sequence Select (Lane Motion Sequence Select)
Amplitude
Level / Pan
Amp EG
Scale
Element LFO
Element EQ
All Element
Determines the Motion Sequence Select.
Osc
Settings: 1 – 8
Balance
Polarity (Lane Motion Sequencer Polarity)
Determines the Sequence Polarity.
Settings: Unipolar, Bipolar
Unipolar: Unipolar changes only in a positive direction from a base parameter value according to the Sequence.
Bipolar: Bipolar changes in both of positive and negative directions from a base parameter value.
Motion Seq Step Value (Lane Motion Sequencer Step Value)
Determines the Step Value for the Motion Sequence. You can control the Step Value 1 – 8 or 9 – 16 by the
Sliders 1 – 8 depending on the cursor position on the display.
Settings: 0 – 127
MONTAGE Reference Manual
83
Reference
Performance
Edit
Normal Part (AWM2)
Search
Drum Part
Utility
Normal Part (FM-X)
Live Set
Common/Audio
Motion Seq Step Type (Lane Motion Sequencer Step Type)
Determines each Step Type of the Motion Sequence. You can switch between the Step Types A and B for
the Step 1 – 8 or 9 – 16 by the SCENE [1] – [8] buttons depending on the cursor position on the display.
Settings: A, B
Normal Part (AWM2) Edit
Common
Part Settings
General
Pulse A / Pulse B (Lane Motion Sequencer Step Curve Type)
Pitch
Determines the Curve Type of the parameter for each of “Pulse A” and “Pulse B.” “Motion Seq Step Type”
described above determines which curve set here is used for each step.
Zone Settings
Settings: For Preset Bank: Standard, Sigmoid, Threshold, Bell, Dogleg, FM, AM, M, Discrete Saw, Smooth Saw, Triangle,
Zone Transmit
Square, Trapezoid, Tilt Sine, Bounce, Resonance, Sequence, Hold
For details, see the Synthesizer Parameter Manual PDF document.
For User Bank: User 1 – 32
When a Library file is read: Curves in Library 1 – 8
Effect
Routing
Ins A
Ins B
Direction (Lance Motion Sequencer Step Curve Direction)
Determines the Direction of the Step Curve for the Motion Sequence.
Settings: Forward, Reverse
EQ
Arpeggio
Common
Prm1/Prm2 (Lane Motion Sequencer Step Curve Parameter)
Adjusts the shape of the Step Curve for the Motion Sequence.
This parameter is not available depending on the Curve Type. Also the range of available parameter
values differs depending on the Curve Type.
Individual
Advanced
Motion Seq
Common
Control (Lane Motion Sequencer Step Curve Shape Control Switch)
Determines whether or not to control the shape of the Step Curve for the Motion Sequence by operating
Knobs. This parameter is displayed only when “MS FX” is set to on. Also this parameter is not available
depending on the Curve Type.
Settings: Off, On
Store Sequence
Stores the edited Sequence data. For details about storing data, see “Store/Save” (page 176).
Lane
Mod / Control
Part LFO
Control Assign
Receive SW
Element
Osc / Tune
Pitch EG
Filter
Type
Filter EG
Scale
Amplitude
Level / Pan
Amp EG
Scale
Element LFO
Element EQ
All Element
Osc
Balance
MONTAGE Reference Manual
84
Reference
Performance
Edit
Normal Part (AWM2)
Search
Drum Part
Utility
Normal Part (FM-X)
Mod/Control (Modulation/Control)
Live Set
Common/Audio
Normal Part (AWM2) Edit
Common
Part Settings
Part LFO
General
From the Part LFO display you can set the LFO-related parameters for the Part.
Pitch
Zone Settings
Operation
[PERFORMANCE]  [EDIT]  Part selection  ELEMENT/OPERATOR [COMMON] 
[Mod/Control]  [Part LFO]
Zone Transmit
Effect
Routing
Ins A
Ins B
EQ
Arpeggio
Common
Individual
Advanced
Motion Seq
Common
Lane
Mod / Control
Part LFO
Control Assign
Receive SW
Element
Osc / Tune
LFO Wave
Pitch EG
Selects the LFO waveform.
Filter
Settings: Triangle, Triangle+, Saw Up, Saw Down, Squ1/4, Squ1/3, Square, Squ2/3, Squ3/4, Trapezoid, S/H1, S/H2, User
Type
Tempo Sync (LFO Tempo Sync)
Filter EG
Determines whether or not the LFO is synchronized to the tempo of the Arpeggio or Song.
Scale
Settings: Off (not synchronized), On (synchronized)
Amplitude
Level / Pan
Amp EG
Scale
Element LFO
Element EQ
All Element
Osc
Balance
MONTAGE Reference Manual
85
Reference
Performance
Edit
Normal Part (AWM2)
Search
Drum Part
Utility
Normal Part (FM-X)
Live Set
Common/Audio
 When “Tempo Sync” is set to “OFF”
Normal Part (AWM2) Edit
Common
Part Settings
General
Pitch
Zone Settings
Zone Transmit
Effect
Routing
Ins A
Ins B
EQ
Arpeggio
Common
Individual
Advanced
Motion Seq
Common
Speed (LFO Speed)
Adjusts the speed (frequency) of LFO variation. This is not available when the Tempo Sync parameter
is set to “On.”
Settings: 0 – 63
Random Speed (LFO Random Speed Depth)
Determines the degree to which the LFO speed changes at random.
Settings: 0 – 127
Lane
Mod / Control
Part LFO
Control Assign
Receive SW
Element
Osc / Tune
 When “Tempo Sync” is set to “ON”
Pitch EG
Filter
Type
Filter EG
Scale
Amplitude
Level / Pan
Amp EG
Scale
Element LFO
Element EQ
All Element
Osc
Balance
Tempo Speed (LFO Tempo Speed)
This parameter is available only when “Tempo Sync” above has been set to “ON.” It allows you to make
detailed note value settings that determine how the LFO pulses in sync with the Arpeggio.
Settings: 1/16, 1/8 Tri. (eighth-note triplets), 1/16 Dot. (dotted sixteenth notes), 1/8, 1/4 Tri. (quarter-note triplets), 1/8 Dot.
(dotted eighth notes), 1/4, 1/2 Tri. (half-note triplets), 1/4 Dot. (dotted quarter notes), 1/2, Whole Tri. (whole-note
triplets), 1/2 Dot. (dotted half notes), 1/4 x 4 (quarter-note quadruplets; four quarter notes to the beat), 1/4 x 5
(quarter-note quintuplets; five quarter notes to the beat), 1/4 x 6 (quarter-note sextuplets; six quarter notes to the
beat), 1/4 x 7 (quarter-note septuplets; seven quarter notes to the beat), 1/4 x 8 (quarter-note octuplets; eight
quarter notes to the beat), 1/4 x 16 (sixteen quarter-notes to the beat), 1/4 x 32 (32 quarter notes to the beat),
1/4 x 64 (64 quarter notes to the beat)
MONTAGE Reference Manual
86
Reference
Performance
Edit
Normal Part (AWM2)
Search
Drum Part
Utility
Normal Part (FM-X)
Live Set
Common/Audio
Delay (LFO Delay Time)
Determines the delay time between the moment you press a key on the keyboard and the moment the LFO
comes into effect.
Settings: 0 – 127
Normal Part (AWM2) Edit
Common
Part Settings
General
Fade In (LFO Fade In Time)
Determines the amount of time for the LFO effect to fade in (after the “Delay” time has elapsed).
Settings: 0 – 127
Hold (LFO Hold Time)
Pitch
Zone Settings
Zone Transmit
Effect
Determines the length of time during which the LFO is held at its maximum level.
Routing
Settings: 0 – 126, Hold
Hold: No fade-out
Ins A
Ins B
Fade Out (LFO Fade Out Time)
Determines the time over which the LFO effect is faded out (after the “Hold” time has elapsed).
Settings: 0 – 127
Key On Reset (LFO Key On Reset)
Determines whether or not the LFO is reset each time a note is pressed.
Settings: Off, Each-On, 1st-On
Each-On: The LFO resets with each note you play and starts a waveform at the phase specified by the Phase
EQ
Arpeggio
Common
Individual
Advanced
Motion Seq
parameter.
Common
1st-On: The LFO resets with each note you play and starts a waveform at the phase specified by the Phase
Lane
parameter. If you play a second note while the first is being held, the LFO continues cycling according to the same
phase as triggered by the first note—in other words, the LFO only resets if the first note is released before the second
is played.
Mod / Control
Part LFO
Loop (LFO Loop)
Control Assign
Determines whether the LFO Wave plays through a single time (off) or continuously (on).
Receive SW
Settings: Off, On
Phase (LFO Phase)
Determines the starting phase point for the LFO Wave when it is reset.
Settings: 0°, 90°, 120°, 180°, 240°, 270°
Element
Osc / Tune
Pitch EG
Filter
Type
Element Phase Offset (LFO Element Phase Offset)
Determines the offset values of the “Phase” parameter (above) for the respective Elements.
Settings: 0°, 90°, 120°, 180°, 240°, 270°
Filter EG
Scale
Amplitude
Destination (LFO Destination)
Determines the functions which will be controlled by the LFO Wave.
Settings: Insertion Effect A Parameter 1 – 24, Insertion Effect B Parameter 1 – 24, Level, Pitch, Cutoff, Resonance, Pan, E.LFO
Speed
Depth (LFO Depth)
Set the LFO Wave Depth (amplitude) for “Destination” parameter (above).
Settings: 0 – 127
Level / Pan
Amp EG
Scale
Element LFO
Element EQ
All Element
Osc
Element Depth Ratio (LFO Element Depth Ratio)
Determines the offset values of the “Depth” parameter (above) for the respective Elements.
When set to “Off,” the LFO effect is not available. This is available only when Element-related parameters
are set in “Destination.”
Balance
Settings: Off, 0 – 127
MONTAGE Reference Manual
87
Reference
Performance
Edit
Normal Part (AWM2)
Search
Drum Part
Utility
Normal Part (FM-X)
Live Set
Common/Audio
Normal Part (AWM2) Edit
Edit User LFO
Calls up the User LFO Setting display. You can create a custom LFO wave consisting of up to sixteen
steps.
User LFO Step Value
Common
Part Settings
General
Pitch
Zone Settings
Zone Transmit
Effect
Routing
Ins A
Ins B
EQ
Arpeggio
Common
Individual
Advanced
Motion Seq
Common
Lane
Mod / Control
Part LFO
Cycle
Control Assign
Selects the desired step length for the LFO.
Receive SW
Settings: 2 steps, 3 steps, 4 steps, 6 steps, 8 steps, 12 steps, 16 steps
Element
Slope
Osc / Tune
Determines the slope or ramp characteristics of the LFO wave.
Pitch EG
Settings: Off (no slope), Up, Down, Up&Down
Filter
User LFO Step Value
Type
Determines the level for each step.
Filter EG
Settings: -64 – +63
Scale
Template
This includes pre-programmed settings for creating an original LFO.
Amplitude
Level / Pan
Amp EG
Scale
Element LFO
Element EQ
All Element
Osc
Balance
MONTAGE Reference Manual
88
Reference
Performance
Edit
Normal Part (AWM2)
Search
Drum Part
Utility
Normal Part (FM-X)
Live Set
Common/Audio
Normal Part (AWM2) Edit
Control Assign
Common
From the Control Assign display you can make controller assign settings for the Part.
You can change sounds as desired by setting the desired controller to “Source” and the desired parameter
to “Destination.” Not only physical controllers such as the Pitch Bend wheel but also Motion Sequencer or
Envelope Follower can be set to “Source” as a virtual controller.
Up to 16 Controller Sets can be assigned to each Part.
Part Settings
General
Pitch
Zone Settings
Zone Transmit
Operation
[PERFORMANCE]  [EDIT]  Part selection  ELEMENT/OPERATOR [COMMON] 
[Mod/Control]  [Control Assign]
Effect
Routing
Ins A
Ins B
EQ
Arpeggio
Common
Individual
Advanced
Motion Seq
Common
Lane
Mod / Control
Part LFO
Control Assign
Receive SW
Element
Osc / Tune
Pitch EG
Auto Select (Auto Select Switch)
Filter
Determines whether the Auto Select function for Display Filter (below) is active (On) or not (Off). When this
parameter is set to “On,” the operated Controller is automatically set in “Display Filter”. Also you can obtain
the same result by pressing the [CONTROL ASSIGN] button.
Type
Filter EG
Scale
Settings: Off, On
Amplitude
Display Filter
Level / Pan
Determines the Controller to be displayed.
Settings: PitchBend, Modwheel, AfterTouch, FootCtrl 1, FootCtrl 2, FootSwitch, Ribbon, Breath, AsgnKnob 1 – 8, AsgnSw 1,
AsgnSw 2, MS Lane 1 – 4, EnvFollow 1 – 16, EnvFollowAD, EnvFollowMst
Amp EG
Scale
Display Name
Element LFO
Determines the name of each Assignable Knob 1 – 8 which is displayed in the Performance Play display
(page 26). This is available only when “AsgnKnob 1 – 8” is set in “Source.”
Element EQ
All Element
Osc
Destination
Determines the target parameter to be controlled. To add another Destination, touch “+” icon. For
information on setting examples for “Destination,” see below.
Balance
Settings: See the “Control List” in the Data List PDF document.
Destination Setting Examples
The following settings are some useful examples how to set the Destination.
To control the volume:
Part Param  Volume
To change the pitch:
Part Param  Pitch
To change the speed of the Rotary Speaker:
Ins A/B  InsA/B SpdCtrl *1
To apply a Wah pedal effect:
Ins A/B  InsA/B PdlCtrl *2
Concerning *1 and *2, the following settings are necessary in addition to the above settings.
*1 “Ins A/B Type” = “Rotary Speaker” in the Effect display of Part Edit
*2 “Ins A/B Type” = “VCM Pedal Wah” in the Effect display of Part Edit
MONTAGE Reference Manual
89
Reference
Performance
Edit
Search
Normal Part (AWM2)
Drum Part
Utility
Normal Part (FM-X)
Live Set
Common/Audio
Normal Part (AWM2) Edit
Source
Determines the desired Controller for controlling the parameter set in “Destination.”
Settings: PitchBend, Modwheel, AfterTouch, FootCtrl 1, FootCtrl 2, FootSwitch, Ribbon, Breath, AsgnKnob 1 – 8, AsgnSw 1,
AsgnSw 2, MS Lane 1 – 4, EnvFollow 1 – 16, EnvFollowAD, EnvFollowMst
Common
Part Settings
General
Element SW (Element Switch)
Selects whether the controller will affect each individual Element (On) or not (Off). This is available only
when Element-related parameters are set in “Destination.”
Pitch
Zone Settings
Zone Transmit
Settings: Off, On
Effect
Curve Type
Determines the Curve type of the parameter set in “Destination.” In the illustrations below, the vertical axis
indicates the operation value of the controller set in “Destination” and the horizontal axis indicates the
parameter value set in “Source.”
Settings: Standard, Sigmoid, Threshold, Bell, Dogleg, FM, AM, M, Discrete Saw, Smooth Saw, Triangle, Square, Trapezoid, Tilt
Sine, Bounce, Resonance, Sequence, Hold, User 1 – 32 (when User Bank is selected), Library 1 – 8 (when the
Library file is read)
Standard
Smooth Saw
Routing
Ins A
Ins B
EQ
Arpeggio
Common
Individual
Advanced
Motion Seq
Sigmoid
Triangle
Common
Lane
Mod / Control
Part LFO
Threshold
Square
Control Assign
Receive SW
Element
Osc / Tune
Bell
Trapezoid
Pitch EG
Filter
Type
Filter EG
Dogleg
Tilt Sine
Scale
Amplitude
Level / Pan
Amp EG
FM
Bounce
Scale
Element LFO
Element EQ
All Element
AM
Resonance
Osc
Balance
M
Sequence
Discrete Saw
Hold
MONTAGE Reference Manual
90
Reference
Performance
Edit
Normal Part (AWM2)
Search
Drum Part
Utility
Normal Part (FM-X)
Live Set
Common/Audio
Polarity (Curve Polarity)
Determines the Curve Polarity of the Curve type set in “Curve Type.”
Settings: Uni, Bi
Uni: Unipolar changes only in a positive direction or in a negative direction from a base parameter value according
Normal Part (AWM2) Edit
Common
Part Settings
to the Curve shape.
General
Bi: Bipolar changes in both of positive and negative directions from a base parameter value.
Pitch
Ratio (Curve Ratio)
Zone Settings
Determines the Curve Ratio.
Zone Transmit
Settings: -64 – +63
Param 1/Param 2 (Curve Parameter)
Adjusts the Curve shape.
This is not available depending on the Curve Type.
Destination to Name
Copies the Parameter name from “Destination” to “Display Name.” This is available only when “Source” is
set to “AsgnKnob 1 – 8.”
Effect
Routing
Ins A
Ins B
EQ
Arpeggio
Common
Individual
Delete
Deletes the selected “Destination.”
Advanced
Motion Seq
Edit User Curve
Common
Calls up the User Curve Setting display. You can select “Linear” (Curve by Linear Interpolation of eight
coefficients) or “Step.”
Lane
Mod / Control
Part LFO
Control Assign
Receive SW
Element
Osc / Tune
Pitch EG
Filter
Type
Filter EG
Scale
Amplitude
Level / Pan
Amp EG
Scale
Element LFO
Element EQ
All Element
Curve No. (Curve Number)
Indicates the selected Curve Number.
Settings: 1 – 32
Osc
Balance
Curve Name
Names the selected Curve. Touching the parameter calls up the input character display.
Curve Type
Determines the Curve Type.
Settings: Linear, Step
Input
Determines the Input level of the Curve. “Input 1” is fixed to “0.” “Input 8” is fixed to 127 when the Curve
Type is “Linear.”
Settings: 0 – 127
MONTAGE Reference Manual
91
Reference
Performance
Edit
Normal Part (AWM2)
Search
Drum Part
Utility
Normal Part (FM-X)
Live Set
Common/Audio
Normal Part (AWM2) Edit
Output
Determines the Output level of the Curve.
Settings: 0 – 127
Common
Part Settings
General
Receive SW (Receive Switch)
Pitch
Zone Settings
From the Receive Switch display you can set how each individual Part responds to various MIDI data, such
as Control Change and Program Change messages. When the relevant parameter is set to “ON,” the
corresponding Part responds to the appropriate MIDI data.
NOTE If CC (Receive Control Change) here is set to “OFF,” parameters related to Control Change are not available.
Operation
[PERFORMANCE]  [EDIT]  Part selection  ELEMENT/OPERATOR [COMMON] 
[Mod/Control]  [Receive SW]
Zone Transmit
Effect
Routing
Ins A
Ins B
EQ
Arpeggio
Common
Individual
Advanced
Motion Seq
Common
Lane
Mod / Control
Part LFO
Control Assign
Receive SW
Element
Osc / Tune
Pitch EG
Filter
Type
Pgm Change (Receive Program Change)
Filter EG
Determines whether Program Change messages are received or not.
Scale
Settings: Off, On
Bank Select (Receive Bank Select)
Determines whether Bank Select MSB/LSB messages are received or not.
This is not available when the Receive Control Change is set to Off.
Settings: Off, On
Pitch Bend (Receive Pitch Bend)
Determines whether MIDI messages generated by using the Pitch Bend Wheel are received or not.
Settings: Off, On
After Touch (Receive After Touch)
Amplitude
Level / Pan
Amp EG
Scale
Element LFO
Element EQ
All Element
Osc
Balance
Determines whether After Touch messages are received or not.
Settings: Off, On
CC (Receive Control Change)
Determines whether Control Change messages are received or not.
Settings: Off, On
Vol/Exp (Receive Volume/Expression)
Determines whether volume messages are received or not.
This is not available when the Receive Control Change is set to Off.
Settings: Off, On
MONTAGE Reference Manual
92
Reference
Performance
Edit
Normal Part (AWM2)
Search
Drum Part
Utility
Normal Part (FM-X)
Live Set
Common/Audio
Pan (Receive Pan)
Determines whether Pan messages are received or not.
This is not available when the Receive Control Change is set to Off.
Settings: Off, On
Normal Part (AWM2) Edit
Common
Part Settings
General
MW (Receive Modulation Wheel)
Pitch
Determines whether MIDI messages generated by using the Modulation Wheel are received or not.
This is not available when the Receive Control Change is set to Off.
Zone Settings
Settings: Off, On
Zone Transmit
Effect
Sustain (Receive Sustain)
Determines whether Sustain messages are received or not.
This is not available when the Receive Control Change is set to Off.
Settings: Off, On
FC1/FC2 (Receive Foot Controller)
Determines whether MIDI messages generated by pressing the optional Foot Controller are received or
not.
This is not available when the Receive Control Change is set to Off.
Settings: Off, On
FS (Receive Foot Switch)
Determines whether MIDI messages generated by pressing the optional Foot Switch are received or not.
This is not available when the Receive Control Change is set to Off.
Settings: Off, On
Routing
Ins A
Ins B
EQ
Arpeggio
Common
Individual
Advanced
Motion Seq
Common
Lane
Mod / Control
A. SW1/A. SW2 (Receive Assignable Switch)
Part LFO
Determines whether MIDI messages generated by pressing the [ASSIGN 1] and [ASSIGN 2] buttons are
received or not.
This is not available when the Receive Control Change is set to Off.
Control Assign
Settings: Off, On
Receive SW
Element
Osc / Tune
MS Hold (Receive Motion Sequencer Hold)
Determines whether MIDI messages generated by pressing the [MOTION SEQ HOLD] button are received
or not.
This is not available when the Receive Control Change is set to Off.
Settings: Off, On
MS Trigger (Receive Motion Sequencer Trigger)
Determines whether MIDI messages generated by pressing the [MOTION SEQ TRIGGER] button are
received or not.
This is not available when the Receive Control Change is set to Off.
Settings: Off, On
Pitch EG
Filter
Type
Filter EG
Scale
Amplitude
Level / Pan
Amp EG
Scale
RB (Receive Ribbon Controller)
Element LFO
Determines whether MIDI messages generated by using the Ribbon Controller are received or not.
This is not available when the Receive Control Change is set to Off.
Element EQ
Settings: Off, On
BC (Receive Breath Controller)
All Element
Osc
Balance
Determines whether MIDI messages for Breath Controller are received or not.
This is not available when the Receive Control Change is set to Off.
Settings: Off, On
A.Knob 1 – 8 (Receive Assignable Knob)
Determines whether MIDI messages generated by using the Assignable Knobs 1 – 8 are received or not.
This is not available when the Receive Control Change is set to Off.
Settings: Off, On
MONTAGE Reference Manual
93
Reference
Performance
Edit
Normal Part (AWM2)
Search
Drum Part
Utility
Normal Part (FM-X)
Live Set
Common/Audio
Element Edit (Element)
Normal Part (AWM2) Edit
Common
Part Settings
Osc/Tune (Oscillator/Tune)
From the Oscillator/Tune display you can assign the waveform (or basic sound material) to each Element.
You can set the note range for the Element (the range of notes on the keyboard over which the Element will
sound) as well as the velocity response (the range of note velocities within which the Element will sound).
Operation
[PERFORMANCE]  [EDIT]  Part selection  Element selection  [Osc/Tune]
Element Switch
General
Pitch
Zone Settings
Zone Transmit
Effect
Routing
Ins A
Ins B
EQ
Arpeggio
Common
Individual
Advanced
Motion Seq
Common
Lane
Mod / Control
Part LFO
Control Assign
Receive SW
Element
Osc / Tune
Pitch EG
Filter
Bank (Waveform Bank)
Number (Waveform Number)
Category (Waveform Category)
Sub Category (Waveform Sub Category)
Name (Waveform Name)
Indicates the information of the waveform used for the selected Element. “Bank” indicates which waveform
location (Preset, User and Library) is assigned to the Element.
Settings: See the Data List PDF document.
Type
Filter EG
Scale
Amplitude
Level / Pan
Amp EG
Scale
Element LFO
Element Switch
Determines whether the currently selected Element is on or off.
Settings: Off, On
Element EQ
All Element
Osc
XA Control
Balance
Determines the functioning of the Expanded Articulation (XA) feature of an Element.
The XA feature is sophisticated tone generator system that allows you to more effectively recreate realistic
sound and natural performance techniques. It also provides other unique modes for random and alternate
sound changes as you play. For details on the XA feature, see the “Tone Generator Block” in the “Basic
Structure” on page 6.
Settings: Normal, Legato, Key Off, Cycle, Random, A.SW Off, A.SW1 On, A.SW2 On
For each Element, you can set to:
Normal: The Element sounds normally each time you play the note.
Legato: When the Mono/Poly parameter is set to Mono, this Element will be played in place of the one which is set to
“Normal” of the XA Control parameter when you play the keyboard in legato fashion (playing the next note of a
single-note line or melody before releasing the previous note).
Key Off: The Element will sound each time you release the note.
Cycle (for multiple Elements): Each Element sounds alternately according to its numerical order. In other words,
playing the first note will sound Element 1, the second note Element 2, and so on.
Random (for multiple Elements): Each Element will sound randomly each time you play the note.
MONTAGE Reference Manual
94
Reference
Performance
Edit
Normal Part (AWM2)
Search
Drum Part
Utility
Normal Part (FM-X)
Live Set
Common/Audio
A.SW1 On: When the [ASSIGN 1] button is turned On, the Element will sound.
A.SW2 On: When the [ASSIGN 2] button is turned On, the Element will sound.
A.SW Off: When both the [ASSIGN 1] and [ASSIGN 2] buttons are turned Off, the Element will sound.
Normal Part (AWM2) Edit
Common
Part Settings
Elem Group (Element Group)
Determines the group for XA Control. All Elements that have the same type of XA features must have the
same group number. This setting does not apply when the XA Control parameters of all Elements are set to
Normal.
Settings: 1 – 8
Elem Connect (Element Connection Switch)
Determines which Insertion Effect (A or B) is used to process each individual Element. Set this to “Thru” to
bypass the Insertion Effects for the specified element.
Settings: Thru, InsA, InsB
New Waveform
Loads Audio data stored in the USB flash memory as “Waveform.” For details on loading, see “Load”
(page 174).
After the Waveform is loaded, the Edit Waveform parameter (below) will be available.
Coarse (Coarse Tune)
Determines the pitch of each Element in semitones.
Settings: -48 – +48
Fine (Fine Tune)
Determines the fine tuning for the pitch of each Element.
Settings: -64 – 63
Pitch/Vel (Pitch Velocity Sensitivity)
Determines how the pitch of the selected Element responds to velocity.
Settings: -64 – 63
Positive values: The harder you play the keyboard, the more the pitch rises.
Negative values: The harder you play the keyboard, the more the pitch falls.
0: No change in pitch.
General
Pitch
Zone Settings
Zone Transmit
Effect
Routing
Ins A
Ins B
EQ
Arpeggio
Common
Individual
Advanced
Motion Seq
Common
Lane
Mod / Control
Part LFO
Control Assign
Receive SW
Element
Osc / Tune
Pitch EG
Filter
Fine/Key (Pitch Fine Key Follow Sensitivity)
Type
Determines the degree to which the notes (specifically, their position or octave range) affect the pitch in
Fine Tuning.
Filter EG
Settings: -64 – 63
Positive values: The pitch of lower notes drops and that of higher notes rises.
Negative values: The pitch of lower notes rises and that of higher notes drops.
Random (Random Pitch Depth)
Scale
Amplitude
Level / Pan
Amp EG
Scale
Allows you to randomly vary the pitch of the Element for each note you play. The higher the value, the
greater the pitch variation.
Element LFO
Settings: 0 – 127
Element EQ
Vel Cross Fade (Velocity Cross Fade)
Determines how gradually the volume of an Oscillator decreases in proportion to the distance of Velocity
changes outside the Velocity Limit setting.
All Element
Osc
Balance
Settings: 0 – 127
The higher the value, the more gradually the volume decreases.
0: No sound
Tempo Sync (Key On Delay Tempo Sync Switch)
Determines whether or not “Key On Delay” (below) is synchronized to the tempo.
Settings: Off, On
Length (Key On Delay Time Length)
Determines the time (or elapsed delay) between the moment you press a note on the keyboard and the
point at which the sound is actually played. You can set different delay times for each Element. This is not
available when “Key On Delay Tempo Sync” is set to on.
Settings: 0 – 127
MONTAGE Reference Manual
95
Reference
Performance
Edit
Search
Normal Part (AWM2)
Drum Part
Utility
Normal Part (FM-X)
Live Set
Common/Audio
Normal Part (AWM2) Edit
Length (Key On Delay Note Length)
Determines the timing of “Key On Delay” when “Key On Delay Tempo Sync” is set to on.
Settings: 1/16, 1/8 Tri. (eighth-note triplets), 1/16 Dot. (dotted sixteenth notes), 1/8, 1/4 Tri. (quarter-note triplets), 1/8 Dot.
(dotted eighth notes), 1/4, 1/2 Tri. (half-note triplets), 1/4 Dot. (dotted quarter notes), 1/2, Whole Tri. (whole-note
triplets), 1/2 Dot. (dotted half notes), 1/4 x 4 (quarter-note quadruplets; four quarter notes to the beat), 1/4 x 5
(quarter-note quintuplets; five quarter notes to the beat), 1/4 x 6 (quarter-note sextuplets; six quarter notes to the
beat), 1/4 x 7 (quarter-note septuplets; seven quarter notes to the beat), 1/4 x 8 (quarter-note octuplets; eight quarter
notes to the beat)
Common
Part Settings
General
Pitch
Zone Settings
Zone Transmit
Velocity Limit
Determines the minimum and maximum values of the velocity range within which each Element will
respond. Each Element will only sound for notes played within its specified velocity range. If you first
specify the maximum value and then the minimum value, for example “93 to 34,” then the Velocity range
covers both “1 to 34” and “93 to 127.”
Settings: 1 – 127
Effect
Routing
Ins A
Ins B
EQ
Note Limit
Arpeggio
Determines the lowest and highest notes of the keyboard range for each Element. Each Element will only
sound for notes played within its specified range. If you first specify the highest note and then the lowest
note, for example “C5 to C4,” then the note range covers both “C-2 to C4” and “C5 to G8.”
Settings: C -2 – G8
Common
Individual
Advanced
Motion Seq
Pitch/Key (Pitch Key Follow Sensitivity)
Determines the sensitivity of the Key Follow effect (the pitch interval of adjacent notes), assuming the pitch
of the Center Key (below) as standard.
Settings: -200% – +0% – +200%
+100% (the normal setting): Adjacent notes are pitched one semitone apart.
0%: All notes have the same pitch as the Center Key.
Negative values: The settings are reversed.
Common
Lane
Mod / Control
Part LFO
Control Assign
Receive SW
Center Key (Pitch Key Follow Sensitivity Center Key)
Element
Determines the central note or pitch for the Key Follow effect on pitch.
Osc / Tune
Settings: C -2 – G8
Pitch EG
Edit Waveform
Filter
Calls up the Waveform Edit display.
From this display you can set parameters related to Key Banks consisting of the Waveform.
Type
Filter EG
• Key Bank
Scale
A Key Bank is digital audio data, made by directly recording a signal, such as that of vocals or
electric guitar, to this instrument.
Throughout this manual, the words “Key Bank” and “Wave” are sometimes used interchangeably;
however, you should be careful to distinguish between “Key Bank” (raw audio data) and “Waveform”
(collected audio data used to make up a Part).
Amplitude
Level / Pan
Amp EG
Scale
Element LFO
• Key Bank and Waveform
Key Banks are assigned and stored to Waveforms on the MONTAGE.
Each of the Waveforms can contain multiple Key Banks. To assign these Key Banks to a different
space or container, you can set the note limit and velocity limit for each Key Bank. With this setting,
the different Key Bank is played back depending on the pressed note and its velocity.
Element EQ
All Element
Osc
Balance
Waveform
Velocity
127
40
Key
Bank 1
Key Bank 2
Waveform
Key Bank 3
D#2
MONTAGE Reference Manual
Key Bank 4
A#2
Key Bank 5
G#3
F4
Key Number
(Note Number)
96
Reference
Performance
Edit
Search
Normal Part (AWM2)
Drum Part
Utility
Normal Part (FM-X)
Live Set
Common/Audio
Normal Part (AWM2) Edit
• Part and Waveform
You can play the Waveform by assigning it to a Part then playing the keyboard with that Part. You can
assign the Waveform to an Element of the Part in the Element Edit for the Normal Part (AWM2) Edit
(page 94) and the Key Edit for the Drum Part Edit (page 126).
Number of Key Banks
Waveform Total Size
Common
Part Settings
General
Pitch
Zone Settings
Zone Transmit
Effect
Routing
Ins A
Ins B
EQ
Arpeggio
Common
Individual
Advanced
Motion Seq
Common
Lane
Mod / Control
Part LFO
Note Limit and Velocity Limit for each Key Bank
Control Assign
Receive SW
Waveform
Indicates the selected Waveform.
Category (Waveform Main Category)
Sub Category (Waveform Sub Category)
Determines the Main category and the Sub category for the selected Waveform.
Settings: See the Data List PDF document.
Name (Waveform Name)
Determines the selected Waveform. Waveform names can contain up to 20 characters. Touching the
parameter calls up the input character display.
Number of Keybank (Number of Key Bank)
Indicates the number of Key Banks in the selected Waveform.
Waveform Total Size
Indicates the total data size of the selected Waveform.
Element
Osc / Tune
Pitch EG
Filter
Type
Filter EG
Scale
Amplitude
Level / Pan
Amp EG
Scale
Element LFO
Element EQ
All Element
Keybank (Key Bank)
Osc
Indicates the selected Key Bank.
Balance
Size (Key Bank Size)
Indicates the data size of the selected Key Bank.
Channel (Key Bank Channel)
Indicates the Channel (Stereo or Mono) of the selected Key Bank.
Velocity Limit
Determines the minimum and maximum values of the velocity range within which the selected Key Bank
will respond.
Settings: 1 – 127
Note Limit
Determines the lowest and highest notes of the keyboard range for the selected Key Bank.
Settings: 1 – 127
MONTAGE Reference Manual
97
Reference
Performance
Edit
Normal Part (AWM2)
Search
Drum Part
Utility
Normal Part (FM-X)
Live Set
Common/Audio
Normal Part (AWM2) Edit
Volume
Determines the output volume of the selected Key Bank.
Common
Settings: 0 – 255
Part Settings
Pan
General
Determines the stereo pan position of the selected Key Bank.
Pitch
Settings: L63 – C – R63
Zone Settings
Tune Coarse (Coarse Tune)
Zone Transmit
Effect
Determines the pitch of the selected Key Bank in semitones.
Settings: -64 – +63
Routing
Tune Fine (Fine Tune)
Ins A
Determines the fine tuning for the pitch of the selected Key Bank.
Ins B
Settings: -64 – +63
EQ
Arpeggio
Delete Keybank (Delete Key Bank)
Common
Deletes the selected Key Bank.
Individual
Add Keybank (Add Key Bank)
Advanced
Adds new Key Bank to the selected Waveform.
Motion Seq
Common
Lane
Pitch EG
Mod / Control
Part LFO
From the Pitch EG display you can make all time and level settings for the Pitch EG, which determine how
the pitch of the sound changes over time for Oscillators. These can be used to control the change in pitch
from the moment a note is pressed on the keyboard to the moment the sound stops.
Control Assign
Receive SW
Element
Operation
[PERFORMANCE]  [EDIT]  Part selection  Element selection  [Pitch EG]
Osc / Tune
Pitch EG
Filter
Type
Filter EG
Scale
Amplitude
Level / Pan
Amp EG
Scale
Element LFO
Element EQ
All Element
Osc
Balance
The full names of the available parameters are shown in the chart below, as they appear in the display.
Hold
Attack
Decay1
Decay2
Release
Time
Hold Time
Attack Time
Decay1 Time
Decay2 Time
Release Time
Level
Hold Level
Attack Level
Decay1 Level
Decay2 Level
Release Level
Settings: Time: 0 – 127
Level: -128 – +127
MONTAGE Reference Manual
98
Reference
Performance
Edit
Normal Part (AWM2)
Search
Drum Part
Utility
Normal Part (FM-X)
Live Set
Common/Audio
Normal Part (AWM2) Edit
Time/Key (PEG Time Key Follow Sensitivity)
Determines the degree to which the notes (specifically, their position or octave range) affect the Pitch EG
times. The Center Key (next parameter) is used as the basic pitch for this parameter.
Settings: -64 – +63
Positive values: High notes result in a high PEG transition speed while low notes result in a slow speed.
Negative values: High notes result in a slow PEG transition speed while low notes result in a high speed.
0: The PEG transition speed does not change, regardless of the played note.
Part Settings
General
Pitch
Zone Settings
Zone Transmit
Center Key (PEG Time Key Follow Sensitivity Center Key)
Determines how the PEG transition time (speed) responds to Velocity, or to the strength with which the key
is pressed. When the Center Key note is played, the PEG behaves according to its actual settings.
Settings: C-2 – G8
Effect
Routing
Ins A
Ins B
Time/Vel (PEG Time Velocity Sensitivity)
Segment (PEG Time Velocity Sensitivity Segment)
EQ
Determines the velocity sensitivity of the PEG’s Time parameters. Select the Segment, and then set its
“Time/Vel” parameter.
Settings: Time/Vel: -64 – +63
Positive values: High Velocities result in a fast PEG transition speed while low Velocities result in a slow speed.
Negative values: High Velocities result in a slow PEG transition speed while low Velocities result in a fast speed.
0: The PEG transition speed does not change, regardless of the Velocity.
Settings: Segment: Attack, Atk+Dcy (Attack+Decay), Decay, Atk+Rls (Attack+Release), All
Attack: Time/Vel parameter affects Attack Time.
Atk+Dcy: Time/Vel Value affects Attack/Decay1 Time.
Decay: Time/Vel parameter affects Decay Time
Atk+Rls: Time/Vel Value affects Attack/Release Time.
All: Time/Vel affects all PEG Time parameters.
PEG Depth
Arpeggio
Common
Individual
Advanced
Motion Seq
Common
Lane
Mod / Control
Part LFO
Control Assign
Receive SW
Determines the pitch range for Pitch EG.
Element
Settings: -64 – +63
Osc / Tune
Pitch EG
Depth/Vel (PEG Depth Velocity Sensitivity)
Curve (PEG Depth Velocity Sensitivity Curve)
Filter
Determines how the pitch range will be generated according to the Velocity (strength) with which you play
notes on the keyboard. The Curve parameter lets you select from five different preset velocity curves
(graphically indicated in the display) that determine how velocity affects the Pitch EG Depth. In the
illustrations below, the vertical axis indicates Pitch Change and the horizontal axis indicates Velocity.
Settings: Depth/Vel: -64 – +63
Positive values: High Velocities cause the pitch range to expand and low Velocities cause it to contract.
Negative values: High Velocities cause the pitch range to contract and low Velocities cause it to expand.
0: The pitch envelope does not change, regardless of the Velocity.
Settings: Curve: 0 – 4
0
Common
1
2
3
4
Type
Filter EG
Scale
Amplitude
Level / Pan
Amp EG
Scale
Element LFO
Element EQ
All Element
Osc
NOTE For details on PEG, see the Synthesizer Parameter Manual PDF document.
MONTAGE Reference Manual
Balance
99
Reference
Performance
Edit
Search
Normal Part (AWM2)
Drum Part
Utility
Normal Part (FM-X)
Live Set
Common/Audio
Normal Part (AWM2) Edit
Filter
Common
Part Settings
Type
General
From the Type display you can make comprehensive settings for the Filter unit. The available parameters
differ depending on which Filter type is selected here.
Operation
[PERFORMANCE]  [EDIT]  Part selection  Element selection  [Filter]  [Type]
Pitch
Zone Settings
Zone Transmit
Effect
Routing
Ins A
Ins B
EQ
Arpeggio
Common
Individual
Advanced
Motion Seq
Common
Lane
Mod / Control
Part LFO
Control Assign
Receive SW
Element
Osc / Tune
Filter Type
Pitch EG
Determines the Filter Type for the current Element. Basically, there are four different filters: LPF (Low Pass
Filter), HPF (High Pass Filter), BPF (Band Pass Filter) and BEF (Band Elimination Filter). For details on
settings, see the Synthesizer Parameter Manual PDF document.
Filter
Settings: LPF24D, LPF24A, LPF18, LPF18s, LPF12+HPF12, LPF6+HPF12, HPF24D, HPF12, BPF12D, BPFw, BPF6, BEF12,
BEF6, DualLPF, DualHPF, DualBPF, DualBEF, LPF12+BPF6, Thru
Type
Filter EG
Scale
Amplitude
LPF
Resonance
Gain
Level / Pan
Amp EG
Gain
Scale
Element LFO
Element EQ
Frequencies that are
“passed” by the filter
Cutoff
Frequency
Frequency
Cutoff
Frequency
Frequency
LPF24D: A dynamic -24 dB/oct Low-Pass Filter with a characteristic digital sound. Compared to the LPF24A type,
this filter can produce a more pronounced Resonance effect.
Gain
All Element
Osc
Balance
Resonance
Frequencies that are “passed” by the filter
Frequency
LPF24A: A digital dynamic Low-Pass Filter with characteristics similar to a 4-pole analog synthesizer filter.
LPF18: 3-pole -18 dB/oct Low-Pass Filter.
LPF18s: 3-pole -18 dB/oct Low-Pass Filter. This filter has a smoother cutoff slope than the LPF18 type.
MONTAGE Reference Manual
100
Reference
Performance
Edit
Search
Normal Part (AWM2)
Drum Part
Utility
Normal Part (FM-X)
Live Set
Common/Audio
Normal Part (AWM2) Edit
HPF
Frequencies that are “passed” by the filter
Gain
Resonance
Common
Part Settings
General
Pitch
Frequency
Cutoff Frequency
Zone Settings
Zone Transmit
LPF12+HPF12: A combination of a -12 dB/oct Low-Pass Filter and a -12 dB/oct High-Pass Filter connected in serial.
When this Filter Type is selected, HPF Cutoff and HPF Key Follow Sensitivity can be set
LPF6+HPF12: A combination of a -6 dB/oct Low-Pass Filter and a -12 dB/oct High-Pass Filter connected in serial.
When this Filter Type is selected, HPF Cutoff and HPF Key Follow Sensitivity can be set.
Effect
Routing
Ins A
HPF24D: A dynamic -24 dB/oct High-Pass Filter with a characteristic digital sound. This filter can produce a
Ins B
pronounced Resonance effect.
EQ
Gain
Arpeggio
Resonance
Common
Individual
Frequencies that are “passed”
by the filter
Frequency
Advanced
Motion Seq
Common
HPF12: -12 dB/oct dynamic High-Pass Filter.
Lane
Mod / Control
BPF
Frequencies that are “passed” by the filter
Gain
Part LFO
Control Assign
Receive SW
Element
Osc / Tune
Center Frequency
Frequency
BPF12D: The combination of a -12 dB/oct HPF and LPF with a characteristic digital sound.
Pitch EG
Filter
Type
Resonance
Filter EG
Gain
Scale
Amplitude
Level / Pan
Frequencies that are “passed” by the filter
Frequency
Amp EG
Scale
BPFw: A -12 dB/oct BPF that combines HPF and LPF filters to allow wider bandwidth settings.
Element LFO
Element EQ
Gain
All Element
Osc
Width
Balance
Frequencies that are “passed” by the filter
Frequency
BPF6: The combination of a -6 dB/oct HPF and LPF.
Resonance
Gain
Frequency
Frequencies that are “passed” by the filter
MONTAGE Reference Manual
101
Reference
Performance
Edit
Normal Part (AWM2)
Search
Drum Part
Utility
Normal Part (FM-X)
Live Set
Common/Audio
Normal Part (AWM2) Edit
BEF
Frequencies that are “passed” by the filter
Gain
Common
Part Settings
General
Pitch
Zone Settings
Center Frequency
Frequency
Zone Transmit
Effect
BEF12: -12 dB/oct Band-Eliminate Filter.
BEF6: -6 dB/oct Band-Eliminate Filter.
Routing
DualLPF: Two -12 dB/oct Low-Pass Filters connected in parallel. You can edit the distance between the two Cutoff
Ins A
Ins B
Frequencies.
EQ
Distance
Gain
Arpeggio
Common
Individual
Frequency
Lower Cutoff Frequency is set directly on the display
(and Higher Cutoff Frequency is automatically set)
Advanced
Motion Seq
Common
DualHPF: Two -12 dB/oct High-Pass Filters connected in parallel.
DualBPF: Two -6 dB/oct Band-Pass Filters connected in parallel.
DualBEF: Two -6 dB/oct Band-Eliminate Filters connected in serial.
Lane
Mod / Control
Part LFO
Distance
Gain
Control Assign
Receive SW
Element
Frequency
Lower Cutoff Frequency is set directly on the display
(and Higher Cutoff Frequency is automatically set)
Osc / Tune
Pitch EG
Filter
LPF12+BPF6: A combination of a -12 dB/oct Low-Pass Filter and a -6 dB/oct Band-Pass Filter connected in
parallel. You can edit the distance between the two Cutoff Frequencies.
Type
Filter EG
Gain
Scale
Amplitude
Level / Pan
Distance
Frequency
Lower Cutoff Frequency is set directly on the display
(and Higher Cutoff Frequency is automatically set)
Cutoff (Cutoff Frequency)
Determines the cutoff frequency for the Filter. This is used as the basic frequency for the selected Filter
Type.
Settings: 0 – 255
Amp EG
Scale
Element LFO
Element EQ
All Element
Osc
Balance
Cutoff/Vel (Cutoff Velocity Sensitivity)
Determines how the Cutoff Frequency responds to Velocity, or the strength with which you play notes.
Settings: -64 – +63
Positive values: The more strongly you play the keyboard, the more the Cutoff Frequency rises.
Negative values: The more softly you play the keyboard, the more the Cutoff Frequency rises.
0: The Cutoff Frequency does not change, regardless of the Velocity.
MONTAGE Reference Manual
102
Reference
Performance
Edit
Normal Part (AWM2)
Search
Drum Part
Utility
Normal Part (FM-X)
Live Set
Common/Audio
Resonance
Width
This parameter’s function varies according to the selected Filter Type. If the selected filter is an LPF, HPF,
BPF (excluding BPFw), or BEF, this parameter is used to set the Resonance. For the BPFw, it is used to
adjust the frequency bandwidth. This parameter is used to set the amount of Resonance (harmonic
emphasis) applied to the signal at the cutoff frequency. This can be used in combination with the “Cutoff”
parameter to add further character to the sound. For the BPFw, this parameter is used to adjust the width
of the band of signal frequencies passed by the filter.
This parameter is not displayed depending on the selected Filter Types.
Settings: 0 – 127
Cutoff/Key (Cutoff Key Follow Sensitivity)
Determines the degree to which the notes (specifically, their position or octave range) affect the Cutoff
Frequency (above). The Center Key (next parameter) is used as the basic Cutoff Frequency for this
parameter.
Settings: - 200% – +200%
Positive values: The Cutoff Frequency drops for lower notes and rises for higher notes.
Negative values: The Cutoff Frequency rises for lower notes and drops for higher notes.
Normal Part (AWM2) Edit
Common
Part Settings
General
Pitch
Zone Settings
Zone Transmit
Effect
Routing
Ins A
Ins B
EQ
Arpeggio
Common
Individual
Center Key (Cutoff Key Follow Sensitivity Center Key)
This indicates that the central note for “Cutoff/Key” above is C3. Keep in mind that this is for display
purposes only; the value cannot be changed.
Advanced
Motion Seq
Common
Gain
Sets the Gain (the amount of boost applied to the signal sent to the Filter Unit).
 In case of the Filter Type with “Distance” and “Res/Vel” parameters
Lane
Mod / Control
Part LFO
Control Assign
Receive SW
Element
Osc / Tune
Pitch EG
Filter
Type
Filter EG
Scale
Amplitude
Level / Pan
Amp EG
Scale
Element LFO
Element EQ
All Element
Osc
Distance
Balance
Determines the distance between the Cutoff Frequencies for the Dual Filter types and the LPF12+BPF6
filter. This parameter is not displayed depending on the selected Filter Type.
Settings: -128 – +127
Res/Vel (Resonance Velocity Sensitivity)
Determines the degree to which Resonance responds to Velocity, or the strength with which you play
notes. This parameter is not displayed depending on the selected Filter Type.
Settings: -64 – +63
Positive values: The higher the Velocity, the greater the Resonance.
Negative values: The lower the Velocity, the greater the Resonance.
0: No change of the Resonance value.
MONTAGE Reference Manual
103
Reference
Performance
Edit
Normal Part (AWM2)
Search
Drum Part
Utility
Normal Part (FM-X)
Live Set
Common/Audio
 In case of the Filter Type with “HPF Cutoff” and “HPF Cutoff/Key” parameters
Normal Part (AWM2) Edit
Common
Part Settings
General
Pitch
Zone Settings
Zone Transmit
Effect
Routing
Ins A
Ins B
EQ
Arpeggio
Common
Individual
Advanced
Motion Seq
Common
HPF Cutoff (High Pass Filter Cutoff Frequency)
Determines the central frequency for the Key Follow parameter (below) of the HPF. This parameter is
available only when one of the filter types “LPF12+HPF12” or “LPF6+HPF12” is selected.
Lane
Mod / Control
Part LFO
Settings: 0 – 255
Control Assign
HPF Cutoff/Key (High Pass Filter Cutoff Key Follow Sensitivity)
Receive SW
Determines the degree to which the notes (specifically, their position or Octave Range) affect the Cutoff
Frequency of the HPF. This parameter is available only when one of the filter types “LPF12+HPF12” or
“LPF6+HPF12” is selected.
Settings: - 200% – +200%
Positive values: The Cutoff Frequency drops for lower notes and rises for higher notes.
Negative values: The Cutoff Frequency rises for lower notes and drops for higher notes.
Element
Osc / Tune
Pitch EG
Filter
Type
Filter EG
Scale
Amplitude
Level / Pan
Amp EG
Scale
Element LFO
Element EQ
All Element
Osc
Balance
MONTAGE Reference Manual
104
Reference
Performance
Edit
Normal Part (AWM2)
Search
Drum Part
Utility
Normal Part (FM-X)
Live Set
Common/Audio
Normal Part (AWM2) Edit
Filter EG
Common
From the Filter EG display you can make all time and level settings for the Filter EG, which determine how
the sound changes over time for Elements. These can be used to control the change the sound from the
moment a note is pressed on the keyboard to the moment the sound stops.
Part Settings
General
Pitch
Operation
[PERFORMANCE]  [EDIT]  Part selection  Element selection  [Filter]  [Filter EG]
Zone Settings
Zone Transmit
Effect
Routing
Ins A
Ins B
EQ
Arpeggio
Common
Individual
Advanced
Motion Seq
Common
Lane
Mod / Control
Part LFO
Control Assign
Receive SW
Element
The full names of the available parameters are shown in the chart below, as they appear in the display.
Osc / Tune
Hold
Attack
Decay1
Decay2
Release
Pitch EG
Time
Hold Time
Attack Time
Decay1 Time
Decay2 Time
Release Time
Filter
Level
Hold Level
Attack Level
Decay1 Level
Decay2 Level
Release Level
Settings: Time: 0 – 127
Level: -128 – +127
Type
Filter EG
Scale
Amplitude
Time/Key (FEG Time Key Follow Sensitivity)
Determines the degree to which the notes (specifically, their position or octave range) affect the Filter EG
Times. The basic speed of change for the FEG is at the note specified in Center Key (below).
Settings: -64 – +63
Positive values: High notes result in a high FEG transition speed while low notes result in a slow speed.
Negative values: High notes result in a slow FEG transition speed while low notes result in a high speed.
0: The FEG transition speed does not change, regardless of the played note.
Level / Pan
Amp EG
Scale
Element LFO
Element EQ
All Element
Center Key (FEG Time Key Follow Sensitivity Center Key)
Osc
Determines the central note for the “Time/Key” parameter above.
Balance
Settings: C-2 – G8
MONTAGE Reference Manual
105
Reference
Performance
Edit
Normal Part (AWM2)
Search
Drum Part
Utility
Normal Part (FM-X)
Live Set
Common/Audio
Normal Part (AWM2) Edit
Time/Vel (FEG Time Velocity Sensitivity)
Segment (FEG Time Velocity Sensitivity Segment)
Common
Determines how the FEG transition time (speed) responds to Velocity, or the strength with which the key is
pressed. Select the “Segment,” and then set its “Time/Vel” parameter.
Settings: Time/Vel: -64 – +63
Positive values: High Velocities result in a fast FEG transition speed while low Velocities result in a slow speed.
Negative values: High Velocities result in a slow FEG transition speed while low Velocities result in a fast speed.
0: The pitch transition speed does not change, regardless of the Velocity.
Settings: Segment: Attack, Atk+Dcy (Attack+Decay), Decay, Atk+Rls (Attack+Release), All
Attack: Time/Vel parameter affects Attack time.
Atk+Dcy: Time/Vel Value affects Attack/Decay1 time.
Decay: Time/Vel parameter affects Decay Time.
Atk+Rls: Time/Vel Value affects Attack/Release time.
All: Time/Vel affects all FEG Time parameters.
Part Settings
General
Pitch
Zone Settings
Zone Transmit
Effect
Routing
Ins A
Ins B
EQ
FEG Depth
Arpeggio
Determines the Cutoff Frequency range for Filter EG.
Common
Settings: -64 – +63
Individual
Depth/Vel (FEG Depth Velocity Sensitivity)
Curve (FEG Depth Velocity Sensitivity Curve)
Advanced
Motion Seq
Determines how the range of the Cutoff Frequency responds to Velocity (strength) with which you play
notes on the keyboard. The Curve parameter lets you select from five different preset velocity curves
(graphically indicated in the display) that determine how velocity affects the Filter EG Depth. In the
illustrations below, the vertical axis indicates Cutoff Frequency Change and the horizontal axis indicates
Velocity.
Settings: Depth/Vel: -64 – +63
Settings: Curve: 0 – 4
0
Common
Lane
Mod / Control
Part LFO
Control Assign
1
2
3
4
Receive SW
Element
Osc / Tune
Pitch EG
NOTE For details on FEG, see the Synthesizer Parameter Manual PDF document.
Filter
Type
Filter EG
Scale
Amplitude
Level / Pan
Amp EG
Scale
Element LFO
Element EQ
All Element
Osc
Balance
MONTAGE Reference Manual
106
Reference
Performance
Edit
Normal Part (AWM2)
Search
Drum Part
Utility
Normal Part (FM-X)
Scale (Filter Scale)
From the Filter Scale display you can set parameters related to Filter Scale for Elements.
“Filter Scale” controls the Filter Cutoff Frequency according to the positions of the notes on the keyboard.
Operation
[PERFORMANCE]  [EDIT]  Part selection  Element selection  [Filter]  [Scale]
Live Set
Common/Audio
Normal Part (AWM2) Edit
Common
Part Settings
General
Pitch
Zone Settings
Zone Transmit
Effect
Routing
Ins A
Ins B
EQ
Arpeggio
Common
Individual
Advanced
Motion Seq
Common
Lane
Mod / Control
Part LFO
Control Assign
Receive SW
Break Point 1 – 4
Element
Determines the four Break Points by specifying the respective note numbers.
Osc / Tune
Settings: C -2 – G8
NOTE Break Points 1 to 4 will be automatically be arranged in ascending order across the keyboard.
Pitch EG
Filter
Cutoff Offset 1 – 4
Type
Determines the offset value to the Cutoff Frequency at each Break Point.
Filter EG
Settings: -128 – +127
NOTE Regardless of the size of these Offsets, the minimum and maximum Cutoff limits (values of 0 and 127,
respectively) cannot be exceeded.
NOTE Any note played below the Break Point 1 note results in the Break Point 1 Level setting. Likewise, any note
played above the Break Point 4 note results in the Break Point 4 Level setting.
NOTE For information on setting examples for Filter Scaling, see the Synthesizer Parameter Manual PDF document.
Scale
Amplitude
Level / Pan
Amp EG
Scale
Element LFO
Element EQ
All Element
Osc
Balance
MONTAGE Reference Manual
107
Reference
Performance
Edit
Search
Normal Part (AWM2)
Utility
Drum Part
Normal Part (FM-X)
Live Set
Common/Audio
Normal Part (AWM2) Edit
Amplitude
Common
Part Settings
Level/Pan
General
Pitch
From the Level/Pan display you can make Level and Pan settings for each individual Element.
Zone Settings
Operation
[PERFORMANCE]  [EDIT]  Part selection  Element selection  [Amplitude]  [Level/Pan]
Zone Transmit
Effect
Routing
Ins A
Ins B
EQ
Arpeggio
Common
Individual
Advanced
Motion Seq
Common
Lane
Mod / Control
Part LFO
Control Assign
Receive SW
Element
Osc / Tune
Level
Pitch EG
Determines the output level of the Element.
Filter
Settings: 0 – 127
Type
Level/Vel (Level Velocity Sensitivity)
Offset (Level Velocity Sensitivity Offset)
Curve (Level Velocity Sensitivity Curve)
Filter EG
Scale
Determines how the actual Velocity will be generated according to the Velocity (strength) with which you
play notes on the keyboard. The Offset parameter raises or lowers the level specified by the “Level/Vel.”
If the result is higher than 127, the velocity is set to 127. The Curve parameter lets you select from five
different preset velocity curves (graphically indicated in the display) that determine how velocity affects the
actual Velocity. In the illustrations below, the vertical axis indicates the actual resulting Velocity and the
horizontal axis indicates Velocity with which you play notes.
Amplitude
Settings: Level/Vel: -64 – +63
Positive values: The more strongly you play the keyboard, the more the output rises.
Negative values: The more softly you play the keyboard, the more the output rises.
0: The output level does not change.
Settings: Offset: 0 – 127
Element EQ
Level Velocity Sensitivity Offset = 0
Y
127
Level Velocity Sensitivity Offset = 64
Y
A
127
127
B
B
0
64
127
X
0
Scale
Element LFO
All Element
Osc
Balance
A
B
C
C
C
Amp EG
Level Velocity Sensitivity Offset = 96
Y
A
Level / Pan
64
127
X
0
64
127
X
A: Level Velocity Sensitivity = 0
B: Level Velocity Sensitivity = 32
C: Level Velocity Sensitivity = 64
X: Velocity with which you play a note
Y: Actual resulting velocity (affecting the tone generator)
MONTAGE Reference Manual
108
Reference
Performance
Edit
Normal Part (AWM2)
Search
Drum Part
Utility
Normal Part (FM-X)
Live Set
Common/Audio
Normal Part (AWM2) Edit
Settings: Curve: 0 – 4
0
1
2
3
4
Common
Part Settings
General
Pan (Element Pan)
Determines the stereo Pan position for the selected Element.
Settings: L63 – C (center) – R63
Pitch
Zone Settings
Zone Transmit
Effect
Alternate Pan
Routing
Determines the amount by which the sound is panned alternately left and right for each note you press.
The Pan setting (above) is used as the basic Pan position.
Ins A
Settings: L64 – C – R63
Ins B
EQ
Random Pan
Determines the amount by which the sound of the selected Element is panned randomly left and right for
each note you press. The Pan setting (above) is used as the Center Pan position.
Settings: 0 – 127
Scaling Pan
Determines the degree to which the notes (specifically, their position or octave range) affect the Pan
position, left and right, of the selected Element. At note C3, the main Pan setting (above) is used for the
basic Pan position.
Settings: -64 – +0 – +63
Positive values: Moves the pan position to the left for lower notes and to the right for higher notes.
Negative values: Moves the pan position to the right for lower notes and to the left for higher notes.
Arpeggio
Common
Individual
Advanced
Motion Seq
Common
Lane
Mod / Control
Part LFO
Control Assign
Level/Key (Level Key Follow Sensitivity)
Determines the degree to which the notes (specifically, their position or octave range) affect the volume of
the selected Element. A Center Key setting of C3 is used as the basic setting.
Settings: -64 – +0 – +63
Positive values: Lowers the output level for lower notes and raises it for higher notes.
Negative values: Raises the output level for lower notes and lowers it for higher notes.
Receive SW
Element
Osc / Tune
Pitch EG
Filter
Center Key (Level Key Follow Sensitivity Center Key)
Type
This indicates that the central note for “Level/Key” above is C3. Keep in mind that this is for display
purposes only; the value cannot be changed.
Filter EG
Scale
Amplitude
Level / Pan
Amp EG
Scale
Element LFO
Element EQ
All Element
Osc
Balance
MONTAGE Reference Manual
109
Reference
Performance
Edit
Normal Part (AWM2)
Search
Drum Part
Utility
Normal Part (FM-X)
Live Set
Common/Audio
Normal Part (AWM2) Edit
Amp EG (Amplitude EG)
Common
From the Amplitude EG display you can make all the time and level settings for the Amplitude EG, which
determine how the volume of the sound changes over time. Using the AEG, you can control the transition
in volume from the moment the sound starts is to the moment the sound stops.
Part Settings
General
Pitch
Operation
[PERFORMANCE]  [EDIT]  Part selection  Element selection  [Amplitude]  [Amp EG]
Zone Settings
Zone Transmit
Effect
Routing
Ins A
Ins B
EQ
Arpeggio
Common
Individual
Advanced
Motion Seq
Common
Lane
Mod / Control
Part LFO
Control Assign
Receive SW
The full names of the available parameters are shown in the chart below, as they appear in the display.
Initial
–
Time
Level
Initial Level
Element
Osc / Tune
Attack
Decay1
Decay2
Release
Pitch EG
Attack Time
Decay1 Time
Decay2 Time
Release Time
Filter
Attack Level
Decay1 Level
Decay2 Level
–
Settings: Time: 0 – 127
Level: 0 – 127
Time/Key (AEG Time Key Follow Sensitivity)
Determines the degree to which the notes (specifically, their position or octave range) affect the Amplitude
EG Times. The Center Key parameter (below) is used as the basic amplitude for this parameter.
Settings: -64 – +63
Positive values: High notes result in a fast Amplitude EG transition speed while low notes result in a slow speed.
Negative values: High notes result in a slow Amplitude EG transition speed while low notes result in a fast speed.
0: The Amplitude EG transition speed does not change, regardless of the played note.
Type
Filter EG
Scale
Amplitude
Level / Pan
Amp EG
Scale
Element LFO
Element EQ
All Element
Center Key (AEG Time Key Follow Sensitivity Center Key)
Osc
Determines the central note for the “Time/Key” parameter above. When the Center Key note is played, the
AEG behaves according to its actual settings.
Balance
Settings: C-2 – G8
Release Adj (AEG Time Key Follow Sensitivity Center Key Release Adjustment)
Determines the sensitivity of AEG Time Key Follow Sensitivity to AEG Release. The lower the value, the
lower the sensitivity.
Settings: 0 – 127
127: Sets the AEG Time Key Follow Sensitivity to the value of Decay 1 or Decay 2.
0: Produces no effect in the AEG Time Key Follow Sensitivity.
MONTAGE Reference Manual
110
Reference
Performance
Edit
Normal Part (AWM2)
Search
Drum Part
Utility
Normal Part (FM-X)
Live Set
Common/Audio
Time/Vel (AEG Time Velocity Sensitivity)
Segment (AEG Time Velocity Sensitivity Segment)
Determines how the AEG transition time (speed) responds to Velocity, or the strength with which the key is
pressed. Select the “Segment,” and then set its “Time/Vel” parameter.
Settings: Time/Vel: -64 – +63
Positive values: High Velocities result in a fast AEG transition speed while low Velocities result in a slow speed.
Negative values: High Velocities result in a slow AEG transition speed while low Velocities result in a fast speed.
0: The amplitude transition speed does not change, regardless of the Velocity.
Settings: Segment: Attack, Atk+Dcy (Attack+Decay), Decay, Atk+Rls (Attack+Release), All
Attack: Time/Vel parameter affects Attack Time.
Atk+Dcy: Time/Vel Value affects Attack/Decay1 Time.
Decay: Time/Vel parameter affects Decay Time.
Atk+Rls: Time/Vel Value affects Attack/Release Time.
All: Time/Vel affects all AEG Time parameters.
Normal Part (AWM2) Edit
Common
Part Settings
General
Pitch
Zone Settings
Zone Transmit
Effect
Routing
Ins A
Ins B
EQ
Half Damper (Half Damper Switch)
When the Half Damper Switch is set to on, you can produce a “half-pedal” effect just as on a real acoustic
piano by using the optional FC3 Foot Controller connected to the FOOT SWITCH [SUSTAIN] jack on the
rear panel.
Settings: off, on
Time (Half Damper Time)
Determines how quickly the sound decays to silence after the key is released while holding down the Foot
Controller FC3 with the Half Damper Switch parameter turned on. This is not available when the Half
Damper Switch is set to off.
Settings: 0 – 127
NOTE For details on AEG, see the Synthesizer Parameter Manual PDF document.
Arpeggio
Common
Individual
Advanced
Motion Seq
Common
Lane
Mod / Control
Part LFO
Control Assign
Receive SW
Element
Osc / Tune
Pitch EG
Filter
Type
Filter EG
Scale
Amplitude
Level / Pan
Amp EG
Scale
Element LFO
Element EQ
All Element
Osc
Balance
MONTAGE Reference Manual
111
Reference
Performance
Edit
Normal Part (AWM2)
Search
Drum Part
Utility
Normal Part (FM-X)
Live Set
Common/Audio
Scale (Amplitude Scale)
From the Amplitude Scale display you can make Amplitude Scale settings for each Element.
Amplitude Scale function controls the Amplitude output level according to the positions of the notes on the
keyboard.
Normal Part (AWM2) Edit
Common
Part Settings
General
Pitch
Operation
[PERFORMANCE]  [EDIT]  Part selection  Element selection  [Amplitude]  [Scale]
Zone Settings
Zone Transmit
Effect
Routing
Ins A
Ins B
EQ
Arpeggio
Common
Individual
Advanced
Motion Seq
Common
Lane
Mod / Control
Part LFO
Control Assign
Receive SW
Element
Break Point 1 – 4
Determines the four Amplitude Scale Break Points by specifying their respective note numbers.
Settings: C -2 – G8
NOTE Break Points 1 to 4 will be automatically be arranged in ascending order across the keyboard.
Osc / Tune
Pitch EG
Filter
Type
Level Offset 1 – 4
Determines the offset value of the level of each Amplitude Scale Break Point.
Settings: -128 – +127
NOTE For details on setting examples of the Amplitude Scaling, see the Synthesizer Parameter Manual PDF
document.
Filter EG
Scale
Amplitude
Level / Pan
Amp EG
Scale
Element LFO
Element EQ
All Element
Osc
Balance
MONTAGE Reference Manual
112
Reference
Performance
Edit
Search
Normal Part (AWM2)
Drum Part
Utility
Normal Part (FM-X)
Live Set
Common/Audio
Normal Part (AWM2) Edit
Element LFO
Common
From the Element LFO display you can make LFO related setting for each Element.
The Low-Frequency Oscillator (LFO) unit of the Element generates a low frequency signal. The signal from
the LFO can be used to modulate the pitch, filter, and amplitude.
Operation
[PERFORMANCE]  [EDIT]  Part selection  Element selection  [Element LFO]
Part Settings
General
Pitch
Zone Settings
Zone Transmit
Effect
Routing
Ins A
Ins B
EQ
Arpeggio
Common
Individual
Advanced
Motion Seq
Common
Lane
Mod / Control
Part LFO
Control Assign
Receive SW
Element
LFO Wave
Osc / Tune
Selects the LFO waveform that is used to vary the sound.
Pitch EG
Settings: Saw, Triangle, Square
Filter
Saw (Sawtooth wave)
Triangle (Triangle wave)
Square (Square wave)
Type
Filter EG
Scale
Amplitude
Level / Pan
Speed (LFO Speed)
Adjusts the speed (frequency) of LFO variation. The larger the setting, the faster the speed.
Amp EG
Scale
Settings: 0 – 63
Element LFO
Key On Reset (LFO Key On Reset)
Element EQ
Determines whether or not the LFO is reset each time a note is played.
All Element
Settings: Off, On
Off
On
Osc
Balance
Time
Key on
Time
Key on
Delay (LFO Delay Time)
Determines the delay time between the moment that a Note On message is received and the moment the
LFO comes into effect.
Settings: 0 – 127
Fade In (LFO Fade In Time)
Determines the amount of time for the LFO effect to fade in (after the “Delay” time has elapsed).
Settings: 0 – 127
MONTAGE Reference Manual
113
Reference
Performance
Edit
Normal Part (AWM2)
Search
Drum Part
Utility
Normal Part (FM-X)
Live Set
Common/Audio
Pitch Mod (LFO Pitch Modulation Depth)
Determines the amount (depth) by which the LFO waveform varies (modulates) the pitch of the sound.
Settings: 0 – 127
Normal Part (AWM2) Edit
Common
Part Settings
Filter Mod (LFO Filter Modulation Depth)
General
Determines the amount (depth) by which the LFO waveform varies (modulates) the Filter Cutoff frequency.
Pitch
Settings: 0 – 127
Zone Settings
Amp Mod (LFO Amplitude Modulation Depth)
Zone Transmit
Determines the amount (depth) by which the LFO waveform varies (modulates) the amplitude or volume of
the sound.
Settings: 0 – 127
Effect
Routing
Ins A
Ins B
EQ
Element EQ
From the Element EQ display you can make EQ related settings for each Element.
Arpeggio
Common
Individual
Operation
[PERFORMANCE]  [EDIT]  Part selection  Element selection  [Element EQ]
Advanced
Motion Seq
Common
Lane
Mod / Control
Part LFO
Control Assign
Receive SW
Element
Osc / Tune
Pitch EG
Filter
Type
Filter EG
Scale
Amplitude
Level / Pan
Amp EG
Scale
EQ Type (Element EQ Type)
Element LFO
Determines the Equalizer Type.
Element EQ
Settings: 2-band, P.EQ (Parametric EQ), Boost6 (boost 6dB), Boost12 (boost 12dB), Boost18 (boost 18dB), Thru
2-band: This is a “shelving” equalizer, which combines separate high and low frequency bands.
P.EQ: The Parametric EQ is used to attenuate or boost signal levels (gain) around the Frequency.
Boost6, Boost12, Boost18: These can be used to boost the level of the entire signal by 6dB, 12dB and 18dB,
All Element
Osc
Balance
respectively
Thru: This setting bypasses the equalizers leaving the entire signal unaffected.
MONTAGE Reference Manual
114
Reference
Performance
Edit
Search
Normal Part (AWM2)
Drum Part
Utility
Normal Part (FM-X)
 When “EQ Type” is set to “2-band”
Common
Settings: 50.1Hz – 2.00kHz
Part Settings
High Freq
Settings: 139.7Hz – 12.9kHz
+
General
Pitch
Frequency
0
–
Common/Audio
Normal Part (AWM2) Edit
Low Freq
Gain
Live Set
Zone Settings
Zone Transmit
Effect
Low Gain
High Gain
Settings: -12dB – +12dB
Settings: -12dB – +12dB
Routing
Ins A
Ins B
EQ
Arpeggio
Common
Individual
Advanced
Motion Seq
Common
Lane
Mod / Control
Part LFO
Control Assign
Receive SW
Element
Osc / Tune
Pitch EG
Filter
EQ Low Gain (Element EQ Low Gain)
Type
Determines the level gain of the Low band.
Filter EG
Settings: -12dB – +12dB
EQ Hi Gain (Element EQ High Gain)
Scale
Amplitude
Determines the level gain of the High band.
Level / Pan
Settings: -12dB – +12dB
Amp EG
EQ Low Freq (Element EQ Low Frequency)
Scale
Determines the frequency for the Low band.
Element LFO
Settings: 50.1Hz – 2.00kHz
Element EQ
EQ Hi Freq (Element EQ High Frequency)
All Element
Determines the frequency for the High band.
Osc
Settings: 139.7Hz – 12.9kHz
Balance
MONTAGE Reference Manual
115
Reference
Performance
Edit
Search
Normal Part (AWM2)
Drum Part
Utility
Normal Part (FM-X)
 When “EQ Type” is set to “P.EQ”
Live Set
Common/Audio
Normal Part (AWM2) Edit
Common
Gain
Q
+
Part Settings
Settings: 0.7 – 10.3
Frequency
0
General
Pitch
Zone Settings
Gain
–
Settings: -12dB – +12dB
Freq
Settings: 139.7Hz – 12.9kHz
Zone Transmit
Effect
Routing
Ins A
Ins B
EQ
Arpeggio
Common
Individual
Advanced
Motion Seq
Common
Lane
Mod / Control
Part LFO
Control Assign
Receive SW
Element
Osc / Tune
Pitch EG
EQ Gain (Element EQ Gain)
Filter
Determines the level gain of the frequency set in “EQ Freq.”
Type
Settings: -12dB – +12dB
Filter EG
EQ Freq (Element EQ Frequency)
Determines the frequency to be attenuated/boosted.
Settings: 139.7Hz – 12.9kHz
Scale
Amplitude
Level / Pan
Amp EG
EQ Q (Element EQ Q)
This varies the signal level at the Frequency setting to create various frequency curve characteristics.
Settings: 0.7 – 10.3
NOTE For details on EQ structure, see the Synthesizer Parameter Manual PDF document.
Scale
Element LFO
Element EQ
All Element
Osc
Balance
MONTAGE Reference Manual
116
Reference
Performance
Edit
Normal Part (AWM2)
Search
Drum Part
Utility
Normal Part (FM-X)
Live Set
Common/Audio
Element All (All Element)
Normal Part (AWM2) Edit
Common
Part Settings
Osc (Oscillator)
From the Oscillator display you can set Oscillator-related parameters for the eight Elements.
General
Pitch
Zone Settings
Operation
[PERFORMANCE]  [EDIT]  Part selection  [All]  [Osc]
Zone Transmit
Effect
Routing
Ins A
Ins B
EQ
Arpeggio
Common
Individual
Advanced
Motion Seq
Common
Lane
Mod / Control
Part LFO
Control Assign
Receive SW
Element
Osc / Tune
SW (Element Switch)
Determines whether each Element is active or not.
Settings: Off, On
Pitch EG
Filter
Type
XA Control
Determines the functioning of the Expanded Articulation (XA) feature of an Element.
The XA feature is sophisticated tone generator system that allows you to more effectively recreate realistic
sound and natural performance techniques. It also provides other unique modes for random and alternate
sound changes as you play. For details on the XA feature, see the “Tone Generator Block” in the “Basic
Structure” on page 6.
Settings: Normal, Legato, Key Off, Cycle, Random, A.SW1 On (Assignable Switch 1 ON), A.SW2 On (Assignable Switch 2
ON), A.SW Off (Assignable Switch 1 OFF)
Normal: The Element sounds normally each time you play the note.
Legato: When the Mono/Poly parameter is set to Mono, this Element will be played in place of the one which is set to
“Normal” of the XA Control parameter when you play the keyboard in legato fashion (playing the next note of a
single-note line or melody before releasing the previous note).
Key Off: The Element will sound each time you release the note.
Cycle: Each Element sounds alternately according to its numerical order. In other words, playing the first note will
sound Element 1, the second note Element 2, and so on.
Filter EG
Scale
Amplitude
Level / Pan
Amp EG
Scale
Element LFO
Element EQ
All Element
Osc
Balance
Random: Each Element will sound randomly each time you play the note.
A.SW1 On: When the [ASSIGN 1] button is turned On, the Element will sound.
A.SW2 On: When the [ASSIGN 2] button is turned On, the Element will sound.
A.SW Off: When both of the [ASSIGN 1] and [ASSIGN 2] buttons are turned Off, the Element will sound.
Group (Element Group)
Determines the group for XA Control. All Elements that have the same type of XA features must have the
same group number. This setting does not apply when the XA Control parameters of all Elements are set to
Normal.
Settings: 1 – 8
Waveform (Waveform Name)
Indicates the Waveform Name for each Element.
Settings: See the Data List PDF document.
MONTAGE Reference Manual
117
Reference
Performance
Edit
Normal Part (AWM2)
Search
Drum Part
Utility
Normal Part (FM-X)
Velocity Limit
Determines the minimum and maximum values of the velocity range within which each Element will
respond. Each Element will only sound for notes played within its specified velocity range. If you first
specify the maximum value and then the minimum value, for example “93 to 34,” then the Velocity range
covers both “1 to 34” and “93 to 127.”
Live Set
Common/Audio
Normal Part (AWM2) Edit
Common
Part Settings
General
Settings: 1 – 127
Pitch
Note Limit
Zone Settings
Determines the lowest and highest notes of the keyboard range for each Element. Each Element will only
sound for notes played within its specified range. If you first specify the highest note and then the lowest
note, for example “C5 to C4,” then the note range covers both “C-2 to C4” and “C5 to G8.”
Zone Transmit
Settings: C -2 – G8
Effect
Routing
Ins A
Ins B
Balance
EQ
From the Balance display you can set parameters related to Level, Pitch, and Pan for the eight Elements.
Arpeggio
Common
Operation
[PERFORMANCE]  [EDIT]  Part selection  [All]  [Balance]
Individual
Advanced
Motion Seq
Common
Lane
Mod / Control
Part LFO
Control Assign
Receive SW
Element
Osc / Tune
Pitch EG
Filter
Type
Filter EG
Scale
Amplitude
Level / Pan
SW (Element Switch)
Determines whether each Element is active or not.
Amp EG
Scale
Settings: Off, On
Element LFO
Coarse (Coarse Tune)
Element EQ
Determines the pitch of each Element in semitones.
All Element
Settings: -48 – +48
Osc
Fine (Fine Tune)
Balance
Determines the fine tuning for the pitch of each Element.
Settings: -64 – 63
Cutoff (Cutoff Frequency)
Determines the Cutoff Frequency for each Element.
Settings: 0 – 255
Pan (Element Pan)
Determines the stereo pan position for each Element.
Settings: L63 (far left) – C (center) – R63 (far right)
Level
Determines the level of each Element.
Settings: 0 – 127
MONTAGE Reference Manual
118
Reference
Performance
Edit
Normal Part (AWM2)
Search
Drum Part
Utility
Normal Part (FM-X)
Live Set
Common/Audio
Drum Part Edit
Drum Part Edit
Common
Each Drum Part can consist of up to 73 Drum Keys, assigned to notes spread across the keyboard (C0 to
C6). There are two types of Drum Part Edit displays: Key Common Edit display, for editing the settings that
apply to all Drum keys; and Key Edit display, for editing individual keys. This section explains the
parameters for Key Common Edit and Key Edit.
Part Settings
General
Zone Settings
Zone Transmit
Key Common Edit (Common)
Effect
Routing
Ins A
Part Settings
Ins B
EQ
General
Operation
Arpeggio
Common
[PERFORMANCE]  [EDIT]  Part selection  ELEMENT/OPERATOR [COMMON] 
[Part Settings]  [General]
Individual
Advanced
Motion Seq
Common
Lane
Mod / Control
Control Assign
Receive SW
Key
Osc / Tune
Filter
Level / Pan
Element EQ
Part Category Main (Part Main Category)
Part Category Sub (Part Sub Category)
Determines the Main category and the Sub category for the selected Part.
Settings: See the Data List PDF document.
Part Name
Determines the Part name of the selected Part. Part names can contain up to 20 characters. Touching the
parameter calls up the input character display.
Volume (Part Volume)
Determines the output level of the selected Part.
Settings: 0 – 127
Pan
Determines the stereo pan position of the selected Part.
Settings: L63 – C – R63
Dry Level
Determines the dry sound level (not effect applied) of the selected Part. This is available only when “Part
Output” is set to “MainL&R” or “Drum.”
Settings: 0 – 127
MONTAGE Reference Manual
119
Reference
Performance
Edit
Normal Part (AWM2)
Search
Drum Part
Utility
Normal Part (FM-X)
Live Set
Common/Audio
Var Send (Variation Send)
Determines the level of the selected Part that is sent to the Variation effect. This is available only when “Part
Output” is set to “MainL&R” or “Drum.”
Settings: 0 – 127
Drum Part Edit
Common
Part Settings
General
Rev Send (Reverb Send)
Zone Settings
Determines the level of the selected Part that is sent to the Reverb effect. This is available only when “Part
Output” is set to “MainL&R” or “Drum.”
Zone Transmit
Settings: 0 – 127
Effect
Routing
Part Output (Part Output Select)
Ins A
Determines which audio output is used for the selected Part.
Settings: MainL&R, AsgnL&R, USB1&2…USB29&30, AsgnL, AsgnR, USB1 – 30, Off, Drum
MainL&R: Outputs in stereo (two channels) to the OUTPUT [L/MONO]/[R] jacks.
AsgnL&R: Outputs in stereo (two channels) to the ASSIGNABLE OUTPUT [L]/[R] jacks.
USB1&2…USB29&30: Outputs in stereo (Channels 1&2 – 29&30) to the [USB TO HOST] terminal.
AsgnL: Outputs in mono (one channel) to the ASSIGNABLE OUTPUT [L] jack.
AsgnR: Outputs in mono (one channel) to the ASSIGNABLE OUTPUT [R] jack.
USB1 – 30: Outputs in mono (Channels 1 – 30) to the [USB TO HOST] terminal.
Off: No audio signal for the Part is output.
Drum: “Drum Key Out” is displayed to determine the specific output for each Drum Key.
Ins B
EQ
Arpeggio
Common
Individual
Advanced
Motion Seq
Common
Lane
Note Shift
Determines the pitch (key transpose) setting for each Part in semitones.
Mod / Control
Settings: -24 – +0 – +24
Control Assign
Receive SW
Detune
Determines the pitch settings of the selected Part in 0.1 Hz increments.
Key
Settings: -12.8Hz – +0.0Hz – +12.7Hz
Osc / Tune
Pitch Bend / (Pitch Bend Range Upper/Lower)
Filter
Determines the maximum Pitch Bend Range in semitones.
Settings: -48 – +0 – +24
Level / Pan
Element EQ
Arp Play Only (Arpeggio Play Only)
Determines whether or not the current Part plays only the note events of the Arpeggio playback. When this
parameter is set to on, only the note events of the Arpeggio playback affect the tone generator block.
Settings: Off, On
Element Pan (Element Pan Switch)
Determines whether the individual pan settings for each Key Part (made via [EDIT]  Part selection 
Drum Key selection  [Level/Pan]  “Pan”) are applied or not. When this is set to “off,” the pan position
for the each Key is set to center in the Part.
Settings: Off, On
Velocity Limit
Determines the minimum and maximum values of the velocity range within which each Part will respond.
Settings: 1 – 127
Note Limit
Determines the lowest and highest notes of the keyboard range for each Part.
Settings: C -2 – G8
MONTAGE Reference Manual
120
Reference
Performance
Edit
Normal Part (AWM2)
Search
Drum Part
Utility
Normal Part (FM-X)
Live Set
Common/Audio
Drum Part Edit
Velocity Depth (Velocity Sensitivity Depth)
Determines the degree to which the resulting volume of the tone generator responds to your playing
strength. The higher the value, the more the volume changes in response to your playing strength (as
shown below).
Common
Part Settings
General
Settings: 0 – 127
When Offset (below) is set to 64:
Depth=127
127
Actual resulting
velocity
(affecting the
tone generator)
Zone Settings
Depth=64
Zone Transmit
Effect
Routing
Depth=32
Ins A
Ins B
Depth=0
EQ
0
127
Velocity with which you play a note
Arpeggio
Common
Velocity Offset (Velocity Sensitivity Offset)
Determines the amount by which played velocities are adjusted for the actual resulting velocity effect. This
lets you raise or lower all velocities based on this setting value—allowing you to automatically compensate
for playing too strongly or too softly.
Individual
Advanced
Motion Seq
Settings: 0 – 127
Common
When Depth (above) = 64
and Offset = 32
127
Actual
resulting
velocity
(affecting
the tone
generator)
0
When Depth (above) = 64
and Offset = 64
127
Actual
resulting
velocity
(affecting
the tone
generator)
64
127
Velocity with which you play a note
0
64
127
Velocity with which you play a note
When Depth (above) = 64
and Offset = 96
127
Actual
resulting
velocity
(affecting
the tone
generator)
0
64
127
Velocity with which you play a note
Lane
Mod / Control
Control Assign
Receive SW
Key
Osc / Tune
Filter
Level / Pan
Element EQ
Zone Settings
Same as the Element Common Edit parameters for Normal Parts (AWM2) (page 63).
Zone Transmit
Same as the Element Common Edit parameters for Normal Parts (AWM2) (page 65).
MONTAGE Reference Manual
121
Reference
Performance
Edit
Normal Part (AWM2)
Search
Drum Part
Utility
Normal Part (FM-X)
Live Set
Common/Audio
Drum Part Edit
Effect
Common
Part Settings
Routing
General
Zone Settings
Operation
[PERFORMANCE]  [EDIT]  Part selection  ELEMENT/OPERATOR [COMMON]  [Effect] 
[Routing]
Zone Transmit
Effect
Drum Key Connection Switch
Insertion FX Switch
Routing
Ins A
Ins B
EQ
Arpeggio
Common
Individual
Advanced
Motion Seq
Common
Lane
Mod / Control
Control Assign
Receive SW
Key
Osc / Tune
Filter
Level / Pan
Insertion FX Switch
Element EQ
Drum Key Connection Switch
Determines which Insertion Effect (A or B) is used to process each individual Drum Key, and which is
bypassed (Thru).
When the “Keyboard Select” is on, you can select Keys by playing the notes on the keyboard.
Settings: Thru, InsA (Insertion Effect A), InsB (Insertion Effect B)
Insertion FX Switch
Determines whether or not Insertion Effect A / Insertion Effect B is active or not.
Settings: Off, On
Category (Effect Category)
Type (Effect Type)
Determines the category and type for the selected effect.
Settings: For details on the editable Effect categories and types, see the Data List PDF document. Also, for details on the
description for each Effect type, see the Synthesizer Parameter Manual PDF document.
Preset
Allows you to call up pre-programmed settings for each Effect type, designed to be used for specific
applications and situations.
Settings: For a list of all Preset Performances, see the Data List PDF document.
Side Chain/Modulator (Side Chain/Modulator Part)
Determine the Part used for the Side Chain/Modulator. This is not available depending on the selected
Effect Type. For details on the Side Chain/Modulator, see the Routing display (page 67) of the Normal Part
(AWM2).
Settings: Part 1 – 16, A/D, Master, Off
Ins Connect (Insertion Connection Type)
Determines the effect routing for Insertion Effects A and B.
Settings: Parallel, Ins AB, Ins BA
MONTAGE Reference Manual
122
Reference
Performance
Edit
Normal Part (AWM2)
Search
Drum Part
Utility
Normal Part (FM-X)
RevSend (Reverb Send)
VarSend (Variation Send)
Determines the Send level of the signal sent from Insertion Effect A/B (or the bypassed signal) to the
Reverb/Variation effect. This is active only when the Part Output/Drum Key Output is set to “MainL&R.”
Live Set
Common/Audio
Drum Part Edit
Common
Part Settings
General
Settings: 0 – 127
Zone Settings
Part Output (Part Output Select)
Determines the specific output for the audio signal.
Settings: MainL&R, AsgnL&R, USB1&2…USB29&30, AsgnL, AsgnR, USB1 – 30, Off, Drum
MainL&R: Outputs in stereo (two channels) to the OUTPUT [L/MONO]/[R] jacks.
AsgnL&R: Outputs in stereo (two channels) to the ASSIGNABLE OUTPUT [L]/[R] jacks.
USB1&2…USB29&30: Outputs in stereo (Channels 1&2 – 29&30) to the [USB TO HOST] terminal.
AsgnL: Outputs in mono (one channel) to the ASSIGNABLE OUTPUT [L] jack.
AsgnR: Outputs in mono (one channel) to the ASSIGNABLE OUTPUT [R] jack.
USB1 – 30: Outputs in mono (Channels 1 – 30) to the [USB TO HOST] terminal.
Off: No audio signal for the Part is output.
Drum: “Drum Key Out” is displayed to determine the specific output for each Drum Key.
Zone Transmit
Effect
Routing
Ins A
Ins B
EQ
Arpeggio
Common
Individual
Advanced
Envelope Follower
Calls up the Envelope Follower Setting display.
Refer to the Routing display (page 68) for Normal Parts (AWM2).
Motion Seq
Common
Lane
Mod / Control
Control Assign
Receive SW
Key
Osc / Tune
Filter
Level / Pan
Element EQ
InsRev (Insertion Reverb Send)
InsVar (Insertion Variation Send)
Determines the Send level for the entire Drum Part (all keys), sent from Insertion Effect A/B to the Reverb/
Variation effect.
This is active only when the Drum Key Connection Switch is set to “InsA” or “InsB” and the Part Output/
Drum Key Output is set to “MainL&R.”
Settings: 0 – 127
MONTAGE Reference Manual
123
Reference
Performance
Edit
Normal Part (AWM2)
Search
Drum Part
Utility
Normal Part (FM-X)
Live Set
Common/Audio
Drum Part Edit
Common
Part Settings
General
Zone Settings
Zone Transmit
Effect
Routing
Ins A
Ins B
EQ
Arpeggio
Common
Individual
Advanced
Motion Seq
Common
KeyRev (Drum Key Reverb Send)
KeyVar (Drum Key Variation Send)
Determines the Send level for each Drum Key, sent from Insertion Effect A/B to the Reverb/Variation effect.
This is active only when the Drum Key Connection Switch is set to “Thru” and the Part Output/Drum Key
Output is set to “MainL&R.”
Settings: 0 – 127
Lane
Mod / Control
Control Assign
Receive SW
Key
Osc / Tune
Filter
Level / Pan
Element EQ
Drum Key Out (Drum Key Output Select)
Determines the specific output for the individual Drum Key.
This is displayed only when the Part Output is set to “Drum.”
Settings: MainL&R, AsgnL&R, USB1&2…USB29&30, AsgnL, AsgnR, USB1 – 30
MainL&R: Outputs in stereo (two channels) to the OUTPUT [L/MONO]/[R] jacks.
AsgnL&R: Outputs in stereo (two channels) to the ASSIGNABLE OUTPUT [L]/[R] jacks.
USB1&2…USB29&30: Outputs in stereo (Channels 1&2 – 29&30) to the [USB TO HOST] terminal.
AsgnL: Outputs in mono (one channel) to the ASSIGNABLE OUTPUT [L] jack.
AsgnR: Outputs in mono (one channel) to the ASSIGNABLE OUTPUT [R] jack.
USB1 – 30: Outputs in mono (Channels 1 – 30) to the [USB TO HOST] terminal.
NOTE When the Drum Key Connection Switch is set to “InsA” or “InsB,” this parameter is fixed to “MainL&R.”
MONTAGE Reference Manual
124
Reference
Performance
Edit
Normal Part (AWM2)
Search
Drum Part
Utility
Normal Part (FM-X)
Live Set
Common/Audio
Ins A (Insertion Effect A)
Ins B (Insertion Effect B)
Drum Part Edit
Common
Part Settings
Same as the Element Common Edit parameters for Normal Parts (AWM2) (page 69).
General
Zone Settings
EQ (Part Equalizer)
Same as the Element Common Edit parameters for Normal Parts (AWM2) (page 70).
Zone Transmit
Effect
Routing
Ins A
Ins B
Arpeggio
EQ
Arpeggio
Common
Common
Individual
Same as the Element Common Edit parameters for Normal Parts (AWM2) (page 73).
Advanced
Individual
Motion Seq
Common
Same as the Element Common Edit parameters for Normal Parts (AWM2) (page 76).
Advanced
Lane
Mod / Control
Control Assign
Same as the Element Common Edit parameters for Normal Parts (AWM2) (page 77), except for the
additional parameter below.
Receive SW
Key
Fixed SD/BD
Osc / Tune
When this parameter is set to On, C1 will be used as the note of the Bass Drum and D1 will be used as the
note of the Snare Drum in Arpeggio playback.
Filter
Settings: Off, On
Level / Pan
Element EQ
Motion Seq (Motion Sequencer)
Common
Same as the Element Common Edit parameters for Normal Parts (AWM2) (page 78).
Lane
Same as the Element Common Edit parameters for Normal Parts (AWM2) (page 81).
Mod/Control (Modulation/Control)
Control Assign
Same as the Element Common Edit parameters for Normal Parts (AWM2) (page 89), except for the
different setting values in the Destination parameter. For the setting value for “Destination,” see the “Control
List” in the Data List PDF document.
Receive SW (Receive Switch)
Same as the Element Common Edit parameters for Normal Parts (AWM2) (page 92).
MONTAGE Reference Manual
125
Reference
Performance
Edit
Normal Part (AWM2)
Search
Drum Part
Utility
Normal Part (FM-X)
Live Set
Common/Audio
Key Edit (Key)
Drum Part Edit
Common
Part Settings
Osc/Tune (Oscillator/Tune)
General
Zone Settings
From the Oscillator/Tune display you can set Oscillator-related parameters for each Key of the Drum Part.
Zone Transmit
Operation
[PERFORMANCE]  [EDIT]  Part selection  Key selection  [Osc/Tune]
Effect
Routing
Drum Key Switch
Ins A
Ins B
EQ
Arpeggio
Common
Individual
Advanced
Motion Seq
Common
Lane
Mod / Control
Control Assign
Receive SW
Key
Osc / Tune
Filter
Level / Pan
Element EQ
Bank (Waveform Bank)
Number (Waveform Number)
Category (Waveform Category)
Sub Category (Waveform Sub Category)
Name (Waveform Name)
Indicates the information of the waveform used for the selected Drum Key. “Bank” indicates which
waveform location (Preset, User and Library) is assigned to the Key.
Settings: Refer to the Data List PDF document.
Drum Key Switch
Determines whether the currently selected Drum Key is used or not.
Settings: Off, On
Assign Mode (Key Assign Mode)
Determines the playing method when the same notes are received continuously, and without
corresponding note off messages.
Settings: Single, Multi
Single: Double or repeated playback of the same note is not possible. The first note will be stopped, then the next
note will be sounded.
Multi: All notes are sounded simultaneously. This allows playback of the same note when it is played multiple times
in succession (especially for tambourine and cymbal sounds that you would want to ring out to their full decay).
Connect (Drum Key Connection Switch)
Determines which Insertion Effect (A or B) is used to process each individual Drum Key. The Insertion
Effect is bypassed if “Thru” is selected. This parameter is same as the “Connect” parameter in the
“Routing” display of Effect settings in Key Common Edit. Making a setting here automatically changes the
setting of that parameter as well.
Settings: Thru, InsA (Insertion Effect A), InsB (Insertion Effect B)
MONTAGE Reference Manual
126
Reference
Performance
Edit
Normal Part (AWM2)
Search
Drum Part
Utility
Normal Part (FM-X)
New Waveform
Loads Audio data stored in the USB flash memory as “Waveform.” For details on loading, see “Load”
(page 174).
After the Waveform is loaded, the Edit Waveform parameter will be available. For details on “Edit
Waveform,” see page 96.
Live Set
Common/Audio
Drum Part Edit
Common
Part Settings
General
Zone Settings
Coarse (Coarse Tune)
Zone Transmit
Determines the pitch of each Drum Key Wave in semitones.
Settings: -48 – +48
Effect
Routing
Fine (Fine Tune)
Ins A
Determines the fine tuning for the pitch of each Drum Key Wave.
Ins B
Settings: -64 – 63
EQ
Pitch/Vel (Pitch Velocity Sensitivity)
Arpeggio
Determines how the pitch of the selected Drum key responds to velocity.
Settings: -64 – 63
Positive values: The harder you play the keyboard, the more the pitch rises.
Negative values: The harder you play the keyboard, the more the pitch falls.
0: No change in pitch.
Common
Individual
Advanced
Motion Seq
Common
Rcv Note Off (Receive Note Off)
Lane
Select whether MIDI Note Off messages are received by each Drum Key.
Settings: off, on
Mod / Control
Control Assign
Group (Alternate Group)
Set the Alternate Group to which the key is assigned. The Parts to which the same number is assigned
here cannot sound simultaneously. This setting helps to reproduce the sounds of a real drum kit, in which
some drum sounds cannot physically be played simultaneously, such as open and closed hi-hats.
Settings: off, 1 – 127
KeyRev (Drum Key Reverb Send)
KeyVar (Drum Key Variation Send)
Receive SW
Key
Osc / Tune
Filter
Level / Pan
Element EQ
Determines the level of the Drum key sound (the bypassed signal) that is sent to Reverb/Variation effect.
This is not available depending on the setting of the Drum Key Connection Switch.
Settings: 0 – 127
Drum Key Out (Drum Key Output Select)
Determines the specific output for the individual Drum Key.
This is not available depending on the settings of Drum Key Connection Switch or Part Output.
Settings: MainL&R, AsgnL&R, USB1&2…USB29&30, AsgnL, AsgnR, USB1 – 30
MainL&R: Outputs in stereo (two channels) to the OUTPUT [L/MONO]/[R] jacks.
AsgnL&R: Outputs in stereo (two channels) to the ASSIGNABLE OUTPUT [L]/[R] jacks.
USB1&2…USB29&30: Outputs in stereo (Channels 1&2 – 29&30) to the [USB TO HOST] terminal.
AsgnL: Outputs in mono (one channel) to the ASSIGNABLE OUTPUT [L] jack.
AsgnR: Outputs in mono (one channel) to the ASSIGNABLE OUTPUT [R] jack.
USB1 – 30: Outputs in mono (Channels 1 – 30) to the [USB TO HOST] terminal.
Keyboard Select (Keyboard Select Switch)
Determines whether or not the Keyboard Select setting is active or not. When this is set to on, you can
select Drum Keys by playing the notes on the keyboard.
Settings: Off, On
Drum Key
Indicates the selected Drum key.
Settings: C0 – C6
MONTAGE Reference Manual
127
Reference
Performance
Edit
Normal Part (AWM2)
Search
Drum Part
Utility
Normal Part (FM-X)
Live Set
Common/Audio
Drum Part Edit
Filter
Common
From the Filter display you can apply filter settings to the Drum Part. These let you apply a low pass filter
and high pass filter to each individual Drum key.
Operation
Part Settings
General
Zone Settings
[PERFORMANCE]  [EDIT]  Part selection  Key selection  [Filter]
Zone Transmit
Effect
Routing
Ins A
Ins B
EQ
Arpeggio
Common
Individual
Advanced
Motion Seq
Common
Lane
Mod / Control
Control Assign
Receive SW
Key
Osc / Tune
Cutoff (Low Pass Filter Cutoff Frequency)
Filter
Use this parameter to set the cutoff frequency for the low-pass filter.
Level / Pan
Settings: 0 – 255
Element EQ
Cutoff/Vel (Low Pass Filter Cutoff Velocity Sensitivity)
Set the velocity sensitivity of the Low Pass Filter Cutoff frequency. Positive settings will cause the Cutoff
Frequency to rise the harder you play the keyboard. A negative setting will have the opposite effect.
Settings: -64 – +63
Resonance (Low Pass Filter Resonance)
Determines the amount of Resonance (harmonic emphasis) applied to the signal at the Cutoff Frequency.
Settings: 0 – 127
HPF Cutoff (High Pass Filter Cutoff Frequency)
Determines the Cutoff frequency of the High Pass Filter.
Settings: 0 – 255
MONTAGE Reference Manual
128
Reference
Performance
Edit
Search
Normal Part (AWM2)
Drum Part
Utility
Normal Part (FM-X)
Live Set
Common/Audio
Drum Part Edit
Level/Pan
Common
Part Settings
From the Level/Pan display you can make Level and Pan settings for each Drum Key.
General
[PERFORMANCE]  [EDIT]  Part selection  Key selection  [Level/Pan]
Operation
Zone Settings
Zone Transmit
Effect
Routing
Ins A
Ins B
EQ
Arpeggio
Common
Individual
Advanced
Motion Seq
Common
Lane
Mod / Control
Control Assign
Receive SW
Key
The full names of the available parameters are shown in the chart below, as they appear in the display.
Osc / Tune
Filter
Time
Attack
Decay1
Decay2
Level / Pan
Attack Time
Decay1 Time
Decay2 Time
Element EQ
Level
–
–
Decay1 Level
Settings: Time: 0 – 127, Hold (only for Decay2)
Level: 0 – 127
Decay2 Time = 0 – 126
Level
Decay2 Time = Hold
Attack level
Level
Attack level
Decay1 level
Attach
time
Key on
Decay1
time
Decay2
time
Decay1 level
Time
Attach
time
Key on
Decay1
time
Decay2
time
Time
Level
Determines the output level of the Drum Key. This lets you make detailed balance adjustments among the
various sounds of the Drum Key.
Settings: 0 – 127
Level/Vel (Level Velocity Sensitivity)
Determines how the output level of the Drum Key responds to Velocity.
Settings: -64 – +63
Positive values: The more strongly you play the keyboard, the more the output rises.
Negative values: The more softly you play the keyboard, the more the output rises.
0: The output level does not change.
Pan
Sets the pan position (stereo position) of each Drum Key. This will also be used as the basic Pan position
for the Alternate and Random settings.
Settings: L63 (far left) – C (center) – R63 (far right)
MONTAGE Reference Manual
129
Reference
Performance
Edit
Normal Part (AWM2)
Search
Drum Part
Utility
Normal Part (FM-X)
Live Set
Common/Audio
Alternate Pan
Determines the amount by which the sound of the selected Drum key is panned alternately left and right
for each note you press. The Pan setting (above) is used as the basic Pan position.
Settings: L64 – C – R63
Drum Part Edit
Common
Part Settings
General
Random Pan
Zone Settings
Determines the amount by which the sound of the selected Drum Key is panned randomly left and right for
each note you press. The Pan setting (above) is used as the Center Pan position.
Zone Transmit
Settings: 0 – 127
Effect
Routing
Ins A
Ins B
Element EQ
Same as the Element Edit parameters for Normal Parts (AWM2) (page 114).
EQ
Arpeggio
Common
Individual
Advanced
Motion Seq
Common
Lane
Mod / Control
Control Assign
Receive SW
Key
Osc / Tune
Filter
Level / Pan
Element EQ
MONTAGE Reference Manual
130
Reference
Performance
Edit
Normal Part (AWM2)
Search
Drum Part
Utility
Normal Part (FM-X)
Live Set
Common/Audio
Normal Part (FM-X) Edit
Normal Part (FM-X) Edit
Common
A Normal Part (FM-X) can consist of up to eight Operators. There are two types of Normal Part (FM-X) Edit
displays: Operator Common Edit display, for editing settings common to all eight Operators; and Operator
Edit display, for editing individual Operators.
Part Settings
General
Algorithm
Operator Common Edit (Common)
Part Settings
Zone Settings
Zone Transmit
Pitch / Filter
Pitch
PEG/Scale
General
Filter Type
From the General display you can set various parameters such as Part Name, Volume, and Pan.
Filter EG
Filter Scale
Operation
[PERFORMANCE]  [EDIT]  Part selection  ELEMENT/OPERATOR [COMMON] 
[Part Settings]  [General]
Effect
Routing
Ins A
Ins B
EQ
Arpeggio
Common
Individual
Advanced
Motion Seq
Common
Lane
Mod / Control
Part LFO
2nd LFO
Control Assign
Receive SW
Operator
Form / Freq
Most parameters are the same as parameters on the Element Common Edit display for Normal Parts
(AWM2) (page 58) except the following additional parameters as bellows.
Level
Random Pan
Determines the amount by which the sound of the selected Operator is panned randomly left and right for
each note you press. The Pan setting is used as the Center Pan position.
Settings: 0 – 127
Alternate Pan
Determines the amount by which the sound of the selected Operator is panned alternately left and right for
each note you press. The Pan setting is used as the basic Pan position.
Settings: L64 – C – R63
Scaling Pan
Determines the degree to which the notes (specifically, their position or octave range) affect the Pan
position, left and right, of the selected Operator. At note C3, the main Pan setting is used for the basic Pan
position. Positive settings will cause the Pan position to be set left when you play in the lower range on the
keyboard and to be set right when you play in the higher range on the keyboard. A negative setting will
have the opposite effect.
Settings: -64 – +0 – +63
MONTAGE Reference Manual
131
Reference
Performance
Edit
Normal Part (AWM2)
Search
Drum Part
Utility
Normal Part (FM-X)
Live Set
Common/Audio
KeyOnDly Sync (Key On Delay Tempo Sync Switch)
Determines whether or not “Key On Delay Time Length” is synchronized to the tempo.
Settings: Off, On
Normal Part (FM-X) Edit
Common
Part Settings
Delay Length (Key On Delay Time Length)
General
Determines the time (or elapsed delay) between the moment you press a note on the keyboard and the
point at which the sound is actually played. You can set different delay times for each Operator. This is not
available when “KeyOnDly Sync” is set to on.
Algorithm
Settings: 0 – 127
Zone Transmit
Zone Settings
Pitch / Filter
Delay Length (Key On Delay Note Length)
Determines the timing of “Key On Delay” when “KeyOnDly Sync” is set to on.
Settings: 1/16, 1/8 Tri. (eighth-note triplets), 1/16 Dot. (dotted sixteenth notes), 1/8, 1/4 Tri. (quarter-note triplets), 1/8 Dot.
(dotted eighth notes), 1/4, 1/2 Tri. (half-note triplets), 1/4 Dot. (dotted quarter notes), 1/2, Whole Tri. (whole-note
triplets), 1/2 Dot. (dotted half notes), 1/4 x 4 (quarter-note quadruplets; four quarter notes to the beat), 1/4 x 5
(quarter-note quintuplets; five quarter notes to the beat), 1/4 x 6 (quarter-note sextuplets; six quarter notes to the
beat), 1/4 x 7 (quarter-note septuplets; seven quarter notes to the beat), 1/4 x 8 (quarter-note octuplets; eight quarter
notes to the beat)
Pitch
PEG/Scale
Filter Type
Filter EG
Filter Scale
Effect
Routing
Ins A
Algorithm
Ins B
From the Algorithm display you can specify the Algorithm, which determines the arrangement of the
Operators and how the FM sound is generated.
Operation
[PERFORMANCE]  [EDIT]  Part selection  ELEMENT/OPERATOR [COMMON] 
[Part Settings]  [Algorithm]
EQ
Arpeggio
Common
Individual
Advanced
Motion Seq
Common
Lane
Mod / Control
Part LFO
2nd LFO
Control Assign
Receive SW
Operator
Form / Freq
Level
Algorithm (Algorithm Number)
Changes Algorithms.
Settings: See the Data List PDF document.
Feedback (Feedback Level)
Waveforms can be changed by feeding some of the signal generated by an operator back through that
operator. This allows you to set the feedback level.
Settings: 0 – 7
MONTAGE Reference Manual
132
Reference
Performance
Edit
Normal Part (AWM2)
Search
Drum Part
Utility
Normal Part (FM-X)
Live Set
Common/Audio
Normal Part (FM-X) Edit
Algorithm Search
Calls up the Algorithm Search display. From this display you can search for desired Algorithms by filtering
the number of Carriers, or the maximum length of the serial connection of Operators.
Algorithm list
Common
Part Settings
General
Algorithm
Zone Settings
Zone Transmit
Pitch / Filter
Pitch
PEG/Scale
Filter Type
Filter EG
Filter Scale
Effect
Routing
Ins A
Ins B
EQ
Arpeggio
Common
Individual
Chain
Filters the Algorithms by the maximum length of serial connection of Operators.
Settings: 1 – 8
Advanced
Motion Seq
Common
Carrier
Filters the Algorithms by the number of Carriers.
Settings: 1 – 8
Lane
Mod / Control
Part LFO
2nd LFO
Zone Settings
Control Assign
Receive SW
Same as the Element Common Edit parameters for Normal Parts (AWM2) (page 63).
Operator
Form / Freq
Zone Transmit
Level
Same as the Element Common Edit parameters for Normal Parts (AWM2) (page 65).
MONTAGE Reference Manual
133
Reference
Performance
Edit
Normal Part (AWM2)
Search
Drum Part
Utility
Normal Part (FM-X)
Live Set
Common/Audio
Normal Part (FM-X) Edit
Pitch/Filter
Common
Part Settings
Pitch
General
Same as the Element Common Edit parameters for Normal Parts (AWM2) (page 60), except that the
Legato Slope parameter is not available.
Algorithm
Zone Settings
Zone Transmit
Pitch / Filter
PEG/Scale (Pitch EG/Scale)
Pitch
From the Pitch EG/Scale display you can make all time and level settings for the Pitch EG, which determine
how the pitch of the sound changes over time, and the Scale for Parts.
Operation
[PERFORMANCE]  [EDIT]  Part selection  ELEMENT/OPERATOR [COMMON] 
[Pitch/Filter]  [PEG/Scale]
PEG/Scale
Filter Type
Filter EG
Filter Scale
Effect
Routing
Ins A
Ins B
EQ
Arpeggio
Common
Individual
Advanced
Motion Seq
Common
Lane
Mod / Control
Part LFO
2nd LFO
Control Assign
Receive SW
The full names of the available parameters are shown in the chart below, as they appear in the display.
Operator
Form / Freq
Initial
Attack
Decay1
Decay2
Release
Time
–
Attack Time
Decay1 Time
Decay2 Time
Release Time
Level
Hold Level
Attack Level
Decay1 Level
Decay2 Level
Release Level
Level
Settings: Time: 0 – 99
Level: -50 – +50
PEG Depth
Determines the pitch range for Pitch EG.
Settings: 8 oct, 2 oct, 1 oct, 0.5 oct
Depth/Vel (PEG Depth Velocity Sensitivity)
Determines how the pitch range will be generated according to the Velocity (strength) with which you play
notes on the keyboard.
Settings: 0 – 7
Time/Key (PEG Time Key Follow Sensitivity)
Determines the degree to which the notes (specifically, their position or octave range) affect the Pitch EG
Times. The Center Key (C3) is used as the basic pitch for this parameter.
Settings: 0 – 7
Positive values: High notes result in a high PEG transition speed while low notes result in a slow speed.
0: The PEG transition speed does not change, regardless of the played note.
MONTAGE Reference Manual
134
Reference
Performance
Edit
Normal Part (AWM2)
Search
Drum Part
Utility
Normal Part (FM-X)
Live Set
Common/Audio
Pitch/Key (Pitch Key Follow Sensitivity)
Determines the sensitivity of the Key Follow effect (the pitch interval of adjacent notes), assuming the pitch
of the Center Key (below) as standard.
Settings: -200% – +0% – +200%
+100% (the normal setting): Adjacent notes are pitched one semitone apart.
0%: All notes have the same pitch as the Center Key.
Negative values: The settings are reversed.
Center Key (Pitch Key Follow Sensitivity Center Key)
Determines the central note or pitch for the Key Follow effect on pitch.
Normal Part (FM-X) Edit
Common
Part Settings
General
Algorithm
Zone Settings
Zone Transmit
Pitch / Filter
Settings: C -2 – G8
Pitch
Pitch/Vel (Pitch Velocity Sensitivity)
PEG/Scale
Determines how the pitch responds to velocity.
Filter Type
Settings: -64 – 63
Positive values: The harder you play the keyboard, the more the pitch rises.
Negative values: The harder you play the keyboard, the more the pitch falls.
0: No change in pitch.
Filter EG
Filter Scale
Effect
Routing
Random Pitch (Random Pitch Depth)
Allows you to randomly vary the pitch for each note played.
Settings: 0 – 127
NOTE For details on PEG, see the Synthesizer Parameter Manual PDF document.
Ins A
Ins B
EQ
Arpeggio
Common
Filter Type
Individual
Advanced
Same as the Element Edit parameters for Normal Parts (AWM2) (page 100).
Motion Seq
Common
Filter EG
Same as the Element Edit parameters for Normal Parts (AWM2) (page 105).
Lane
Mod / Control
Part LFO
2nd LFO
Filter Scale
Same as the Element Edit parameters for Normal Parts (AWM2) (page 107).
Control Assign
Receive SW
Operator
Form / Freq
Level
MONTAGE Reference Manual
135
Reference
Performance
Edit
Normal Part (AWM2)
Search
Drum Part
Utility
Normal Part (FM-X)
Live Set
Common/Audio
Normal Part (FM-X) Edit
Effect
Common
Part Settings
Routing
General
From the Routing display you can determine the Effect connections for Parts.
Algorithm
Zone Settings
Operation
[PERFORMANCE]  [EDIT]  Part selection  ELEMENT/OPERATOR [COMMON]  [Effect] 
[Routing]
Zone Transmit
Pitch / Filter
Insertion FX Switch
Pitch
PEG/Scale
Filter Type
Filter EG
Filter Scale
Effect
Routing
Ins A
Ins B
EQ
Arpeggio
Common
Individual
Advanced
Motion Seq
Common
Lane
Mod / Control
Insertion FX Switch
Part LFO
Insertion FX Switch
2nd LFO
Determines whether the Insertion Effect A/B is active or not.
Control Assign
Settings: Off, On
Receive SW
Category (Effect Category)
Type (Effect Type)
Determines the category and type for the selected Effect.
Operator
Form / Freq
Level
Settings: For details on the editable Effect categories and types, see the Data List PDF document. Also, for details on the
description for each Effect type, see the Synthesizer Parameter Manual PDF document.
Preset
Allows you to call up pre-programmed settings for each Effect type, designed to be used for specific
applications and situations.
Settings: For a list of all Preset Effects, see the Data List PDF document.
Side Chain/Modulator (Side Chain/Modulator Part)
Determines the Part used for the Side Chain/Modulator. This is not active depending on Effect Types.
For details on the Side Chain/Modulator, see the Routing display (page 67) of the Normal Part (AWM2).
Settings: Part 1 – 16, A/D, Master, Off
Ins Connect (Insertion Connection Type)
Determines the effect routing for Insertion Effects A and B. The setting changes are shown on the diagram
in the display, giving you a clear picture of how the signal is routed. For details, see the section “Effect
connection” (page 19) of the “Basic Structure.”
Settings: Parallel, Ins AB, Ins BA
Rev Send (Reverb Send)
Determines the Send level of the signal sent from Insertion Effect A/B to the Reverb effect.
Settings: 0 – 127
MONTAGE Reference Manual
136
Reference
Performance
Edit
Normal Part (AWM2)
Search
Drum Part
Utility
Normal Part (FM-X)
Var Send (Variation Send)
Determines the Send level of the signal sent from Insertion Effect A/B to the Variation effect.
Settings: 0 – 127
Live Set
Common/Audio
Normal Part (FM-X) Edit
Common
Part Settings
Part Output (Part Output Select)
General
Determines the specific audio output.
Algorithm
Settings: MainL&R, AsgnL&R, USB Stereo, AsgnL, AsgnR, USB1 – 30, Off
MainL&R: Outputs in stereo (two channels) to the OUTPUT [L/MONO]/[R] jacks.
AsgnL&R: Outputs in stereo (two channels) to the ASSIGNABLE OUTPUT [L]/[R] jacks.
USB1&2…USB29&30: Outputs in stereo (Channels 1&2 – 29&30) to the [USB TO HOST] terminal.
AsgnL: Outputs in mono (one channel) to the ASSIGNABLE OUTPUT [L] jack.
AsgnR: Outputs in mono (one channel) to the ASSIGNABLE OUTPUT [R] jack.
USB1 – 30: Outputs in mono (Channels 1 – 30) to the [USB TO HOST] terminal.
Off: No audio signal for the Part is output.
Zone Settings
Zone Transmit
Pitch / Filter
Pitch
PEG/Scale
Filter Type
Filter EG
Filter Scale
Ins A (Insertion Effect A)
Ins B (Insertion Effect B)
Same as the Element Common Edit parameters for Normal Parts (AWM2) (page 69).
Effect
Routing
Ins A
Ins B
EQ
EQ (Part Equalizer)
Same as the Element Common Edit parameters for Normal Parts (AWM2) (page 70).
Arpeggio
Common
Individual
Advanced
Arpeggio
Motion Seq
Common
Lane
Common
Same as the Element Common Edit parameters for Normal Parts (AWM2) (page 73).
Mod / Control
Part LFO
2nd LFO
Control Assign
Individual
Same as the Element Common Edit parameters for Normal Parts (AWM2) (page 76).
Receive SW
Operator
Form / Freq
Level
Advanced
Same as the Element Common Edit parameters for Normal Parts (AWM2) (page 77).
Motion Seq (Motion Sequencer)
Common
Same as the Element Common Edit parameters for Normal Parts (AWM2) (page 78).
Lane
Same as the Element Common Edit parameters for Normal Parts (AWM2) (page 81).
MONTAGE Reference Manual
137
Reference
Performance
Edit
Search
Normal Part (AWM2)
Drum Part
Utility
Normal Part (FM-X)
Live Set
Common/Audio
Normal Part (FM-X) Edit
Mod/Control (Modulation/Control)
Common
Part Settings
Part LFO
General
Same as the Element Common Edit parameters for Normal Parts (AWM2) (page 85), except that the
setting values of the Destination parameter differ and that “Element Phase Offset (LFO Element Phase
Offset)” is not available. For details on the setting values, see the Data List PDF document.
Algorithm
Zone Settings
Zone Transmit
Pitch / Filter
Pitch
2nd LFO
PEG/Scale
Operation
[PERFORMANCE]  [EDIT]  Part selection  ELEMENT/OPERATOR [COMMON] 
[Mod/Control]  [2nd LFO]
Pitch Modulation Operator Depth Ratio
(2nd LFO Pitch Modulation Operator Depth Ratio)
Filter Type
Filter EG
Filter Scale
Effect
Routing
Ins A
Ins B
EQ
Arpeggio
Common
Individual
Advanced
Motion Seq
Common
Lane
Mod / Control
Part LFO
2nd LFO
Control Assign
Receive SW
Operator
Amplitude Modulation Operator Depth Ratio
(2nd LFO Amplitude Modulation Operator Depth Ratio)
Form / Freq
Level
LFO Wave (2nd LFO Waveform)
Selects the 2nd LFO waveform.
Settings: Triangle, Saw Down, Saw Up, Square, Sine, S/H
NOTE When “Sine” is selected, two waves will be shown in the diagram on the display because of the phase shift of
the Amplitude Modulation wave.
Key On Reset (2nd LFO Key On Reset)
Determines whether or not the 2nd LFO is reset each time a note is pressed.
Settings: Off, On
Speed (2nd LFO Speed)
Adjusts the speed (frequency) of the 2nd LFO variation.
Settings: 0 – 99
Phase (2nd LFO Phase)
Determines the starting phase point for the 2nd LFO Wave when it is reset.
Settings: 0°, 90°, 180°, 270°
Delay (2nd LFO Delay Time)
Determines the delay time between the moment you press a key on the keyboard and the moment the 2nd
LFO comes into effect.
Settings: 0 – 99
MONTAGE Reference Manual
138
Reference
Performance
Edit
Normal Part (AWM2)
Search
Drum Part
Utility
Normal Part (FM-X)
Live Set
Common/Audio
Pitch Modulation (2nd LFO Pitch Modulation Depth)
Determines the amount (depth) by which the 2nd LFO waveform varies (modulates) the pitch of the sound.
Settings: 0 – 99
Normal Part (FM-X) Edit
Common
Part Settings
Amplitude Modulation (2nd LFO Amplitude Modulation Depth)
General
Determines the amount (depth) by which the 2nd LFO waveform varies (modulates) the amplitude or
volume of the sound.
Algorithm
Settings: 0 – 99
Zone Settings
Zone Transmit
Filter Modulation (2nd LFO Filter Modulation Depth)
Determines the amount (depth) by which the 2nd LFO waveform varies (modulates) the Filter Cutoff
frequency.
Settings: 0 – 99
Pitch / Filter
Pitch
PEG/Scale
Filter Type
Pitch Modulation Operator Depth Ratio
(2nd LFO Pitch Modulation Operator Depth Ratio)
Adjusts the amount (depth) which is determined in the “2nd LFO Pitch Modulation Depth” for each
Operator.
Filter EG
Filter Scale
Effect
Routing
Settings: 0 – 7
Amplitude Modulation Operator Depth Ratio
(2nd LFO Amplitude Modulation Operator Depth Ratio)
Adjusts the amount (depth) which is determined in the “2nd LFO Amplitude Modulation Depth” for each
Operator.
Settings: 0 – 7
Ins A
Ins B
EQ
Arpeggio
Common
Individual
Control Assign
Advanced
Motion Seq
Operation
[PERFORMANCE]  [EDIT]  Part selection  ELEMENT/OPERATOR [COMMON] 
[Mod/Control]  [Control Assign]
Common
Lane
Mod / Control
Part LFO
2nd LFO
Control Assign
Receive SW
Operator
Form / Freq
Level
Same as the Element Common Edit parameters for Normal Parts (AWM2) (page 89), except for the
different setting values in the Destination parameter. For details on the setting value, see the Data List PDF
document.
Also the following parameter is shown on this display.
Operator SW (Operator Switch)
Selects whether the controller will affect each individual Operator (On) or not (Off). This is available only
when an Operator-related parameter is set in “Destination.”
Settings: Off, On
MONTAGE Reference Manual
139
Reference
Performance
Edit
Normal Part (AWM2)
Search
Drum Part
Utility
Normal Part (FM-X)
Live Set
Common/Audio
Normal Part (FM-X) Edit
Common
Part Settings
General
Algorithm
Zone Settings
Zone Transmit
Pitch / Filter
Pitch
PEG/Scale
Filter Type
Filter EG
Filter Scale
Effect
Routing
Ins A
Ins B
Operator Rate
Determines the sensitivity of the Controller in changing the parameter set in “Destination” for each
Operator.
This is available only when “Destination” is set to “OP Freq” or “OP AEG Offset.”
Settings: Off, On
EQ
Arpeggio
Common
Individual
Advanced
SW/Rate (Operator Switch/Operator Rate Switch)
Switches displays between “Operator Switch” and “Operator Rate.”
This is available only when “Destination” is set to “OP Freq” or “OP AEG Offset.”
Settings: Off, On
Motion Seq
Common
Lane
Mod / Control
Receive SW (Receive Switch)
Same as the Element Common Edit parameters for Normal Parts (AWM2) (page 92).
Part LFO
2nd LFO
Control Assign
Receive SW
Operator
Form / Freq
Level
MONTAGE Reference Manual
140
Reference
Performance
Edit
Search
Normal Part (AWM2)
Drum Part
Utility
Normal Part (FM-X)
Live Set
Common/Audio
Normal Part (FM-X) Edit
Operator Edit (Operator)
Common
Form/Freq (Form/Frequency)
Part Settings
From the Form/Frequency display you can make all the waveform and frequency settings for Operators.
General
Algorithm
Operation
[PERFORMANCE]  [EDIT]  Part selection  Operator selection  [Form/Freq]
Zone Settings
Zone Transmit
Pitch / Filter
Pitch
PEG/Scale
Filter Type
Filter EG
Filter Scale
Effect
Routing
Ins A
Ins B
EQ
Arpeggio
Common
Individual
Advanced
Motion Seq
Common
The full names of the available parameters are shown in the chart below, as they appear in the display.
Initial
Time
Level
–
Initial Level
Mod / Control
Attack
Decay
Attack Time
Decay Time
Attack Level
Lane
–
Settings: Time: 0 – 99
Level: -50 – +50
Part LFO
2nd LFO
Control Assign
Receive SW
Operator
Spectral (Spectral Form)
Determines the “spectral form” of the selected Operator.
Settings: Sine, All 1, All 2, Odd 1, Odd 2, Res 1, Res 2
Form / Freq
Level
Skirt (Spectral Skirt)
Determines the spread of the “skirt” at the bottom of the formant harmonics curve. Higher values produce
a wider skirt and smaller values produce a narrower skirt. This is not available when “Spectral” is set to
“Sine.”
Settings: 0 – 7
Resonance (Spectral Resonance)
Determines the degree to which velocity affects the Resonance of the Spectral Form. The center frequency
moves to higher frequencies, letting you create a special resonance in the sound. This is active only when
“Spectral” is set to “Res 1” or “Res 2.”
Settings: 0 – 99
MONTAGE Reference Manual
141
Reference
Performance
Edit
Search
Normal Part (AWM2)
Drum Part
Utility
Normal Part (FM-X)
Live Set
Common/Audio
Basic waveforms used as Operators contain harmonics, with the exception of “Sine.” A sine wave contains
its fundamental frequency with no additional harmonics. Therefore, when “Form” is set to any waveform
other than “Sine”, you can adjust harmonics and the peak of each formant, depending on the Waveform
Type by determining the related parameters. Below are the basic waveforms and the characteristic
parameters.
Normal Part (FM-X) Edit
Common
Part Settings
General
Algorithm
Level
Skirt
Level
Zone Settings
Skirt
Zone Transmit
Pitch / Filter
Pitch
PEG/Scale
Center Frequency
(F.Coarse & Freq Fine)
Level
Skirt
Frequency
(Hz)
Center Frequency
(F.Coarse & Freq Fine)
Frequency
(Hz)
Filter Type
Filter EG
Filter Scale
Level
Skirt
Effect
Routing
Ins A
Ins B
Center Frequency
(F.Coarse & Freq Fine)
Frequency
(Hz)
Center Frequency
(F.Coarse & Freq Fine)
Frequency
(Hz)
The larger the “Skirt” value, the more harmonics the wave contains.
EQ
Arpeggio
Common
Individual
Skirt
Skirt
Resonance of
Center Frequency
Resonance of
Center Frequency
Level
Level
Advanced
Motion Seq
Common
Lane
Mod / Control
Part LFO
2nd LFO
Frequency
Center Frequency
(Hz)
(F.Coarse & Freq Fine)
Frequency
Center Frequency
(Hz)
(F.Coarse & Freq Fine)
The larger “Resonance” value, the higher frequency the center frequency is moved.
• Resonance=0: The Center frequency is the basic wave
• Resonance=99: The Center frequency is the 100th harmonic
Control Assign
Receive SW
Operator
Form / Freq
Level
Key On Reset (Oscillator Key On Reset)
Determines whether or not the oscillation of the Operator is reset each time a note is pressed.
Settings: Off, On
Pitch/Vel (Pitch Velocity Sensitivity)
Determines how the pitch of the selected Operator responds to velocity. This is available only when “Freq
Mode” is set to “Fixed.”
Settings: -7 – +7
Positive values: The harder you play the keyboard, the more the pitch rises.
Negative values: The harder you play the keyboard, the more the pitch falls.
0: No change in pitch.
Freq Mode (Oscillator Frequency Mode)
Determines the settings for the Output Pitch of the Operator.
Settings: Ratio, Fixed
Ratio: Determines the Output Pitch by detecting the note you play on the keyboard.
Fixed: Specifies the Pitch by setting “Coarse” and “Fine.”
MONTAGE Reference Manual
142
Reference
Performance
Edit
Normal Part (AWM2)
Search
Drum Part
Utility
Normal Part (FM-X)
Live Set
Common/Audio
Normal Part (FM-X) Edit
Coarse (Coarse Tune)
Determines the pitch of each Operator.
Common
Settings: When “Freq Mode” is set to “Ratio”: 0 – 31
Part Settings
When “Freq Mode” is set to “Fixed”: 0 – 21
General
Fine (Fine Tune)
Algorithm
Determines the fine tuning for the pitch of each Operator.
Zone Settings
Settings: When “Freq Mode” is set to “Ratio”: 0 – 99
Zone Transmit
When “Freq Mode” is set to “Fixed”: 0 – 127
Pitch / Filter
Detune
Pitch
Sets the Output Pitch of the Operator slightly higher or lower.
Even if the same parameter value is set for both “Coarse Tune” and “Fine Tune,” the Detune lets you
slightly raise or lower the pitch of each Operator, allowing you to add an extra dimension to the sound and
enhance the spatial characteristics.
Settings: -15 – +15
PEG/Scale
Filter Type
Filter EG
Filter Scale
Effect
Pitch/Key (Pitch Key Follow Sensitivity)
Determines the sensitivity of the Key Follow effect (the degree depending on their position or octave
range). This is available only when “Freq Mode” is set to “Fixed.”
Settings: 0 – 99
0: All notes are the same pitch specified by Coarse and Fine.
99: Adjacent notes are pitched one semitone apart.
Routing
Ins A
Ins B
EQ
Arpeggio
Common
Individual
Level
Advanced
From the Level display you can make all the volume settings for the Operator.
Operation
Motion Seq
Common
[PERFORMANCE]  [EDIT]  Part selection  Operator selection  [Level]
Lane
Mod / Control
Part LFO
2nd LFO
Control Assign
Receive SW
Operator
Form / Freq
Level
The full names of the available parameters are shown in the chart below, as they appear in the display.
Time
Hold
Attack
Decay1
Decay2
Release
Hold Time
Attack Time
Decay1 Time
Decay2 Time
Release Time
Attack Level
Decay1 Level
Decay2 Level
Release (Hold) Level
–
Level
Settings: Time: 0 – 99
Level: 0 – 99
MONTAGE Reference Manual
143
Reference
Performance
Edit
Search
Normal Part (AWM2)
Drum Part
Utility
Normal Part (FM-X)
Live Set
Common/Audio
Normal Part (FM-X) Edit
Level (Operator Level)
Determines the output level of the Operator.
Common
Settings: 0 – 99
Part Settings
Level/Vel (Level Velocity Sensitivity)
General
Determines how the output level of the Operator responds to Velocity.
Algorithm
Settings: -7 – +7
Positive values: The more strongly you play the keyboard, the more the output rises.
Negative values: The more softly you play the keyboard, the more the output rises.
0: The output level does not change.
Zone Settings
Zone Transmit
Pitch / Filter
Pitch
Time/Key (AEG Time Key Follow Sensitivity)
Determines the degree to which the notes (specifically, their position or octave range) affect the Amplitude
EG Times.
Settings: 0 – 7
Positive values: High notes result in a fast Amplitude EG transition speed while low notes result in a slow speed.
0: The Amplitude EG transition speed does not change, regardless of the played note.
PEG/Scale
Filter Type
Filter EG
Filter Scale
Effect
Break Point
Routing
Determines the Amplitude Scale Break Points by specifying their respective note numbers.
Ins A
Settings: A-1 – C8
Ins B
EQ
Curve Lo (Low Curve)
Curve Hi (High Curve)
Arpeggio
Determines the curve for Amplitude scaling.
Common
Settings: -Linear, -Exp, +Exp, +Linear
Individual
Lvl/Key Lo (Low Depth)
Lvl/Key Hi (High Depth)
Advanced
Motion Seq
Determines the curve degree of the curve (above).
Common
Settings: 0 – 99
Lane
The keyboard is divided in two at the break point.
The high-pitch side at the right is set by using the R Depth and the R Curve; the low-pitch side at the left is
set by using the L Depth and the L Curve as described below.
Output Level
+exp
Part LFO
2nd LFO
Control Assign
+
+linear
Mod / Control
Receive SW
+linear
+exp
Operator
Form / Freq
Level
Low Curve
High Curve
Low Depth
High Depth
Key
-exp
-linear
-linear
-exp
Break Point Output Level
The Output level of the Key set as the Break Point depends on the Operator Level setting. For the Keys in
the left side of the Break Point, the Output level is adjusted based on the curve which is determined by the
Low Curve and Low Depth. For the Keys in the right side of the Break Point, the Output level is adjusted
based on the curve which is determined by the High Curve and High Depth. The Output level changes in
an exponential fashion from the Break Point on the Exp type curve and the Output level changes in a linear
fashion from the Break Point in the Linear type curve. In either case, the farther away from the Break Point
the key is, the greater the Output level changes for the key.
MONTAGE Reference Manual
144
Reference
Performance
Edit
Normal Part (AWM2)
Search
Drum Part
Utility
Normal Part (FM-X)
Live Set
Common/Audio
Common/Audio Edit (Common/Audio)
Common/Audio Edit
Common/Audio
A Performance consists up to 16 Parts. You can set the parameters related to the entire Performance and
the Audio Parts in the Common/Audio Edit display.
General
Audio In
Mixing
General
Routing
From the General display you can set various parameters for the Performance.
Ins A
Ins B
Operation
[PERFORMANCE]  [EDIT]  PART [COMMON]  [General]
EQ
Motion Seq
Common
Lane
Control
Control Assign
Control Number
Effect
Routing
Variation
Reverb
Master FX
Master EQ
Performance Name
Determines the selected Performance name. Performance names can contain up to 20 characters.
Touching the parameter calls up the input character display.
Motion Control Flag
Determines whether or not to add the “Motion Control” attribute to the selected Performance. When this is
set to on, the “MC” icon is displayed in the Performance Play display (page 26). The Performance can be
filtered as “MC” in the Performance Category Search display (page 161).
Settings: Off, On
Tg Flag (Tone Generator Flag)
Determines the attribute by the Tone Generator of the selected Performance. The name icon of the
selected Tone Generator is displayed in the Performance Play display (page 26). The Performance can be
filtered as “AWM2/FM/FM-X+AWM2” in the Performance Category Search display (page 161).
Settings: AWM2, FM-X, AWM2+FM-X
Volume (Performance Volume)
Determines the output volume of the selected Performance.
Settings: 0 – 127
Pan
Determines the stereo pan position of the selected Performance.
Settings: L63 – C – R63
Var Return (Variation Return)
Determines the return level of the Variation effect.
Settings: 0 – 127
MONTAGE Reference Manual
145
Reference
Performance
Edit
Normal Part (AWM2)
Search
Drum Part
Utility
Normal Part (FM-X)
Live Set
Common/Audio
Rev Return (Reverb Return)
Determines the return level of the Reverb effect.
Settings: 0 – 127
Audition Phrase Number
Common/Audio Edit
Common/Audio
General
Audio In
Determines the Audition Phrase Number. You can hear a sample of the selected Performance sounds that
is called “Audition phrase.” The best matching Audition Phrase is assigned to each Preset Performance in
advance.
Mixing
Settings: 1 – 850
Ins A
Routing
Ins B
Note Shift (Audition Phrase Note Shift)
Determines the pitch (key transpose) setting for the Audition Phrase in semitones.
Settings: -24semi – +24semi
EQ
Motion Seq
Common
Velocity Shift (Audition Phrase Velocity Shift)
Determines the velocity of the Audition Phrase.
Settings: -63 – +63
Portamento Master SW (Portamento Master Switch)
Determines whether Portamento is applied to the Part or not when the “Portamento Part SW” is set to on for
the Part.
Settings: Off, On
Lane
Control
Control Assign
Control Number
Effect
Routing
Variation
Portamento Time
Reverb
Determines the pitch transition time or rate when Portamento is applied.
Master FX
Settings: -64 – +63
Master EQ
RB Mode (Ribbon Controller Mode)
Determines how the Ribbon Controller responds when released.
Settings: Hold, Reset
Hold: When set to Hold, releasing your finger from the Ribbon Controller maintains the value at the last point of
contact.
Reset: When set to Reset, releasing your finger from the Ribbon Controller automatically returns the value to the
center.
Assign 1 Mode/Assign 2 Mode (Assignable Switch 1 Mode/Assignable Switch 2 Mode)
Determines whether the [ASSIGN 1] and [ASSIGN 2] buttons functions as a latch type or momentary type.
Settings: Latch, Momentary
Latch: When set to “Latch,” pressing the button alternates the status between on and off.
Momentary: When set to “Momentary,” pressing/holding the button turns on and releasing the button turns off.
MS Hold Mode (Motion Sequencer Hold Mode)
Determines how the [MOTION SEQ HOLD] button responds when pressed.
Settings: Latch, Momentary
Latch: When set to “Latch,” pressing the button alternates the status between on and off.
Momentary: When set to “Momentary,” pressing/holding the button turns on and releasing the button turns off.
MONTAGE Reference Manual
146
Reference
Performance
Edit
Normal Part (AWM2)
Search
Drum Part
Utility
Normal Part (FM-X)
Live Set
Common/Audio
Common/Audio Edit
Audio In
Common/Audio
General
Mixing
Audio In
From the Mixing display you can adjust the volume settings of the Audio Part (the input signal from the A/D
INPUT [L/MONO]/[R] jacks) and the Digital Part (the input signal from the [USB TO HOST] terminal*).
Mixing
* Only the sound of the Port which, among all Device Ports, is set to “Digital L/R.”
Ins A
Operation
[PERFORMANCE]  [EDIT]  PART [COMMON]  [Audio In]  [Mixing]
Routing
Ins B
EQ
Motion Seq
Common
Lane
Control
Control Assign
Control Number
Effect
Routing
Variation
Reverb
Master FX
Master EQ
A/D In Input Mode/Digital In Input Mode (A/D Part Input Mode/Digital Part Input Mode)
Determines the signal configuration for the A/D Part/Digital Part, or how the signal or signals are routed
(stereo or mono).
Settings: L Mono, R Mono, L+R Mono, Stereo
L Mono: Only the L channel is used.
R Mono: Only the R channel is used.
L+R Mono: The L and R channels are mixed and processed in mono.
Stereo: Both the L and R channels are used.
NOTE The sound input only from the [L/MONO] channel is processed in mono.
Volume (A/D Part Volume/Digital Part Volume)
Determines the output level of the A/D Part/Digital Part.
Settings: 0 – 127
Pan (A/D Part Pan/Digital Part Pan)
Determines the stereo pan position of the A/D Part/Digital Part.
Settings: L63 – C – R63
Dry Level (A/D Part Dry Level/Digital Part Dry Level)
Determines the level of the A/D Part/Digital Part which has not been processed with the System Effect. This
is available only when “Part Output” is set to “MainL&R.”
Settings: 0 – 127
Var Send (A/D Part Variation Send / Digital Part Variation Send)
Determines the Send level of the Audio Part/Digital Part signal sent to the Variation effect. This is available
only when “Part Output” is set to “MainL&R.”
Settings: 0 – 127
MONTAGE Reference Manual
147
Reference
Performance
Edit
Normal Part (AWM2)
Search
Drum Part
Utility
Normal Part (FM-X)
Rev Send (A/D Part Reverb Send/Digital Part Reverb Send)
Determines the Send level of the Audio Part/Digital Part signal sent to the Reverb effect. This is available
only when “Part Output” is set to “MainL&R.”
Settings: 0 – 127
Live Set
Common/Audio
Common/Audio Edit
Common/Audio
General
Audio In
Output Select (A/D Part Part Output Select/Digital Part Part Output Select)
Determines the specific output(s) for the individual A/D Part/Digital Part signal.
Settings: MainL&R, AsgnL&R, USB1&2…USB29&30, AsgnL, AsgnR, USB1 – 30, Off
MainL&R: Outputs in stereo (two channels) to the OUTPUT [L/MONO]/[R] jacks.
AsgnL&R: Outputs in stereo (two channels) to the ASSIGNABLE OUTPUT [L]/[R] jacks.
USB1&2…USB29&30: Outputs in stereo (Channels 1&2 – 29&30) to the [USB TO HOST] terminal.
AsgnL: Outputs in mono (one channel) to the ASSIGNABLE OUTPUT [L] jack.
AsgnR: Outputs in mono (one channel) to the ASSIGNABLE OUTPUT [R] jack.
USB1 – 30: Outputs in mono (Channels 1 – 30) to the [USB TO HOST] terminal.
Off: No audio signal for the Part is output.
Mixing
Routing
Ins A
Ins B
EQ
Motion Seq
Common
Lane
Control
Control Assign
Routing
Control Number
From the Routing display you can determine the Effect connections for the A/D Part.
Effect
Routing
Operation
[PERFORMANCE]  [EDIT]  PART [COMMON]  [Audio In]  [Routing]
Insertion FX Switch
Variation
Reverb
Master FX
Master EQ
Insertion FX Switch
Insertion FX Switch (Insertion Effect Switch)
Determines whether the Insertion Effect A/B is active or not.
Settings: Off, On
Category (Effect Category)
Type (Effect Type)
Determines the category and type for the selected Effect.
Settings: For details on the editable Effect categories and types, see the Data List PDF document. Also, for details on the
description for each Effect type, see the Synthesizer Parameter Manual PDF document.
Preset
Allows you to call up pre-programmed settings for each Effect type, designed to be used for specific
applications and situations. You can change how the sound is affected by the selected pre-programmed
settings.
Settings: For a list of all Preset Effects, see the Data List PDF document.
MONTAGE Reference Manual
148
Reference
Performance
Edit
Normal Part (AWM2)
Search
Drum Part
Utility
Normal Part (FM-X)
Live Set
Common/Audio
Side Chain/Modulator (Side Chain/Modulator Part)
Determines the Part used for the Side Chain/Modulator.
This is not available depending on the Effect Type.
For details on the Side Chain/Modulator, see the Routing display of the Normal Part (AWM2) (page 67).
Settings: Part 1 – 16, A/D, Master, Off
Ins Connect (Insertion Connection Type)
Determines the effect routing for Insertion Effects A and B. The setting changes are shown on the diagram
in the display, giving you a clear picture of how the signal is routed. For details, see the section “Effect
connection” (page 19) of the “Basic Structure.”
Settings: Ins AB, Ins BA
Rev Send (Reverb Send)
Determines the Send level of the signal sent from Insertion Effect A/B (or the bypassed signal) to the
Reverb effect. This is available only when “Part Output” is set to “MainL&R.”
Settings: 0 – 127
Common/Audio Edit
Common/Audio
General
Audio In
Mixing
Routing
Ins A
Ins B
EQ
Motion Seq
Common
Lane
Control
Var Send (Variation Send)
Control Assign
Determines the Send level of the signal sent from Insertion Effect A/B (or the bypassed signal) to the
Variation effect. This is available only when “Part Output” is set to “MainL&R.”
Control Number
Settings: 0 – 127
Effect
Routing
Envelope Follower
Variation
Calls up the Envelope Follower setting display. For details, see the Routing display (page 68) of Normal
Part (AWM2) Edit. This is available only when “Part Output” is set to “MainL&R.”
Reverb
Output Select (Part Output Select)
Master EQ
Master FX
Determines specific audio output.
Settings: MainL&R, AsgnL&R, USB1&2…USB29&30, AsgnL, AsgnR, USB1 – 30, Off
MainL&R: Outputs in stereo (two channels) to the OUTPUT [L/MONO]/[R] jacks.
AsgnL&R: Outputs in stereo (two channels) to the ASSIGNABLE OUTPUT [L]/[R] jacks.
USB1&2…USB29&30: Outputs in stereo (Channels 1&2 – 29&30) to the [USB TO HOST] terminal.
AsgnL: Outputs in mono (one channel) to the ASSIGNABLE OUTPUT [L] jack.
AsgnR: Outputs in mono (one channel) to the ASSIGNABLE OUTPUT [R] jack.
USB1 – 30: Outputs in mono (Channels 1 – 30) to the [USB TO HOST] terminal.
Off: No audio signal for the Part is output.
Ins A (Insertion Effect A)
Ins B (Insertion Effect B)
Same as the Element Common Edit parameters for Normal Parts (AWM2) (page 69).
EQ (Equalizer)
Same as the Element Common Edit parameters for Normal Parts (AWM2) (page 70) except that “3-band
EQ” is inactive.
MONTAGE Reference Manual
149
Reference
Performance
Edit
Normal Part (AWM2)
Search
Drum Part
Utility
Normal Part (FM-X)
Live Set
Common/Audio
Motion Seq (Motion Sequencer)
Common/Audio
General
Common
Audio In
From the Common display you can set the parameters related to Motion Sequencer commonly used for all
Parts in Common/Audio Part.
Operation
Common/Audio Edit
[PERFORMANCE]  [EDIT]  PART [COMMON]  [Motion Seq]  [Common]
Mixing
Routing
Ins A
Ins B
EQ
Motion Seq
Common
Lane
Control
Control Assign
Control Number
Effect
Routing
Variation
Reverb
Master FX
Master EQ
Common Clock Swing (Common Swing)
Determines the Swing of the Arpeggio/Motion Sequencer for the entire Performance. This is the offset
value for the Swing of the Arpeggio/Motion Sequencer for each Part.
Settings: -120 – +120
Common Clock Unit (Common Unit Multiply)
Adjusts the Arpeggio/Motion Sequencer playback time for the entire Performance.
This parameter is applied to the Part when the Unit Multiply parameter for the Part is set to “Common.”
By using this parameter, you can create a different Arpeggio/Motion Sequencer type from the original one.
Settings: 50% – 400%
200%: The playback time will be doubled and the tempo is halved.
100%: The normal playback time.
50%: The playback time will be halved and the tempo doubled.
Common Arp Gate Time (Common Arpeggio Gate Time)
Determines the Gate Time Rate (length) of the Arpeggio for the entire Performance. This is the offset value
for the Gate Time Rate of the Arpeggio for each Part.
Settings: -100 – +100
Common Arp Velocity (Common Arpeggio Velocity Rate)
Determines the Velocity Rate of the Arpeggio for the entire Performance. This is the offset value for the
Velocity Rate of the Arpeggio for each Part.
Settings: -100 – +100
Common Motion Seq Amplitude (Common Motion Sequencer Amplitude)
Determines the Amplitude of the Motion Sequencer for the entire Performance. “Amplitude” determines
how the entire Motion Sequence changes.
This is the offset value for the Part Motion Seq Amplitude, which is also the offset value for the Lane
Amplitude. This results in that both of the Common and Part MS Amplitudes offset the Amplitude setting in
the Lane (only when “MS FX” is set to on for the Lane).
Settings: -64 – +63
MONTAGE Reference Manual
150
Reference
Performance
Edit
Normal Part (AWM2)
Search
Drum Part
Utility
Normal Part (FM-X)
Live Set
Common/Audio
Common Motion Seq Shape (Common Motion Sequencer Pulse Shape)
Determines the Pulse Shape of the Motion Sequencer for the entire Performance. This changes the step
curve shape of the sequence.
This is the offset value for the Part Motion Seq Pulse Shape, which is also the offset value for the Lane
Pulse Shape. This results in that both of the Common and Part MS Pulse Shapes offset the Pulse Shape
setting for the parameter in the Lane (only when “MS FX” is set to on for the Lane and “Control” is set to on
for the parameter).
Settings: -100 – +100
Common/Audio Edit
Common/Audio
General
Audio In
Mixing
Routing
Ins A
Common Motion Seq Smooth (Common Motion Sequencer Smoothness)
Determines the Smoothness of the Motion Sequencer for the entire Performance. “Smoothness” is the
degree to which the time of the Motion Sequence is smoothly changed.
This is the offset value for the Part Motion Seq Smoothness, which is also the offset value for the Lane
Smoothness. This results in that both of the Common and Part MS Smoothnesses offset the Smoothness
setting for the parameter in the Lane (only when “MS FX” is set to on for the Lane).
Settings: -64 – +63
Ins B
EQ
Motion Seq
Common
Lane
Control
Common Motion Seq Random (Common Motion Sequencer Random)
Control Assign
Determines the Random of the Motion Sequencer for the entire Performance. “Random” is the degree to
which the Step Value of the Sequence is randomly changed.
This is the offset value for the Part Motion Seq Random when “MS FX” is set to on for the Lane.
Control Number
Settings: -64 – +63
Effect
Routing
Variation
Random (A/D Part Motion Sequencer Random)
Determines the degree of random change in the Step Value of the Motion Sequence for the A/D Part is. For
details about “Random,” see “Quick Edit” on page 32.
Settings: 0 – 127
Reverb
Master FX
Master EQ
Sync Part (Motion Sequencer Sync Part)
Determines the Part for synchronizing to the Motion Sequencer. The Motion Sequencer is synchronized to
the Note On setting and the Arp/Motion Seq Grid setting of the specified Part.
Settings: Part 1 – Part 16
Arp/MS Grid (Arpeggio/Motion Sequencer Grid)
Determines the type of note that serves as the basis for the Quantize or Swing. The parameter value is
displayed in clocks. For Motion Sequencer, this parameter value is one step length. This setting is applied
to the Part which is selected as the Sync Part (above).
Settings: 60 (32nd note), 80 (16th note triplet), 120 (16th note), 160 (8th note triplet), 240 (8th note), 320 (1/4 note triplet),
480 (1/4 note)
Lane
Same as the Element Common Edit parameters for Normal Parts (AWM2) (page 81).
MONTAGE Reference Manual
151
Reference
Performance
Edit
Normal Part (AWM2)
Search
Drum Part
Utility
Normal Part (FM-X)
Live Set
Common/Audio
Common/Audio Edit
Control
Common/Audio
Control Assign
General
Audio In
Mixing
Operation
[PERFORMANCE]  [EDIT]  PART [COMMON]  [Control]  [Control Assign]
Routing
Ins A
Ins B
EQ
Motion Seq
Common
Lane
Control
Control Assign
Control Number
Effect
Routing
Variation
Reverb
Master FX
Master EQ
Same as the Element Common Edit parameters for Normal Parts (AWM2) (page 89), except for the
following parameters.
Destination
When “Source” is set to “AsgnKnob 1 – 8,” “Part 1 – 16 Assign 1 – 8” are added as this parameter values.
In this case, “Curve Type” and “Curve Ratio” are not selectable.
Settings: See the “Control List” in the Data List PDF document.
Source
When “Destination” is set to “Part 1 – 16 Assign 1 – 8,” only “AsgnKnob 1 – 8” can be set for this parameter.
Settings: AsgnKnob 1 – 8, MS Lane 1 – 4, EnvFollow 1 – 16, EnvFollowAD, EnvFollowMst
MONTAGE Reference Manual
152
Reference
Performance
Edit
Normal Part (AWM2)
Search
Drum Part
Utility
Normal Part (FM-X)
Live Set
Common/Audio
Control Number
Determines the MIDI Control Change numbers common for the entire system. You can use the Knobs on
the front panel and external controllers by assigning appropriate MIDI Control Change numbers.
NOTE External controllers include external sequencers and external MIDI controllers.
Common/Audio Edit
Common/Audio
General
Audio In
Mixing
Operation
[PERFORMANCE]  [EDIT]  PART [COMMON]  [Control]  [Control Number]
Routing
Ins A
Ins B
EQ
Motion Seq
Common
Lane
Control
Control Assign
Control Number
Effect
Routing
Variation
Reverb
Master FX
Master EQ
Ribbon Ctrl (Ribbon Controller Control Number)
Determines the Control Change Number generated by using the Ribbon Controller.
Even when the instrument receives MIDI message with the same Control Change Number specified here
from the external equipment, the instrument assumes that the message is generated by operating the
Ribbon Controller.
Settings: Off, 1 – 95
Breath Ctrl (Breath Controller Control Number)
Determines the Control Change Number received from the external equipment such as a Breath Controller.
Even when the instrument receives MIDI message with the same Control Change Number specified here
from the external equipment, the instrument assumes that the message is generated by operating the
Breath Controller.
Settings: Off, 1 – 95
Foot Ctrl 1/Foot Ctrl 2
(Foot Controller 1 Control Number/Foot Controller 2 Control Number)
Determines the Control Change Number generated by using a Foot Controller connected to the FOOT
CONTROLLER [1] /[2] jack.
Even when the instrument receives MIDI messages with the same Control Change Number specified here
from the external equipment, the instrument assumes that the message is generated by operating the Foot
Controller.
Settings: Off, 1 – 95, Super Knob
Assign SW 1/Assign SW 2
(Assignable Switch 1 Control Number/Assignable Switch 2 Control Number)
Determines the Control Change Number generated by using the [ASSIGN 1]/[ASSIGN 2] button
(Assignable Switch 1/2).
Even when the instrument receives MIDI messages with the same Control Change Number specified here
from the external equipment, the instrument assumes that the message is generated by operating the
[ASSIGN 1]/[ASSIGN 2] button (Assignable Switch 1/2.)
Settings: Off, 1 – 95
MONTAGE Reference Manual
153
Reference
Performance
Edit
Normal Part (AWM2)
Search
Drum Part
Utility
Normal Part (FM-X)
Live Set
Common/Audio
MS Hold (Motion Sequencer Hold Control Number)
Determines the Control Change Number generated by using the [MOTION SEQ HOLD] (Motion
Sequencer Hold) button.
Even when the instrument receives MIDI messages with the same Control Change Number specified here
from the external equipment, the instrument assumes that the message is generated by operating the
[MOTION SEQ HOLD] (Motion Sequencer Hold) button.
Settings: Off, 1 – 95
Common/Audio Edit
Common/Audio
General
Audio In
Mixing
Routing
MS Trigger (Motion Sequencer Trigger Control Number)
Ins A
Determines the Control Change Number generated by using the [MOTION SEQ TRIGGER] (Motion
Sequencer Trigger) button.
Even when the instrument receives MIDI messages with the same Control Change Number specified here
from the external equipment, the instrument assumes that the message is generated by operating the
[MOTION SEQ TRIGGER] (Motion Sequencer Trigger) button.
Ins B
Settings: Off, 1 – 95
EQ
Motion Seq
Common
Lane
Assign Knob 1 – 8 (Assignable Knob 1 – 8 Control Number)
Determines the Control Change Number generated by using the Assignable Knob 1 – 8.
Even when the instrument receives MIDI messages with the same Control Change Number specified here
from the external equipment, the instrument assumes that the message is generated by operating the
Assignable Knob 1 – 8.
Control
Control Assign
Control Number
Effect
Routing
Settings: Off, 1 – 95
Variation
Reverb
Master FX
Effect
Master EQ
Routing
From this display you can determine the System Effect and Master Effect connections that commonly
affect all Parts.
Operation
[PERFORMANCE]  [EDIT]  PART [COMMON]  [Effect]  [Routing]
Reverb Switch
Variation Switch
Master Effect Switch
Variation/Reverb/Master Effect Switch
Determines whether Variation/Reverb/Master Effect is active or not.
Settings: Off, On
MONTAGE Reference Manual
154
Reference
Performance
Edit
Normal Part (AWM2)
Search
Drum Part
Utility
Normal Part (FM-X)
Category (Variation/Reverb/Master Effect Category)
Type (Variation/Reverb/Master Effect Type)
Determines the category and type for the selected effect.
Settings: For details on the editable Effect categories and types, see the Data List PDF document. Also, for details on the
description for each Effect type, see the Synthesizer Parameter Manual PDF document.
Preset (Variation/Reverb/Master Effect Preset)
Allows you to call up pre-programmed settings for each Variation/Reverb/Master Effect type, designed to
be used for specific applications and situations.
Settings: For a list of all Preset Effect Types, see the Data List PDF document.
Side Chain/Modulator (Variation/Master Effect Side Chain/Modulator Part)
Determines the Part used for Side Chain/Modulator for Variation/Master Effect.
This is not available when you select the same Part or “Master” as the Modulator Part.
Settings: Part 1 – 16, A/D, Master, Off
Var Return (Variation Return)
Rev Return (Reverb Return)
Determines the return level of the Variation/Reverb effect.
Settings: 0 – 127
Var Pan (Variation Pan)
Rev Pan (Reverb Pan)
Live Set
Common/Audio
Common/Audio Edit
Common/Audio
General
Audio In
Mixing
Routing
Ins A
Ins B
EQ
Motion Seq
Common
Lane
Control
Control Assign
Control Number
Effect
Routing
Variation
Determines the pan position of the Variation/Reverb effect.
Reverb
Settings: L63 (far left) – C (center) – R63 (far right)
Master FX
Var to Rev (Variation to Reverb)
Master EQ
Determines the Send level of the signal sent from the Variation Effect to the Reverb Effect.
Settings: 0 – 127
Master EQ (Master Equalizer Switch)
Determines whether the Master EQ is active or not.
Settings: Off, On
Envelope Follower
Calls up the Envelope Follower setting display. See the Routing display (page 67) for the Normal Part
(AWM2).
MONTAGE Reference Manual
155
Reference
Performance
Edit
Normal Part (AWM2)
Search
Drum Part
Utility
Normal Part (FM-X)
Common/Audio
Common/Audio Edit
Variation
Common/Audio
From this display you can determine the detailed settings of the Variation effect.
Operation
Live Set
[PERFORMANCE]  [EDIT]  PART [COMMON]  [Effect]  [Variation]
Variation Switch
Effect Parameter
General
Audio In
Mixing
Routing
Ins A
Ins B
EQ
Motion Seq
Common
Lane
Control
Control Assign
Control Number
Effect
Routing
Variation
Reverb
Master FX
Master EQ
Variation Switch
Determines whether the Variation effect is active or not.
Settings: Off, On
Category (Variation Category)
Type (Variation Type)
Determines the category and type for the selected effect.
Settings: For details on the editable Effect categories and types, see the Data List PDF document. Also, for details on the
description for each Effect type, see the Synthesizer Parameter Manual PDF document.
Preset (Variation Preset)
Allows you to call up pre-programmed settings for each Effect type, designed to be used for specific
applications and situations.
Settings: For a list of all Preset Effect Types, see the Data List PDF document.
Side Chain/Modulator (Variation Effect Side Chain/Modulator Part)
Determines the Part used for Side Chain/Modulator for Variation Effect.
This is not available when you select the same Part or “Master” as the Modulator Part.
Settings: Part 1 – 16, A/D, Master, Off
Effect Parameter
Editable parameters differ depending on the selected Effect Types. For details on the editable Effect
parameters for each Effect Type, see the Data List PDF document. Also, for details on the description for
each Effect parameter, see the Synthesizer Parameter Manual PDF document.
MONTAGE Reference Manual
156
Reference
Performance
Edit
Normal Part (AWM2)
Search
Drum Part
Utility
Normal Part (FM-X)
Common/Audio
Common/Audio Edit
Reverb
Common/Audio
From this display you can determine the detailed settings of the Reverb effect.
Operation
Live Set
[PERFORMANCE]  [EDIT]  PART [COMMON]  [Effect]  [Reverb]
General
Audio In
Mixing
Routing
Reverb Switch
Ins A
Ins B
EQ
Motion Seq
Common
Lane
Control
Control Assign
Control Number
Effect
Routing
Variation
Reverb
Master FX
Master EQ
Effect Parameter
Reverb Switch
Determines whether the Reverb effect is active or not.
Settings: Off, On
Category (Reverb Category)
Type (Reverb Type)
Determines the category and type for the selected effect.
Settings: For details on the editable Effect categories and types, see the Data List PDF document. Also, for details on the
description for each Effect type, see the Synthesizer Parameter Manual PDF document.
Preset (Reverb Preset)
Allows you to call up pre-programmed settings for each Effect type, designed to be used for specific
applications and situations.
Settings: For a list of all Preset Effect Types, see the Data List PDF document.
Effect Parameter
Editable parameters differ depending on the selected Effect Types. For details on the editable Effect
parameters for each Effect Type, see the Data List PDF document. Also, for details on the description for
each Effect parameter, see the Synthesizer Parameter Manual PDF document.
MONTAGE Reference Manual
157
Reference
Performance
Edit
Normal Part (AWM2)
Search
Drum Part
Utility
Normal Part (FM-X)
Common/Audio
Common/Audio Edit
Master FX (Master Effect)
Common/Audio
From this display you can determine the detailed settings of the Master Effect.
Operation
Live Set
[PERFORMANCE]  [EDIT]  PART [COMMON]  [Effect]  [Master FX]
General
Audio In
Mixing
Routing
Master Effect Switch
Ins A
Ins B
EQ
Motion Seq
Common
Lane
Control
Control Assign
Control Number
Effect
Routing
Variation
Reverb
Master FX
Master EQ
Effect Parameter
Master Effect Switch
Determines whether the Master Effect is active or not.
Settings: Off, On
Category (Master Effect Category)
Type (Master Effect Type)
Determines the category and type for the selected effect.
Settings: For details on the editable Effect categories and types, see the Data List PDF document. Also, for details on the
description for each Effect type, see the Synthesizer Parameter Manual PDF document.
Preset (Master Effect Preset)
Allows you to call up pre-programmed settings for each Effect type, designed to be used for specific
applications and situations.
Settings: For a list of all Preset Effect Types, see the Data List PDF document.
Side Chain/Modulator (Master Effect Side Chain/Modulator Part)
Determines the Part used for Side Chain/Modulator for Master Effect.
This is not available when you select the same Part or “Master” as the Modulator Part.
Settings: Part 1 – 16, A/D, Master, Off
Effect Parameter
Editable parameters differ depending on the selected Effect Types. For details on the editable Effect
parameters for each Effect Type, see the Data List PDF document. Also, for details on the description for
each Effect parameter, see the Synthesizer Parameter Manual PDF document.
MONTAGE Reference Manual
158
Reference
Performance
Edit
Normal Part (AWM2)
Search
Drum Part
Utility
Normal Part (FM-X)
Common/Audio
Common/Audio Edit
Master EQ (Master Equalizer)
Common/Audio
From this display you can set parameters related to the Master EQ.
Operation
Live Set
General
[PERFORMANCE]  [EDIT]  PART [COMMON]  [Effect]  [Master EQ]
Audio In
Mixing
Routing
Master EQ Switch
Ins A
Ins B
EQ
Motion Seq
Common
Lane
Control
Control Assign
Control Number
Effect
Routing
Variation
Reverb
Master FX
Master EQ
Low Shape
High Shape
Master EQ Switch
Determines whether the Master EQ is active or not.
Settings: Off, On
Low Gain (Master EQ Low Gain)
Determines the level gain of the Master EQ Low band.
Settings: -12dB – +12dB
Lo Mid Gain (Master EQ Low Mid Gain)
Determines the level gain of the Master EQ Low Mid band.
Settings: -12dB – +12dB
Mid Gain (Master EQ Mid Gain)
Determines the level gain of the Master EQ Mid band.
Settings: -12dB – +12dB
Hi Mid Gain (Master EQ High Mid Gain)
Determines the level gain of the Master EQ High Mid band.
Settings: -12dB – +12dB
High Gain (Master EQ High Gain)
Determines the level gain of the Master EQ High band.
Settings: -12dB – +12dB
Low Freq (Master EQ Low Frequency)
Determines the frequency for the Master Low band.
Settings: 32Hz – 2.0kHz
Lo Mid Freq (Master EQ Low Mid Frequency)
Determines the frequency for the Master Low Mid band.
Settings: 100Hz – 10kHz
MONTAGE Reference Manual
159
Reference
Performance
Edit
Normal Part (AWM2)
Search
Drum Part
Utility
Normal Part (FM-X)
Live Set
Common/Audio
Mid Freq (Master EQ Mid Frequency)
Determines the frequency for the Master Mid band.
Settings: 100Hz – 10kHz
Hi Mid Freq (Master EQ High Mid Frequency)
Common/Audio Edit
Common/Audio
General
Audio In
Determines the frequency for the Master High Mid band.
Mixing
Settings: 100Hz – 10kHz
Routing
High Freq (Master EQ High Frequency)
Ins A
Determines the frequency for the Master High band.
Ins B
Settings: 500Hz – 16kHz
EQ
Low Q (Master EQ Low Q)
Determines the EQ bandwidth of the Master Low band. This is available only when the Master EQ Low
Shape (below) is set to “Peak.”
Settings: 0.1 – 12.0
Motion Seq
Common
Lane
Control
Lo Mid Q (Master EQ Low Mid Q)
Control Assign
Determines the EQ bandwidth of the Master Low Mid band.
Control Number
Settings: 0.1 – 12.0
Effect
Mid Q (Master EQ Mid Q)
Routing
Determines the EQ bandwidth of the Master Mid band.
Variation
Settings: 0.1 – 12.0
Reverb
Hi Mid Q (Master EQ High Mid Q)
Determines the EQ bandwidth of the Master High Mid band.
Master FX
Master EQ
Settings: 0.1 – 12.0
High Q (Master EQ High Q)
Determines the EQ bandwidth of the Master High band. This is available only when the Master EQ High
Shape (below) is set to “Peak.”
Settings: 0.1 – 12.0
Low Shape (Master EQ Low Shape)
High Shape (Master EQ High Shape)
Determines whether the equalizer type used is Shelving or Peaking. The Peaking type attenuates/boosts
the signal at the specified Frequency setting, whereas the Shelving type attenuates/boosts the signal at
frequencies above or below the specified Frequency setting. This parameter is available only for the LOW
and HIGH frequency bands.
Settings: Shelf (Shelving Type), Peak (Peaking Type)
MONTAGE Reference Manual
160
Reference
Performance
Edit
Search
Utility
Live Set
Search
Category Search
Performance Category
The Performances/Arpeggios/Waveforms are conveniently divided into specific Categories. The
categories are divided based on the general instrument type or sound characteristics. The Category
Search function gives you quick access to the sounds you want.
Arp Category
Waveform
Performance Category Search
From the Performance Category Search display you can search and select the Performance.
 In case of Performance Category Search
Operation
[PERFORMANCE]  [CATEGORY] (Performance Category Search)
or
Touch the Performance Name  Select [Search] from the displayed menu
Name Search
Performance list
Bank (Performance Bank Select)
Filters the Performance List by Bank.
Settings: All, Preset, User, Library Name (when the Library file is read)
Attribute (Performance Attribute)
Filters the Performance List by Attribute (page 145). This is not available for Part Category Search.
Settings: All, AWM2, FM, FM-X+AWM2, MC, SSS, Single, Multi
Name Search (Performance Name Search)
Searches the Performance by inputting a part of the Performance Name.
Settings: See the Data List PDF document.
Main (Performance Main Category)
Settings: See the Data List PDF document.
Sub (Performance Sub Category)
Settings: See the Data List PDF document.
Audition (Audition Switch)
Determines whether the Audition phrase is played back or not. This is not available when “Audition Lock”
(page 171) is set to on in the Utility display.
Settings: Off, On
MONTAGE Reference Manual
161
Reference
Performance
Edit
Search
Utility
Sort (Sort Order)
Determines the Sort Order of the Performance List.
Settings: Default, Name, Date
Name: Sorts by name. When the lower arrow is displayed, the List is arranged in ascending order (A to Z). When the
upper arrow is displayed, the List is arranged in descending order.
Live Set
Search
Performance Category
Arp Category
Waveform
Date: Sorts in order of storing. When the lower arrow is displayed, the List is arranged in descending order (newer to
older). When the upper arrow is displayed, the List is arranged in ascending order.
 In case of Part Category Search
Operation
[PERFORMANCE]  Part selection  [SHIFT]+[CATEGORY] (Part Category Search)
(When the Part to which any sounds are assigned is selected) Touch the Part Name  Select [Search]
from the displayed menu
or
(When the Part to which no sound is assigned is selected) Touch “+” icon
Solo (Solo Switch)
Determines the Solo function is active (On) or not (Off.) When this is set to on and any sound is assigned to
the Part, only the Part will be sounded.
Settings: Off, On
Param. with Part (Parameter with Part)
Determines whether or not to read and use the parameter values for the next Performance. When the set of
parameters is set to off, the current setting values are continuously used even when the next Performance
is selected.
The “Zone” parameter is available only when “Zone Master” (page 171) is set to on in the Utility display.
Settings: Arp/MS, Scene, Zone
MONTAGE Reference Manual
162
Reference
Performance
Edit
Search
Utility
Arpeggio Category Search (Arp Category Search)
From the Arpeggio Category Search display you can search and select Arpeggio Types.
Live Set
Search
Performance Category
Arp Category
Operation
Arpeggio related display  Part selection  [CATEGORY]
Waveform
Name Search
Arpeggio Type list
Bank (Arpeggio Bank Select)
Filters the Arpeggio List by Bank.
Settings: All, Preset, User, Library Name (when the Library file is read)
Name Search (Arpeggio Name Search)
Searches for an Arpeggio by inputting a part of the Arpeggio Name.
Settings: See the Data List PDF document.
Main (Arpeggio Category)
Settings: See the Arpeggio Category List (page 11).
Sub (Arpeggio Sub Category)
Settings: See the Arpeggio Sub Category List (page 11).
Sort (Sort Order)
Determines the Sort Order of the Arpeggio Type List.
Settings: Default, Name, Date
Name: Sorts by name. When the lower arrow is displayed, the List is arranged in ascending order (A to Z). When the
upper arrow is displayed, the List is arranged in descending order.
Date: Sorts in order of loading. When the lower arrow is displayed, the List is arranged in descending order (newer
to older). When the upper arrow is displayed, the List is arranged in ascending order.
MONTAGE Reference Manual
163
Reference
Performance
Edit
Search
Utility
Waveform Category Search (Waveform Search)
From the Waveform Category Search display you can search and select the Waveforms.
Live Set
Search
Performance Category
Arp Category
Operation
Waveform related display  Part selection  Waveform selection  [CATEGORY]
Waveform
Name Search
Waveform list
Bank (Waveform Bank Select)
Filters the Waveform List by Bank.
Settings: All, Preset, User, Library Name (when the Library file is read)
Name Search (Waveform Name Search)
Searches for a Waveform by inputting a part of the Waveform Name.
Settings: See the Data List PDF document.
Main (Waveform Category)
Settings: See the Data List PDF document.
Sub (Waveform Sub Category)
Settings: See the Data List PDF document.
Sort (Sort Order)
Determines the Sort Order of the Waveform List.
Settings: Default, Name, Date
Name: Sorts by name. When the lower arrow is displayed, the List is arranged in ascending order (A to Z). When the
upper arrow is displayed, the List is arranged in descending order.
Date: Sorts in order of storing. When the lower arrow is displayed, the List is arranged in descending order (newer to
older). When the upper arrow is displayed, the List is arranged in ascending order.
MONTAGE Reference Manual
164
Reference
Performance
Edit
Search
Utility
Live Set
Uitlity
Utility
Settings
The Utility display has four tabs; the Setting tab, the Contents tab, the Tempo Settings tab, and the Effect
Switch tab. You can make various settings for the entire system.
Sound
Quick Setup
Audio I/O
Settings
MIDI I/O
Advanced
System
Sound
Contents
From the Sound display you can make overall settings for the sounds output from the instrument.
Load
Store / Save
Operation
[UTILITY]  [Settings]  [Sound]
Data Utility
Tempo Settings
Effect Switch
Tone Generator Volume
Determines the overall volume of the instrument.
Settings: 0 – 127
Tone Generator Note Shift
Determines the amount (in semitones) by which the pitch of all notes is shifted.
Settings: -24semi – +24semi
Tone Generator Tune
Determines the fine tuning of the instrument’s overall sound (in 0.1 cent steps).
Settings: -102.4 – +102.3
Sustain Pedal (Footswitch Sustain Pedal Select)
Selects the Footswitch type connected to the FOOT SWITCH [SUSTAIN] jack on the rear panel.
• When the FC3 or FC3A is used:
When you connect an optional FC3 or FC3A (equipped with the half-damper feature) for producing
the special “half-damper” effect (as on a real acoustic piano), set this parameter to “FC3A (Half on).”
If you don’t need the half-damper feature or want to disable it while still using an FC3 or FC3A, set
this parameter to “FC3A (Half off).”
• When the FC4, FC4A, or FC5 is used:
Select “FC4A/FC5.” The FC4, FC4A, and FC5 are not equipped with the half-damper feature.
Settings: FC3A (Half On), FC3A (Half Off), FC4A/FC5
NOTE Note that this setting is not necessary when controlling the half-damper feature via Control Change messages
from an external MIDI device to the instrument.
MONTAGE Reference Manual
165
Reference
Performance
Edit
Search
Utility
Live Set
Uitlity
Keyboard Octave Shift
Determines the amount in octaves by which the range of the keyboard is shifted up or down. This
parameter is linked with the OCTAVE [-]/[+] buttons on the panel.
Settings: -3 – +3
Settings
Sound
Quick Setup
Keyboard Transpose
Audio I/O
This parameter is used to transpose the current zone in units of one semitone.
Settings: -11semi – +11semi
NOTE If you transpose beyond the note range limits (C -2 – G8), notes in the adjacent octaves will be used.
MIDI I/O
Advanced
System
Keyboard Velocity Curve
Contents
These five curves determine how the actual velocity will be generated and transmitted according to the
velocity (strength) with which you play notes on the keyboard. The graph shown in the display indicates
the velocity response curve. (The horizontal line represents the received velocity values (strength of your
playing), while the vertical line represents the actual velocity values transmitted to the internal/external
tone generators.)
Settings: Normal, Soft, Hard, Wide, Fixed
Normal: This linear “curve” produces one-to-one correspondence between the strength of your keyboard playing
Load
Store / Save
Data Utility
Tempo Settings
Effect Switch
(velocity) and the actual sound change.
Soft: This curve provides increased response, especially for lower velocities.
Hard: This curve provides increased response, especially for higher velocities.
Wide: This curve accentuates your playing strength by producing lower velocities in response to softer playing and
louder velocities in response to harder playing. As such, you can use this setting to expand your dynamic range.
Fixed: This setting produces the same amount of sound change (set in Keyboard Fixed Velocity below), no matter
what your playing strength. The velocity of the notes you play are fixed at the value set here.
Keyboard Fixed Velocity
The Fixed curve can be used to send a fixed velocity to the tone generator regardless of how hard or soft
you play the keyboard. This parameter is only available if you select the “Fixed” Keyboard Velocity Curve
above.
Settings: 1 – 127
Quick Setup
Using Quick Setup can instantly call up appropriate sequencer-related panel settings by selecting
convenient preset setups, allowing you to simultaneously and instantly set a variety of important
sequencer-related parameters.
Operation
[UTILITY]  [Settings]  [Quick Setup], [SHIFT] + [UTILITY], or
Touch the QUICK SETUP icon
QUICK SETUP icon
MONTAGE Reference Manual
166
Reference
Performance
Edit
Search
Utility
Live Set
Uitlity
Audio Signal Flow
Indicates the Audio signal connections. The connections will change depending on the status of the [USB
TO HOST] terminal and the general settings of the instrument.
Settings
Sound
MIDI Signal Flow
Quick Setup
Indicates the MIDI signal connections. The connections will change depending on the general settings of
the instrument.
Audio I/O
Quick Setup
Advanced
Determines the Quick Setups.
System
Settings: Standalone, 1 – 3
MIDI I/O
Contents
Load
The parameters for Quick Setups are as follows.
Store / Save
A/D Input Gain
Audio Settings
Data Utility
Main L&R Gain
Tempo Settings
Assign L&R Gain
Effect Switch
USB Main L&R Gain
USB 1-30 Gain
Direct Monitor Switch
MIDI In/Out
MIDI Settings
Local Control
Arp MIDI Out
MIDI Sync
Clock Out
Receive/Transmit Sequencer Control
Controller Reset
FS CC Number
Part Output Settings
Part 1-16 Output Select
A/D In Output Select
Digital In Output Select
For details about parameters related to Audio Settings, see “Audio I/O” (page 168). For details about
parameters related to MIDI Settings, see “MIDI I/O” (page 169).
The default settings for Quick Setups are as follows.
 Standalone
Use this setting when this instrument is to be used alone or as the master clock source for other
equipment.
Local Control
Direct Monitor
Output Select
Arp MIDI Out
On
On
Main L&R
Off
 MIDI Rec on DAW
Use this setting when recording this instrument’s performance (not including Arpeggio data) to the
DAW software.
Local Control
Direct Monitor
Output Select
Arp MIDI Out
Off
On
Main L&R
Off
 Arp Rec on DAW
Use this setting when recording this instrument’s performance including Arpeggio data to the DAW
software.
Local Control
Direct Monitor
Output Select
Arp MIDI Out
Off
On
Main L&R
On
MONTAGE Reference Manual
167
Reference
Performance
Edit
Search
Utility
 Audio Rec on DAW
Live Set
Uitlity
Use this setting when recording the signals from the tone generator and the A/D INPUT [L/MONO]/[R]
jacks separately to DAW software, and playing the signals from the OUTPUT [L/MONO]/[R] jacks
directly.
Settings
Sound
Quick Setup
Local Control
Direct Monitor
Output Select
Arp MIDI Out
Audio I/O
On
Off
Depends on the Part
Off
MIDI I/O
Advanced
Store Current Settings
Stores the edited settings as 1 – 3 of “QuickSetup.”
System
Contents
Load
Store / Save
Audio I/O
Data Utility
From the Audio I/O display you can set the parameters related to Audio Input and Output.
Tempo Settings
Effect Switch
Operation
[UTILITY]  [Settings]  [Audio I/O]
A/D Input (A/D Input Gain)
When using the A/D INPUT [L/MONO]/[R] jacks, this determines the input source, microphone (Mic) or
Line.
Settings: Mic, Line
Mic: Intended for low output equipment, such as a microphone.
Line: Intended for high output equipment, such as a keyboard, synthesizer, or CD player.
NOTE A guitar or bass having active pickups can be directly connected. However, when using passive pickups,
connect the instrument via an effect device.
Audio I/O Mode
Determines the Output mode of the Audio signal input from the [USB TO HOST] terminal. To activate this
setting, the instrument needs to be rebooted.
Settings: 16 Stereo/44.1kHz, 4 Stereo/44.1-192kHz
16 Stereo/44.1kHz: Audio data sending capability for the instrument is a maximum 32 channels (16 stereo
channels) at a sampling frequency of 44.1 kHz.
4 Stereo/44.1-192kHz: Audio data sending capability for the instrument is a maximum 8 channels (4 stereo
channels) for a sampling frequency of 44.1 kHz to 192 kHz.
NOTE When “4 Stereo/44.1-192kHz” is selected, available frequencies are only 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz, 96 kHz, and
192 kHz.
Main L&R (Main L&R Output Gain)
Determines the output gain of the OUTPUT (BALANCED) [L/MONO]/[R] jacks.
Settings: -6dB, +0dB, +6dB, +12dB
MONTAGE Reference Manual
168
Reference
Performance
Edit
Search
Utility
Assign L&R (Assign L&R Output Gain)
Determines the output gain of the ASSIGNABLE OUTPUT (BALANCED) [L]/[R] jacks.
Settings: -6dB, +0dB, +6dB, +12dB
Live Set
Uitlity
Settings
Sound
USB Main (USB Main L&R Output Gain)
Quick Setup
Determines the output gain of the Main L&R channel of the [USB TO HOST] terminal.
Audio I/O
Settings: -6dB, +0dB, +6dB, +12dB
MIDI I/O
USB 1-30 (USB 1 – 30 Output Gain)
Advanced
Determines the output gain of 1 – 30 channels of the [USB TO HOST] terminal.
System
Settings: -6dB, +0dB, +6dB, +12dB
Contents
Direct Monitor (Direct Monitor Switch)
Load
Determines whether or not the audio signal which is output to the external device via the “Main L&R (USB
Out)” or “USB 1-30” channels also sounds from this instrument (Direct Monitoring). When this is set to “on,”
the audio signal which is output via the “Main L&R (USB Out)” or “USB 1-30” channels is also output to the
OUTPUT (BALANCED) [L/MONO]/[R] jacks and [PHONES] jack. When the external device is not
connected via USB cable, the Direct Monitor Switch is automatically turned on.
Store / Save
Data Utility
Tempo Settings
Effect Switch
Settings: Off, On
MIDI I/O
From the MIDI I/O display you can set parameters related to MIDI Input and Output.
Operation
[UTILITY]  [Settings]  [MIDI I/O]
MIDI IN/OUT
Determines which physical output/input terminal(s) will be used for transmitting/receiving MIDI data.
Settings: MIDI, USB
NOTE The two types of terminals above cannot be used at the same time. Only one of them can be used to transmit/
receive MIDI data.
Local Control
This determines whether or not the tone generator of the instrument responds to your keyboard playing.
Normally, this should be set to “on” — since you’ll want to hear the sound of the instrument as you play it.
Even if this is set to “off,” the data will be transmitted via MIDI. Also, the internal tone generator block will
respond to messages received via MIDI.
Settings: Off, On
MONTAGE Reference Manual
169
Reference
Performance
Edit
Search
Utility
Live Set
Uitlity
Arp MIDI Out (Arpeggio MIDI Out)
Determines whether to output MIDI data of Arpeggio playback or not.
Settings: Off, On
Settings
Sound
MIDI Sync
Quick Setup
You can set various parameters related to MIDI clock and synchronization here.
Determines whether Arpeggio/Motion Sequencer/Song playback will be synchronized to the instrument’s
internal clock, an external MIDI clock, or the Audio signal input from the A/D INPUT [L/MONO]/[R] jacks.
Audio I/O
Settings: Internal, MIDI, A/D In
Internal: Synchronization to internal clock. You can use this setting when this tone generator is to be used alone or
as the master clock source for other equipment.
MIDI: Synchronization to a MIDI clock received from an external MIDI instrument via MIDI. Use this setting when the
MIDI I/O
Advanced
System
Contents
external sequencer is to be used as master.
Load
A/D In: Synchronization to the tempo of the Audio signal received via the A/D INPUT [L/MONO]/[R] jacks.
Store / Save
Data Utility
Clock Out
Determines whether MIDI clock messages will be transmitted via MIDI or not.
Tempo Settings
Settings: Off, On
Effect Switch
Receive (Receive Sequencer Control)
Determines whether the Sequencer Control signals – start and stop of Song – will be received via MIDI or
not.
Settings: Off, On
Transmit (Transmit Sequencer Control)
Determines whether the Sequencer Control signals – start and stop of Song – will be transmitted to MIDI or
not.
Settings: Off, On
Controller Reset
Determines the status of the controllers (Modulation Wheel, Aftertouch, Foot Controller, Breath Controller,
Knobs, etc.) when switching between Performances. When this is set to “Hold,” the controllers are kept at
the current setting. When this is set to “Reset,” the controllers are reset to the default states (below).
Settings: Hold, Reset
If you select “reset,” the controllers will be reset to the following states/positions:
Pitch Bend
Center
Modulation Wheel
Minimum
Aftertouch
Minimum
Foot Controller
Maximum
Footswitch
Off
Ribbon Controller
Center
Breath Controller
Maximum
Expression
Maximum
Assignable Switches 1 and 2
Off
Motion Sequencer Hold
Off
Each Lane of Motion Sequencer
0 (minimum) when Lane Motion Sequencer
Polarity is set to “Unipolar”
64 (center) when Lane Motion Sequencer
Polarity is set to “Bipolar”
FS Assign (Footswitch Assign Control Number)
Determines the Control Change number generated by using the Footswitch connected to the FOOT
SWITCH [ASSIGNABLE] jack. Even when the instrument receives MIDI message with the same Control
Change Number specified here from the external equipment, the instrument assumes that the message is
generated by using the Footswitch.
Settings: Off, 1 – 95, Arp SW, MS SW, Play/Stop, Live Set+, Live Set-, Oct Reset
MONTAGE Reference Manual
170
Reference
Performance
Edit
Search
Utility
Live Set
Uitlity
Advanced
Settings
From the Advanced display you can set the advanced parameters.
Sound
Quick Setup
Operation
[UTILITY]  [Settings]  [Advanced]
Audio I/O
MIDI I/O
Advanced
System
Contents
Load
Store / Save
Data Utility
Tempo Settings
Effect Switch
Zone Master (Zone Master Switch)
Determines whether the Zone function is used (on) or not (off).
Settings: Off, On
Audition Lock
Determines whether the Audition Lock is active or not. When this is set to On, the Audition function is not
available.
Settings: Off, On
Device Number
Determines the MIDI Device Number. This number must match the Device Number of the external MIDI
device when transmitting/receiving bulk data, parameter changes or other System Exclusive messages.
Settings: 1 – 16, All, Off
Bank Select
This switch enables or disables Bank Select messages, both in transmission and reception. When this is
set to “on,” this synthesizer responds to incoming Bank Select messages.
Settings: Off, On
Pgm Change (Program Change)
This switch enables or disables Program Change messages, both in transmission and reception. When
this is set to “on,” this synthesizer responds to incoming Program Change messages.
Settings: Off, On
Receive Bulk
Determines whether or not Bulk Dump data can be received.
Settings: Protect (not received), On (received)
Bulk Interval
Determines the interval time of the Bulk Dump transmission when a Bulk Dump Request is received.
Settings: 0ms – 900ms
MONTAGE Reference Manual
171
Reference
Performance
Edit
Search
Utility
Event Chase (Song Event Chase)
Event Chase allows you to specify which non-note data types are properly recognized during fast-forward
and rewind operations. Setting this to a specific event ensures the playback integrity of the event, even
when fast forwarding or rewinding.
Settings: Off, PC (Program Change), PC+PB+Ctrl (Program Change+Pitch Bend+Control Change)
Init On Boot (Initialize User Data on Boot-up)
Determines whether the User Data is initialized (On) or not (Off) when the power of the instrument is turned
on.
Live Set
Uitlity
Settings
Sound
Quick Setup
Audio I/O
MIDI I/O
Advanced
System
Settings: Off, On
Initialize Advanced Settings
Initializes the system settings edited in the Advanced display.
Contents
Load
Store / Save
NOTICE
When the Initialize operation is executed, the target data and system settings you edited will be erased. Make
sure you are not overwriting any important data. Be sure to save all important data to your USB flash memory
device before executing this procedure.
Data Utility
Tempo Settings
Effect Switch
System
From the System display you can make global system settings for the instrument.
Operation
[UTILITY]  [Settings]  [System]
Power on Mode
Determines the start-up display (which is automatically called up when power is turned on).
Settings: Perform, Live Set
Auto Power Off
To prevent unnecessary power consumption, this instrument features an Auto Power Off function that
automatically turns the power off if the instrument is not operated for a specified period of time. This
parameter determines the amount of time that elapses before the power is automatically turned off.
Settings: Off, 5, 10, 15, 30, 60, 120min
Animation (Animation Switch)
Determines whether the animation of screen transition is turned on or off.
Settings: Off, On
MONTAGE Reference Manual
172
Reference
Performance
Edit
Search
Utility
Blur (Blur Switch)
When any display is selected, the display previously selected is blurred. This parameter determines
whether the Blur function is turned on or off.
Settings: Off, On
Live Set
Uitlity
Settings
Sound
Quick Setup
Beep (Beep Switch)
Audio I/O
Determines whether the beep sound (that confirms operations, menu/parameter selection, etc.) is turned
on or off.
MIDI I/O
Settings: Off, On
Advanced
System
Knob Flash (Super Knob LED Switch)
Determines whether the flashing function of the Super Knob is turned on or off.
Settings: Off, On
Contents
Load
Store / Save
KnobBrightness (Knob Brightness)
Controls the brightness of the lighting of the Super Knob.
Settings: 0 – 128
Data Utility
Tempo Settings
Effect Switch
Half Glow (LED Half Glow Brightness)
Controls the dimming of the button lamps.
Settings: Off, 1/4, 1/2
Calibrate Touch Panel
Calls up the Calibration display for the Touch Panel. Calibration of the touch panel may be necessary if the
touch panel does not respond correctly.
Initialize All Settings
Initializes all system settings you created on the Utility display.
Initialize User Data
Initializes User data (Performance, Motion Sequence, and Live Set) in the specified area of the User
memory and system settings you created on the Utility display.
Initialize All Data
Initializes all User data in the User memory and all system settings you created on the Utility display.
NOTICE
When the Initialize operation is executed, all target data and system settings you created will be erased. Make
sure you are not overwriting any important data. Be sure to save all important data to your USB flash memory
device before executing this procedure.
MONTAGE Reference Manual
173
Reference
Performance
Edit
Search
Utility
Live Set
Uitlity
Contents
Settings
Sound
Load
Quick Setup
Audio I/O
From the Load display you can load files and data.
MIDI I/O
Operation
[UTILITY]  [Contents]  [Load]
Advanced
Parent Folder Name
Current Folder Name
Free Storage
System
Contents
Load
Store / Save
Data Utility
Tempo Settings
Effect Switch
Folder/File select
Content Type
Among the various types of data saved in a single file on a USB flash memory or this instrument, you can
load all of them to this synthesizer at once or only a specific, desired type of data. This parameter
determines which specific type of data will be loaded from a single file. The editable parameters differ
depending on how you arrive at this display.
Settings: The file types which can be loaded as follows.
File Types
Device Type Extension Description
User File
File
.X7U
Files of the “User File” type saved to USB flash memory
can be loaded and restored to the dedicated area in the
User Memory of the instrument (page 22).
User File Type data is as follows.
• Performance
• Arpeggio
• Motion Sequence
• Curve
• Live Set
• Micro Tuning
• Waveform
• Utility settings
• Quick Setup
Library File
File
.X7L
Files of the “Library File” type saved to USB flash memory
can be loaded and restored to the dedicated area in the
User Memory of the instrument (page 22).
Library File Type data is as follows.
• Performance
• Arpeggio
• Motion Sequence
• Curve
• Live Set
• Micro Tuning
• Waveform
MONTAGE Reference Manual
174
Reference
Performance
Edit
File Types
Device Type Extension Description
Song&Perf
Internal data
Song
Search
Utility
A specified Song in a file that is saved to the dedicated
area in the User Memory as a “Song” type can be
individually selected and loaded (played back) to the
instrument. Both of MIDI sequence and Performance data
can be loaded.
Internal data
A specified Song in a file that is saved to the dedicated
area in the User Memory as a “Song” type can be
individually selected and loaded (played back) to the
instrument. Only MIDI sequence data can be loaded.
.mid File
File
.MID
Standard MIDI File (SMF in format 0, 1) data that is saved
to USB flash memory can be loaded and played back.
.wav File
File
.WAV
Audio data (Wave File) that is saved to USB flash memory
can be loaded and played back.
Audio File*
File
.WAV
.AIF
Audio data (Wave File and AIFF File) that is saved to USB
flash memory can be loaded and as “Waveform.”
Example: [PERFORMANCE]  [EDIT]  Part selection 
Element selection  [Osc/Tune]  “New Waveform”
Motion Seq*
Internal data
Live Set
Uitlity
Settings
Sound
Quick Setup
Audio I/O
MIDI I/O
Advanced
System
Contents
Load
Store / Save
Data Utility
Tempo Settings
Effect Switch
A specified Sequence data in a file that is saved to the
dedicated area in the User Memory as an “Motion Seq”
type can be individually selected and loaded to the
instrument.
Example: [PERFORMANCE]  [EDIT]  Part selection 
ELEMENT/OPERATOR [COMMON]  [Motion Seq] 
[Lane]  “Load Sequence”
NOTE Files with an asterisk (*) are not displayed when you call up this display from the Utility display.
Parent Folder Name
Current Folder Name
Indicates the Parent Folder name and the current selected Folder Name. Once you touch the Parent Folder
Name, the Folder becomes the currently selected folder.
Free Storage
Indicates the free space and the full space of the selected storage area.
This parameter differs depending on the Content Type.
Folder/File Select
Indicates Folders/Files in the selected Folder.
Sort (Sort Order)
Determines the Sort Order of the Files in “File Select.”
Settings: Name, Size, Date, Number
Name: Sorts by name. When the lower arrow is displayed, the List is arranged in ascending order (A to Z). When the
upper arrow is displayed, the List is arranged in descending order.
Size: Sorts in order of data size. When the lower arrow is displayed, the List is arranged in ascending order (small to
big.) When the upper arrow is displayed, the List is arranged in opposite order. This is not available for “Motion Seq,”
“Song,” and “Song&Perf” type Files.
Date: Sorts in order of storing. When the lower arrow is displayed, the List is arranged in descending order (newer to
older). When the upper arrow is displayed, the List is arranged in ascending order. This is available only for “Motion
Seq,” “Song,” and “Song&Perf” type Files.
Number: Sorts in order of Content Number. This is available only for “Song” and “Song&Perf” type Files.
Page (Page Select)
When Files in “File Select” are displayed in multiple pages, you will need to use this button to scroll through
the pages.
Job (Job Switch)
Determines whether the Job function is active (On) or not (Off.) When this parameter is turned on, touching
the File/Folder/Content in “File Select” calls up the menu to select “Rename” or “Delete.”
Touching the currently connected USB device calls up the menu to select “Format.”
Settings: Off, On
MONTAGE Reference Manual
175
Reference
Performance
Edit
Search
Utility
Live Set
Uitlity
Compatible with the MOTIF XF6/MOTIF XF7/MOTIF XF8 data
The following data can be loaded to MONTAGE6/MONTAGE7/MONTAGE8 among all MOTIF XF6/MOTIF
XF7/MOTIF XF8 data. Please note that the data is loaded as “User File” or “Library File.”
Also you can switch the Content Type between User file and Library file.
Settings
Sound
Quick Setup
File Type on MOTIF XF
Extension on MOTIF XF
Contents
Audio I/O
All
.X3A
User Voice, User Arpeggio, User Waveform
MIDI I/O
AllVoice (All Voice)
.X3V
User Voice, User Waveform
AllArp (All Arpeggio)
.X3G
User Arpeggio
AllWaveform (All Waveform)
.X3W
User Waveform
Advanced
System
Contents
Load
Store / Save
Store/Save
Data Utility
Tempo Settings
From the Store/Save display you can store Files and data.
Operation
Effect Switch
[UTILITY]  [Contents]  [Store / Save] or
Press the [STORE] button
Parent Folder Name
Current Folder Name
Free Storage
File select
Content Type
You can store all data or the specified data to the instrument or USB flash memory. This parameter
determines which specific data will be stored/saved.
The editable setting value differs depending on how you arrive at this display.
Settings: The Content Types which can be stored/saved are as follows.
File Types
Device Type Extension
Description
Performance
Internal data
Data can be stored to the dedicated area in the User
Memory as a “Performance” (page 22).
MONTAGE Reference Manual
176
Reference
Performance
Edit
Search
Utility
File Types
Device Type Extension
Description
User File
File
Data that is stored to the dedicated area in the User
Memory can be saved to USB flash memory.
Data saved as “User File” is as follows.
• Performance
• Arpeggio
• Motion Sequence
• Curve
• Live Set
• Micro Tuning
• Waveform
• Utility Settings
• Quick Setup
Library File
File
.mid File
File
Motion Seq*
Internal data
.X7U
.X7L
.MID
Data that is stored to the dedicated area in the User
Memory can be saved to USB flash memory.
Data saved as “Library File” is as follows.
• Performance
• Arpeggio
• Motion Sequence
• Curve
• Live Set
• Micro Tuning
• Waveform
Live Set
Uitlity
Settings
Sound
Quick Setup
Audio I/O
MIDI I/O
Advanced
System
Contents
Load
Store / Save
Data Utility
Tempo Settings
Effect Switch
MIDI data that is stored to the dedicated area in the
User Memory (page 22) can be saved as a Standard
MIDI File (SMF only in format 0) to USB flash memory.
Data can be stored as “Motion Seq” to the dedicated
area in the User Memory.
Example: [PERFORMANCE]  [EDIT]  Part selection
 ELEMENT/OPERATOR [COMMON]  [Motion Seq]
 [Lane]  “Edit Sequence” to call up “Motion
Sequence Edit”  “Store Sequence”
NOTE Files with an asterisk (*) are not displayed when you call up this display from the Utility display.
Parent Folder Name
Current Folder Name
Indicates the parent folder name and the current selected folder name. Once you touch the Parent Folder
Name, the Folder becomes the currently selected folder.
Free Storage
Indicates the free space and the full space of the selected storage area. This parameter differs depending
on the Content Type.
Folder/File Select
Indicates folders/files in the selected folder.
Sort (Sort Order)
Determines the sort order of the files in “File Select.”
Settings: Name, Size, Date
Name: Sorts by name. When the lower arrow is displayed, the List is arranged in ascending order (A to Z). When the
upper arrow is displayed, the list is arranged in descending order.
Size: Sorts in order of data size. When the lower arrow is displayed, the List is arranged in ascending order (small to
big.) When the upper arrow is displayed, the List is arranged in opposite order. This is not available for
“Performance” and “Motion Seq” type files.
Date: Sorts in order of storing. When the lower arrow is displayed, the List is arranged in descending order (newer to
older). When the upper arrow is displayed, the List is arranged in ascending order. This is available only for
“Performance” and “Motion Seq” type files.
Page (Page Select)
When files in “File Select” are displayed in multiple pages, you will need to use this button to scroll through
the pages.
MONTAGE Reference Manual
177
Reference
Performance
Edit
Search
Utility
Live Set
Uitlity
Job (Job Switch)
Determines whether the Job function is active (On) or not (Off.) When this parameter is turned on, touching
the File/Folder/Content in “File Select” calls up the menu to select “Rename” or “Delete.”
Touching the currently connected USB device calls up the menu to select “Format.”
Also you can create a new folder when storing a file.
Settings: Off, On
Settings
Sound
Quick Setup
Audio I/O
MIDI I/O
Advanced
Data Utility
System
From the Data Utility display you can control Files and data in the User Memory.
Contents
Load
Operation
[UTILITY]  [Contents]  [Data Utility]
Store / Save
Data Utility
 Folder List
Current Folder Name
Tempo Settings
Effect Switch
Folder select
Current Folder Name
Indicates the Current Folder Name.
Job (Job Switch)
Determines whether the Job function is active (On) or not (Off). This parameter is available only for the
“Waveform” folder on this display. When the parameter is turned on, touching “Waveform” folder calls
up the menu to select “Optimize.”
Settings: Off, On
Folder Select
Indicates the Content Types in the User Memory as folders. Touching the Folder opens it.
• Arp (Arpeggio)
• Library
• Live Set
• Motion Seq
• Performance
• Song
• Waveform
Page (Page Select)
When folders in “Folder Select” are displayed in multiple pages, you will need to use this button to
scroll through the pages.
MONTAGE Reference Manual
178
Reference
Performance
Edit
Search
Utility
 When the selected Folder is opened
Parent Folder Name
Live Set
Uitlity
Current Folder Name
Free Storage
Settings
Sound
Quick Setup
Audio I/O
MIDI I/O
Advanced
System
Contents
Load
Store / Save
Data Utility
Tempo Settings
Effect Switch
File Select
Parent Folder Name
Current Folder Name
Indicates the parent folder name and the current selected folder name. Touching the parent folder name
returns to the folder list view.
Free Storage
Indicates the free space and the full space of the selected storage area. This parameter differs depending
on the Content Type.
File Select
Indicates Files in the selected Folder. The Job function is always available in this display. Touching the File/
Content in “File Select” calls up the menu to select “Rename” or “Delete.” (“Rename” is not available for
the Files in “Library” type Folder.)
Sort (Sort Order)
Determines the Sort Order of the Files in “File Select.”
Settings: Name, Size, Date, Number
Name: Sorts by name. When the lower arrow is displayed, the List is arranged in ascending order (A to Z). When the
upper arrow is displayed, the List is arranged in descending order.
Size: Sorts in order of data size. When the lower arrow is displayed, the List is arranged in ascending order (small to
large). When the upper arrow is displayed, the List is arranged in opposite order. This is available only for “Library”
type Contents.
Date: Sorts in order of storing. When the lower arrow is displayed, the List is arranged in descending order (newer to
older). When the upper arrow is displayed, the List is arranged in ascending order. This is not available for “Arp” and
“Library” type Contents.
Number: Sorts in order of Content Number. This is available only for “Arp,” “Song,” and “Waveform” type Contents.
Page (Page Select)
When Files in “File Select” are displayed in multiple pages, you will need to use this button to scroll through
the pages.
MONTAGE Reference Manual
179
Reference
Performance
Edit
Search
Utility
Live Set
Uitlity
Tempo Settings
Settings
From the Tempo Settings display you can set parameters related to Tempo and Synchronization.
Sound
Quick Setup
Operation
[UTILITY]  [Tempo Settings], [SHIFT] + [ENTER], or
Touch the TEMPO SETTING icon
Audio I/O
MIDI I/O
TEMPO SETTING icon
Advanced
System
Contents
Load
Store / Save
Data Utility
Tempo Settings
Effect Switch
Tempo
Determines the Performance tempo. This parameter is not available when the “MIDI Sync” is set to “MIDI”
or “A/D In” and the instrument is synchronized to an external device (“EX. Tempo” is displayed instead of
the setting value.)
Settings: 5 – 300
Knob Flash (Super Knob LED Switch)
Determines whether the flashing of the Super Knob is turned on or off.
Settings: Off, On
Tap Tempo
Allows you to tap the desired tempo by touching this parameter or by moving the cursor to this parameter
and pressing (tapping) the [ENTER] button on the panel.
This parameter is not displayed when the “MIDI Sync” is set to “MIDI” and the instrument is synchronized
to an external device.
NOTE When “MIDI Sync” is set to “A/D In,” the tempo search starts by touching this parameter.
MIDI Sync
Determines parameters related to MIDI clock and synchronization.
Determines whether Arpeggio/Motion Sequencer/Song playback will be synchronized to the instrument’s
internal clock, an external MIDI clock, or the Audio signal input from the A/D INPUT [L/MONO]/[R] jacks.
Settings: Internal, MIDI, A/D In
Internal: Synchronization to internal clock. You can use this setting when this tone generator is to be used alone or
as the master clock source for other equipment.
MIDI: Synchronization to a MIDI clock received from an external MIDI instrument via MIDI. Use this setting when the
external sequencer is to be used as master.
A/D In: Synchronization to the tempo of the Audio signal received via the A/D INPUT [L/MONO]/[R] jacks.
Clock Out
Determines whether MIDI clock messages will be transmitted or not.
Settings: Off, On
MONTAGE Reference Manual
180
Reference
Performance
Edit
Search
Utility
Mode (Click Mode)
Determines the click sound (metronome) that is used during recording or playback.
Settings: Off, Rec, Rec/Play, Always
Off: The click will not sound.
Rec: The click will sound during Song recording only.
Rec/Play: The click will sound during Song recording and playback.
Always: The click will always sound.
Live Set
Uitlity
Settings
Sound
Quick Setup
Audio I/O
MIDI I/O
Precount (Click Pre-count)
Advanced
Determines the number of count-in measures provided before recording actually starts after pressing the
[R] (Play) button while the Song recording.
System
Settings: Off (Recording starts as soon as the [R] (Play) button is pressed), 1meas – 8meas
NOTE Since the click sound is created with the internal tone generator, using click playback affects the overall
polyphony of the instrument.
Contents
Load
Store / Save
Data Utility
Volume (Click Volume)
Determines the click sound volume.
Settings: 0 – 127
Tempo Settings
Effect Switch
Beat (Click Beat)
Determines which beats the metronome click will sound.
Settings: 1/16 (16th notes), 1/8 (8th notes), 1/4 (quarter notes), 1/2 (half notes), Whole (whole notes)
Type (Click Type)
Determines the click sound type.
Settings: 1 – 10
Sync Quantize (Sync Quantize Value)
Determines the actual timing at which the next Arpeggio playback starts when you trigger it while the
Arpeggio of multiple Parts is played back. When set to “off,” the next Arpeggio starts as soon as you
trigger it. The displayed number indicates the resolution in clocks.
Settings: Off, 60 (32nd note), 80 (16th note triplet), 120 (16th note), 160 (8th note triplet), 240 (8th note), 320 (1/4 note triplet),
480 (1/4 note)
Click Out (Click Output Select)
Determines the specified output for the “Click.”
Settings: MainL&R, AsgnL&R, USB1&2…USB29&30, AsgnL, AsgnR, USB1…USB30
MainL&R: Outputs in stereo (two channels) to the OUTPUT [L/MONO]/[R] jacks.
AsgnL&R: Outputs in stereo (two channels) to the ASSIGNABLE OUTPUT [L]/[R] jacks.
USB1&2…USB29&30: Outputs in stereo (Channels 1&2 – 29&30) to the [USB TO HOST] terminal.
AsgnL: Outputs in mono (one channel) to the ASSIGNABLE OUTPUT [L] jack.
AsgnR: Outputs in mono (one channel) to the ASSIGNABLE OUTPUT [R] jack.
USB1 – 30: Outputs in mono (Channels 1 – 30) to the [USB TO HOST] terminal.
MONTAGE Reference Manual
181
Reference
Performance
Edit
Search
Utility
Live Set
Uitlity
Effect Switch
Settings
From the Effect Switch display you can make Effect Bypass settings. None of the settings made on this
display will be stored. When the instrument is restarted, the parameter values are also initialized.
Operation
Sound
Quick Setup
Audio I/O
[UTILITY]  [Effect Switch] or
Touch the EFFECT icon
MIDI I/O
Advanced
EFFECT icon
System
Contents
Load
Store / Save
Data Utility
Tempo Settings
Effect Switch
Insertion FX (Insertion Effect Switch)
Determines whether the Insertion Effect is active or not.
Settings: Off, On
System FX (System Effect Switch)
Determines whether the System Effect is active or not.
Settings: Off, On
Master FX (Master Effect Switch)
Determines whether the Master Effect is active or not.
Settings: Off, On
MONTAGE Reference Manual
182
Reference
Performance
Edit
Search
Utility
Live Set
Live Set
Live Set
Live Set
Live Set is a list in which Performances can be freely arranged. Up to 16 Performances can be selected
from the Preset Live Sets and arranged over a single page—making it easy to call up and play your
favorite Performances. For basic instructions on Live Set, see the Owner’s Manual.
Edit
Register
Live Set
From the Live Set display you can call up the registered Performances.
Operation
Press the [LIVE SET] button, or
Touch the LIVE SET icon
Performance List
Current Performance Name
Current Slot Name
LIVE SET icon
Performance Attribute
Bank (Live Set Bank Select)
Determines the Live Set Bank.
Settings: Preset, User 1 – 8 (default), Library Name (when the Library file is read)
Page (Live Set Page Select)
Determines the Live Set Page.
Settings: Live Set page 1 – 16 (default)
Performance List
Indicates the Performances registered in the selected Live Set.
Category Search
Calls up the Performance Category Search display (page 161).
Current Performance Name
Indicates the selected Performance Name registered in the selected slot.
Current Slot Name
Indicates the selected Slot Name.
Performance Attribute
Indicates the Performance Attribute registered in the selected Slot.
MONTAGE Reference Manual
183
Reference
Performance
Edit
Search
Utility
Live Set Edit (Edit)
From the Live Set Edit display you can edit the Live Sets (User Bank only).
Live Set
Live Set
Live Set
Edit
Operation
[LIVE SET]  User Bank selection  [EDIT]
Register
 When the Slot to which a Performance has been registered is selected
Performance List
Bank (Live Set Bank Name)
Enters the desired name for the selected Live Set Bank. The names can contain up to 20 characters.
Touching the parameter calls up the input character display.
Page (Live Set Page Name)
Enters the desired name of the selected Live Set Page. The names can contain up to 20 characters.
Touching the parameter calls up the input character display.
Done
Touching this parameter finishes the Live Set Editing and returns to the Live Set display.
Performance List
Indicates the Performances registered in the selected Live Set.
Delete
Deletes the Performance from the selected Slot.
Slot Name
Enters the desired name of the selected Slot. The names can contain up to 20 characters. Touching the
parameter calls up the input character display.
Performance (Performance Name)
Indicates the Performance Name in the selected Slot.
Color
Determines the Color of the selected Slot.
Settings: Black, Red, Yellow, Green, Blue, Azure, Pink, Orange, Purple, Sakura, Cream, Lime, Aqua, Beige, Mint, Lilac
Volume
Determines the volume of the Performance in the selected Slot.
MONTAGE Reference Manual
184
Reference
Performance
Edit
Search
Utility
Swap (Swap Switch)
Determines whether the Swap function is turned on or off. You can switch settings between Slots. For
instructions on the Swap function, see the Owner’s Manual.
Settings: Off, On
Live Set
Live Set
Live Set
Edit
Register
Copy (Copy Switch)
Determines whether the Copy function is turned on or off. You can copy the setting to another Slot.
Settings: Off, On
 When an empty Slot is selected
Add
Touching this button allows you to register the selected Performance in the Slot.
MONTAGE Reference Manual
185
Reference
Performance
Edit
Search
Utility
Live Set Register (Register)
From the Live Set Register display you can register Performances to the Live Set. For basic instructions on
Live Set Registering, see the Owner’s Manual.
Operation
Live Set
Live Set
Live Set
Edit
Register
[SHIFT] + [LIVE SET] (from any operation displays, other than Live Set)
Slot Select
Bank (Live Set Bank Select)
Determines the Live Set Bank for registering Performances. Preset Bank and Library Bank cannot be
selected for this parameter.
Settings: User 1 – 8 (default)
Page (Live Set Page Select)
Determines the Live Set Page for registering Performances.
Settings: Live Set Page 1 – 16 (default)
Slot Select
Determines the Slot for registering Performance. When the Slot containing the Performance is selected
and press the [ENTER] button (or touch the Slot again on the display), the Performance in the slot is
replaced with the currently selected Performance.
Settings: Slot 1 – 16
MONTAGE Reference Manual
186
Reference
Performance
Edit
Search
Utility
Live Set
iPhone/iPad connection
Connecting an iPhone or iPad
NOTE In order to eliminate the risk of noise from other communication when using this instrument with an iPad or
iPhone app, be sure to turn on Airplane Mode and then turn on Wi-Fi.
NOTICE
Be sure to place your iPad or iPhone on a stable surface to prevent it from falling over and being damaged.
Apps compatible with the MONTAGE provide many more convenient, enjoyable ways to use this musical
instrument.
For details on how to connect the devices, refer to the “iPhone/iPad Connection Manual,” which is
available from the Yamaha web site.
NOTE For audio signal transfer, refer to the connection using Lightning to USB Camera Adapter.
Details of compatible smart devices and apps can be found on the following page from the Yamaha web
site.
http://www.yamaha.com/kbdapps/
Yamaha Web Site (English only)
http://www.yamahasynth.com/
Yamaha Downloads
http://download.yamaha.com/
Manual Development Department
© 2016 Yamaha Corporation
Published 03/2016 MW-A0
MONTAGE Reference Manual
187
Download PDF

advertising